JP6534431B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to one for displaying a decorative symbol in a plurality of display areas.

  In the conventional gaming machine, the variation display of the identification symbol is performed in the identification symbol display device on condition that the game medium such as the game ball launched on the game board passes through the predetermined passing area such as the starting opening, There is a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player by the stop display of the displayed identification symbol in a specific mode.

  In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the first identification symbol displayed on the first identification symbol display device and the second identification symbol displayed on the second identification symbol display device are simultaneously changed and displayed. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, the variation display of the first identification symbol is performed when the game medium passes the first passage area, and the variation display of the second identification symbol is performed when the game medium passes the second passage area. I do. Further, in the gaming machine described above, the first decorative symbol is made to correspond to the variable indication and the stop indication of the first identification symbol in the display area of the display device different from the first identification symbol display device and the second identification symbol display device. The variable display and the stop display of the second decorative symbol are made to correspond to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification symbol.

  Therefore, after the game medium passes one of the passage areas and variation display of the identification symbol is started, when the game medium passes the other passage area, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol change simultaneously. In addition to being in the state of displaying, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in the state of being simultaneously changed and displayed. Then, one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, thereby shifting to the special game state.

  At this time, since the decorative symbol corresponding to one identification symbol stopped and displayed in the specific mode is also stopped and displayed in the specific embodiment, the player confirms the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the specific mode. It is possible to recognize transition to the special game state.

  By the way, the conventional game machine is provided with a movable member that can be varied as an operation on presentation, and the movable member appears on the display area of the display device that displays the decorative symbol or retracts from the display area. There are those that perform dynamic movable effects. Such a movable effect is executed when the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is a specific variation pattern, and is executed together with the variation display of the decorative symbol.

JP 2011-101747 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, that is, in the gaming machine in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are simultaneously variably displayed on a plurality of display areas of the display device, the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol are displayed. In a state in which the two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, for example, when the variation mode of one of the first decorative symbols is a specific variation mode, the movable member appears on the display area of the display device, and the other There is a problem that the second decorative symbol is covered and the second decorative symbol can not be visually recognized. As described above, when the other second decorative symbol can not be viewed, there is a possibility that the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol may not be known, and it becomes difficult to know whether or not to shift to the special gaming state.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing one of decorative symbols from becoming invisible when displaying a plurality of decorative symbols. Do.

Determining means (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) which determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state described later) advantageous to the player;
Identification symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 22 described later) which performs variable display of the first identification symbol according to the determination result of the determination means;
A first decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later);
Equipped with
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, a second decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3A 'shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means A third decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3B 'shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from any of the first decorative symbol display means and the second decorative symbol display means; Equipped with
When the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means move to a position overlapping with the first decorative symbol display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the display is made in the first decorative symbol display means The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means can display the decorative symbols that have been displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117 described later, the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ' , The decorative symbol of "777" corresponding to "7 ↓ 7" of the first decorative symbol 31 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3B '. "6 で き る 6" corresponding to "6 6 6" of the second decorative pattern 32 being displayed ", can be displayed a decorative pattern of" 676 "),
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means arrange the plurality of decorative symbols displayed in the first decorative symbol display means differently from the display in the first decorative symbol display means displayed in (for example, the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbol "7 ↓ 7" and "6 ↓ 6" is displayed is arranged laterally, in the sub-liquid crystal display device 3A ', the liquid crystal display device 3 decoration symbol which was displayed corresponding to "7 ↓ 7""7 ↓ 7" is displayed vertically in the sub liquid crystal display on the device 3B 'has been displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 "6 ↓ 6 The decorative symbols of "6 装飾 6" and "676" corresponding to “6” are displayed in the vertical direction) , the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are the first decorative symbol display When at least one decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the means To display the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display means (for example, in the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbols “7 ↓ 7” and “6 ↓ 6” are displayed) The variable display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3A 'as it is, and the variable display of "7 ↓ 7" displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 is taken over and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3B'. The variable display of "6 ↓ 6" displayed in 3 is taken over as it is and displayed) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible for a player to easily play a game even when the game has complicated playability by always displaying a clear determination result to the player. When the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are positioned in front of the first decorative symbol display means, the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display means is displayed as the second decorative symbol display It is possible to display the means and the third decorative symbol display means, thereby making it possible to prevent the visual recognition of the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing one of the decorative symbols from becoming invisible when the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed.

It is a front view of a game board in a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. It is the figure which expanded and showed the liquid crystal display device and its periphery in the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an enlarged view of the area | region (symbol display apparatus) enclosed with the dashed-two dotted line of FIG. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit (mainly a main control circuit) in a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit (mainly sub control circuit) in the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention. It is a figure showing a game flow in a pachinko game machine concerning the present invention. It is a figure which shows a normal symbol hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation time determination table. It is a figure which shows a chase time determination table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the chase time determination table. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the system timer interrupt processing performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the input detection process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the input detection process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol control processing performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol control processing performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol memory check process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol memory check process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol variation time determination processing performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol variation time management process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol variation time management process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol display time management process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the special game state start interval management process performed by the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during the 1st big winning a prize opening open performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during the 2nd big winning opening opening performed by the main control circuit. It is a flow chart for explaining the special game state end interval processing which is executed with the main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol game end processing performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol game end process performed by a main control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the main process performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the command analysis process performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the command analysis process performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the display control processing performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the audio | voice control processing performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the lamp | ramp control processing performed by a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the movable member control processing performed by a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of the 1st special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 1st special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the hit determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the 2nd special symbol in a modification. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation time determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the chase time determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol control processing performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol control processing performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol fluctuation time determination processing performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol variation time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol variation time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol indication time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol indication time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol display time management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit interval management process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit time 1st big winning a prize opening open process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process during small hit time 2nd big winning a prize opening being performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the small hit end interval process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 1st special symbol game end process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the 2nd special symbol game end process performed by a main control circuit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main CPU in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main CPU in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol control processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol control processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big winning opening open waiting time management processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flow chart which shows big winning opening opening processing performed in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the contact | finish end interval process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interrupt processing performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a time chart which concerns on operation of big winning a prize mouth in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the various determination table regarding the big hit in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special symbol variation patterns determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special symbol variation patterns determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special symbol variation patterns determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part in other embodiments. It is an explanatory view for explaining operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part in other embodiments. It is an explanatory view for explaining operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part in other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the contact | finish end interval process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the subcontrol circuit performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display area deletion process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows shutter combination article movement control processing performed in other embodiments. It is a time chart which concerns on operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part in other embodiments. It is a figure which shows the table for special symbol variation pattern determination in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the movable service initial position control process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a time chart concerning operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part and a special symbol in the modification of other embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a time chart concerning operation of a decorative symbol and a shutter part in a modification of other embodiments. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment, and a shutter part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment, and a shutter part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment, and a shutter part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation | movement of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment, and a shutter part. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for special symbol variation patterns determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the subcontrol circuit performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol forced stop process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the united production | presentation of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol change position determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle production of the decorative symbol in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle production of the decorative symbol in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the shuffle production of the decorative symbol in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern change process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of shuffle rendition of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of shuffle rendition of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of shuffle rendition of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of shuffle rendition of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of shuffle rendition of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for decorative symbol presentation pattern determination in other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table for additional display area determination in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the premise of the additional display effect in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display area addition pattern at the time of big hit in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display area addition pattern at the time of the loss in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decoration symbol in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decoration symbol in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation pattern change process performed in other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination process performed in other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating control of the additional display production of the decorative symbol in the modification of other embodiment.

  An embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Configuration of gaming machine]
First, the structure of a pachinko gaming machine will be described.

  A pachinko gaming machine has, in one example, a structure in which a glass door, a tray unit, a launcher, and a game board are supported by a base door. The base door supports the discharge unit and the substrate unit on the back side, and is fitted into the opening of the main body.

  The glass door is pivotally attached to the base door in an openable / closable manner. Speakers and lamps are disposed on the glass door.

  The tray unit is for storing gaming balls, and is disposed on the base door at the bottom of the glass door. This pan unit is configured as a unit in which a lower pan is integrated below the upper pan.

  The launcher is for launching the gaming ball stored in the upper tray into the gaming area. The launcher has a launch handle and is disposed at the lower right of the base door.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disposed in front of the base door so as to be located behind the protective glass in the glass door. The game board 10 has a game area 11 in which the released game balls can roll and flow.

  The game board 10 includes guide rails 12A and 12B, a first start opening 14A, a second start opening 14B, a pass gate 15, a first large winning opening 16A, a second large winning opening 16B, a first shutter 17A and a second shutter. 17B, a general winning opening 18, a symbol display device 2, a liquid crystal display device 3, movable members 4A and 4B, and a display decoration member 5 are provided.

  The guide rails 12A are arranged to surround the game area 11 in order to define the game area 11. The guide rails 12B are for guiding the game balls to the upper part of the game board 10 together with the guide rails 12A, and are disposed on the left side of the game board 10 inside the guide rails 12A.

  The game ball fired by the launch device flows downward toward the lower part of the game board 10 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail or the like driven into the game board 10. In this process, the game ball wins in the first starting opening 14A, the second starting opening 14B, the passing gate 15, the first large winning opening 16A, the second large winning opening 16B, or the general winning opening 18, and does not get a prize The game ball is discharged from the out port 19. The game ball flows mainly down the left side of the game area 11 because the launch force given to the game ball is small when the rotation angle of the launch handle is small, while the game ball when the rotation angle of the launch handle is large Because it has a large launch power, it flows down the right side of the game area 11 mainly. Generally, how to make the game ball flow down to the left of the game area 11 is called left, and how to make the game ball flow down to the right of the game area 11 is called right. In the present embodiment, it is configured to be suitable for right hitting in the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and left hitting in the other gaming states.

  The first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B trigger a big hit lottery on the condition that the game ball has won (passed), and the result of the big hit lottery is the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23 (see FIG. 3) to give an opportunity to be displayed.

  The first start port 14A is provided at a lower position of the liquid crystal display device 3. A first start opening ball sensor 141 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the first start opening 14A. When the gaming ball is detected by the first start entrance ball sensor 141 (see FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a preset number of gaming balls are via the payout opening. It is paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate. The result of the lottery for the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14A is displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 (see FIG. 3).

  The second start port 14B is provided immediately below the first start port 14A, and a second start port ball sensor 142 (see FIG. 4) is disposed behind the second start port 14B. When a game ball is detected by the second start entrance ball sensor 142 (see FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a preset number of game balls are sent via the payout opening. It is paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate. The result of the drawing for the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B is displayed in the second special symbol display device 23 (see FIG. 3).

  In the second start port 14B, the difficulty of winning is defined by a pair of blade members 143 as a normal motorized part. The pair of wing members 143 allow selection between an open state which allows winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B and a closed state which does not allow winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B. is there. These blade members 143 are pivoted in the left-right direction by an ordinary electric service combination solenoid 144 (see FIG. 4), and are configured as so-called electric tulips. The pair of blade members 143 is a predetermined symbol when the stop display (combination of lighting and extinguishing of the lamps 201 and 202 (see FIG. 3)) is performed with a predetermined symbol in the normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later. The game ball is open for a predetermined number of times, and the game ball is likely to be won in the second starting opening 14B.

  For example, in the normal symbol game, the hit probability in the low probability state (the normal gaming state after the time reduction end and the big hit gaming state) is, for example, 0/256 (see FIG. 7), and the pair of wing members 143 open. There is no. Therefore, in the low probability state, there is virtually no winning of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 14B, and a big hit lottery is performed only by the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 14A, and the game proceeds. On the other hand, the hit probability in the high probability state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time in the normal gaming state) is, for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7), and when it is won, the pair of blade members 143 The game ball is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B is permitted. Therefore, in the time saving game state, a big hit lottery is performed by the winning of the gaming balls to both the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B, and the game progresses. Here, the opening of the pair of wing members 143 for one hit game of the normal symbol game is, for example, one opening time of 1.3 seconds, and the total number of times of opening is three times. The winning count upper limit number to the second starting opening 14B for the hit game is, for example, eight.

  In addition, the ordinary electric character is not limited to the electric tulip which rotates the wing member 143 to the left and right, for example, a tongue member (bello) moves to the front and back of the game board 10 or turns to the front and back of the game board 10 It may be an open / close door (shutter) that moves to open and close the second start port 14B.

  The passage gate 15 gives an opportunity to perform an ordinary symbol lottery for opening the second starting opening 14B, and is provided at the left center position of the game board 10. A passing ball sensor 151 (see FIG. 4) is disposed in the passing gate 15, and a normal symbol lottery is performed when the passing ball sensor 151 detects the gaming ball. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20 (see FIG. 3) described later, a effect image for causing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 It may be done.

  The first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are portions opened in the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are vertically arranged at the lower right side of the game board 10 which is the right of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B. That is, the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are disposed at positions where winning can be made when hitting the right. A first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4) are provided in the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 are for counting the number of game balls paid to the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B, and When the winning of the gaming ball is confirmed in the second count sensor 162, a preset number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate via the payout opening.

  The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B control the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B in the open state or the closed state, and normally, the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning combination It is arranged to close the mouth 16B. The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are driven by a first large winning opening solenoid 171 and a second large winning opening solenoid 172 (see FIG. 4). The first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B are opened by the first large winning opening solenoid 171 and the second large winning opening solenoid 172 so that the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B. It is individually driven to change the state and the closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. The opening drive of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B is a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 described later This is performed when the gaming state has been shifted to the big hit gaming state, with the 221 or the second special symbol 231 being a predetermined stop display mode.

  The open state of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B by the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B is the count value (game ball) by the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 (see FIG. 4) Is maintained until the predetermined number (e.g., nine) is reached or the opening time passes a predetermined time (e.g., about 25 seconds). On the other hand, when the number of passing game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B reaches a predetermined time, the first large winning opening 16A or the second large winning opening The first shutter 17A or the second shutter 17B is driven to close the shutter 16B.

  In the big hit game state, opening and closing the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are repeated by driving the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B. The first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are alternately opened by alternately driving the first shutter 17A and the second shutter 17B. That is, in the big hit gaming state, at least one of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B is in the open state, and when one is in the open state, the other large The winning opening is closed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the residual ball monitoring process for the other big winning opening that is in the closed state when one is in the open state.

  Generally, in the big hit game state, the state where the big winning opening is opened is called "round game", from the end of the round game (after closing the big winning opening) to the start of the next round game (big winning The closed state of the big winning opening in the mouth) is called "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval".

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are alternately opened so that both are not closed (at least one is open). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is no "game between rounds" ("interval between rounds"), and it is possible to digest the big hit gaming state in a short time as compared with the prior art.

  The round game is counted as the number of rounds, such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round of the round game may be referred to as a first round (1R) and the second may be referred to as a second round (2R). In the present embodiment, the number of opening times of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B in the big hit gaming state is 15, 8 or 4 times (see FIGS. 9 and 11), but the number of opening times There are also 15 big hits that can be called "15R big hit", 8 big hits can be called "8R big hit", and 4 big hits can be called "4R big hit".

  The general winning opening 18 is a special feature that pays out a prescribed number of gaming balls on condition of winning of the gaming balls. Four general winning openings 18 are formed on the lower left side of the game board 10 which is the left of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B. That is, the general winning opening 18 is disposed at a position where it is possible to win when hitting left. At the rear of the general winning opening 18, a general winning opening entrance sensor 181 is provided, and the general winning opening entrance sensor 181 detects a winning of the gaming ball to the general winning opening 18. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 18, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate or the lower plate through the payout opening.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 is a normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol hold display device 21, a first special symbol display device 22, a second special symbol display device 23, a first special symbol hold The display device 24, the second special symbol holding display device 25, the first special symbol changing display lamp 26, and the second special symbol changing display lamp 27 are provided.

  The normal symbol display device 20 displays the lottery result for the "normal symbol game" which determines whether or not to open the second starting port 14B by driving the ordinary electric character (feather member 143 (see FIG. 1)). And includes two LED lamps 201 and 202. The two LED lamps 201 and 202 are arranged side by side, and are repeatedly turned on and off after repeated blinking. When the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the LED lamps 201 and 202 in the normal symbol display device 20 is in a predetermined mode, the blade members 143 (see FIG. 1) are driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and to the second starting port 14B. Allow winning of game balls.

  The normal symbol holding display device 21 displays the number of executable times of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol held by turning on or off the four LED lamps 211, 212, 213, 214. The four LED lamps 211, 212, 213, 214 are normally arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 201, 202 on the right side of the symbol display device 20. For example, when the number of reservations is “1”, the LED lamp 211 is turned on and the LED lamps 212, 213 and 214 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "2", the LED lamps 211 and 212 are turned on, and the LED lamps 213 and 214 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 211, 212 and 213 turn on and the LED lamp 214 turns off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 211, 212, 213, and 214 light.

  The first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23 show the results of the big hit lottery for the "special symbol game", and each include a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display device 22 performs variable display of the first special symbol 221 triggered by the start winning to the first starting opening 14A, and displays the big hit lottery result based on the winning to the first starting opening 14A It is. The second special symbol display device 23 performs variable display of the second special symbol 231 triggered by the start winning at the second starting opening 14B and displays the big hit lottery result based on the winning at the second starting opening 14B. It is. The variable display of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 is performed by repeatedly turning on / off (flashing) the seven segments constituting the seven-segment LED and eight elements of the dots individually. The result of the big hit lottery is displayed by a segment pattern formed by turning on / off of seven segments of the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 and eight elements of dots. Specifically, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23 (“A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, "G", "H", "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f", "g" and "h") with and without dots and seven segments “Dot + segment display A” is “A”, “dot + segment display B” is “B”, “dot + segment display C” is “C”, “dot + segment display D” Is "D", "dot + segment display E" is "E", "dot + segment display F" is "F", "dot + segment display G" is "G", "dot + segment display H" is " "H", "no dot + segment display A" is "a", "no dot + segment display B" is "b", "dot" + Segment display C is “c”, “no dot + segment display D” is “d”, “no dot + segment display E” is “e”, “no dot + segment display F” is “f”, “No dot + segment display G” is displayed as “g”, and “no dot + segment display H” is displayed as “h”.

  The first special symbol holding display 24 and the second special symbol holding display 25 respectively include four LED lamps 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, 254, and these LED lamps It displays the number of executable times (number of held items) of the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221, 231 held by turning on or turning off 241, 242, 243, 244, 251, 252, 253, 254. is there. The first and second special symbol holding displays 24 and 25 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. The display mode of the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding display device 24 and the second special symbol holding display device 25 is the same as the display mode of the number of holdings by the normal symbol holding display device 21.

  The first special symbol holding display device 24 and the second special symbol holding display device 25 enter the first or second start opening when the first or second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are fluctuatingly displayed. When the game ball is detected by the ball sensor 141, 142 (see FIG. 4), the execution (start) of the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221, 231 is suspended. In the case where the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 which has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first or second special symbol 221 or 231 which has been suspended is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first and second starting openings 14A and 14B The maximum number of pending displays of the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 due to entering the ball is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol 221 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol 221 being changed is of the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4) The first special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start storage in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the information of the first special symbol game for 4 times held is the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage It is stored as start memory in area (4). Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game, when held for four times, information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is the second special of the main RAM 62 (see FIG. 4) The information on the second special symbol game information stored for four times in the symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory and held is the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4 Is stored as start-up memory. Therefore, the number of prize holdings for both the first and second special symbols 221 and 231, that is, the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B, is a maximum of eight in total.

  In addition to the first and second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25, or in addition to the first and second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25, in the liquid crystal display device 3 described later, the first start It is also possible to display the suspension of winning on the opening 14A and the suspension of winning on the second starting opening 14B.

  The first special symbol changing display lamp 26 and the second special symbol changing display lamp 27 are disposed on the left side of the first or second special symbol holding display devices 24 and 25.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the liquid crystal display device 3 has a demonstration effect and a first starting opening 14A and a second starting opening 14B in addition to variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and various effects related to gaming. It displays the number of holding balls and the like for winning a game, and is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 10.

  The first decorative symbol 31 is subjected to variable display and stop display corresponding to variable display and stop display of the first special symbol 221 as identification information in the first special symbol display device 22 described later.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state, since the game ball can only be won in the first starting opening 14A, the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning in the first starting opening 14A. . Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the first decorative symbol 31 in the liquid crystal display device 3 is subjected to the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221.

  On the other hand, in the time saving game state (including the case of probability fluctuation gaming state + time short playing state), since the game balls can be won in both the first start opening 14A and the second start opening 14B, the first start The first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and stopped based on the winning on the mouth 14A, and the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed and stopped on the basis of the winning on the second start opening 14B. Therefore, in the time saving game state, the first decorative symbol 31 in the liquid crystal display device 3 is subjected to the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol 221. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 3 in the time saving game state, the second decorative symbol 32 is subjected to the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol 231.

  In the short game state (including probability fluctuation game state + time short game state), in the big hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 14B, usually a big hit (normal game state after the end of the big hit game state) The first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with three identical symbols (number “6” in the illustrated example) even when the second special symbol 231 is displayed in a variable manner when the player wins the jackpot) Then, the state displayed at the lower part of the liquid crystal display device 3 is maintained (second decorative symbol 32). Thus, it is suggested to the player that the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed that the player has usually won the jackpot.

  The stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 (the number “6” sequence) is maintained until the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed. At this time, when there is a win for the first start opening 14A or a hold for the variable display of the first start opening 14A, the first special symbol 221 is changed and displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 221 under such a condition is called "following" in the present embodiment. And, while the second special symbol 231 is fluctuatingly displayed, when the specific first special symbol 221 corresponding to the big hit (probability fluctuation big hit) accompanied by the transition to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is stopped and displayed , The normal jackpot corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is forcibly canceled (successful pursuit), and the processing of the probability fluctuation jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. As a result, when the big hit gaming state for the probability fluctuation big hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is ended, the big hit gaming state despite the fact that the normal big hit corresponding to the second special symbol 231 has been won first. After the end of the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state.

  As a display device for displaying the first decorative symbol 31, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT display may be used instead of or in addition to the liquid crystal display device 3. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the movable members 4A and 4B have predetermined timing, for example, when the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is variably displayed, at the time of advance notice effect, at pre-reading effect, special reach At the time of bifurcation, at the time of special reach development, at the time of revival production, at the time of big hit occurrence, or at the time of round promotion production of the big hit gaming state, it is movable.

  The movable member 4A simulates a character, and is disposed above the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4A is movable downward to near the center of the liquid crystal display device 3 and rotates at the center of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  The movable member 4 </ b> B imitates a cylinder and is disposed below the liquid crystal display device 3. The movable member 4B moves up and down or vibrates to the left and right. By causing the movable member 4B to cooperate with the effect of the liquid crystal display device 3, it is possible to perform an effect that the fireworks are launched from the movable member 4B. Of course, in the movable members 4A and 4B, in place of the firework, it is possible to produce effects in which a character or a number (decorative symbol, big hit expectation, number of times of pseudo run, etc.) pops out.

  The display decoration member 5 performs predetermined display such as numbers on the decoration member imitating a sphere. The display decoration member 5 incorporates a display unit 50 having two 7-segment LEDs 50A and 50B, and can display digital numbers. The display decoration member 5 functions as a countdown timer for a chance time (chassis time) capable of performing "chassis" (forced cancellation) of a normal big hit in the probability variation gaming state.

  Of course, in the display decoration member 5, in addition to the countdown of pursuit time, the degree of expectation for a big hit, the number of pseudo runs, the number of remaining games in the short game state (or the number of short games played), the special effect mode after the short Numbers such as counts may be displayed. As the display unit 50 in the display decoration member 5, another display means such as a dot matrix or a liquid crystal display device may be used.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a main control circuit 6 for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 7 for controlling an effect corresponding to the progress of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control circuit 6 includes a main CPU 60, a main ROM 61 (read only memory), a main RAM 62 (read / write memory), an initial reset circuit 63, a serial communication IC 64, and a reset clock pulse generation circuit 65. And connected to various devices and various switches.

  The main CPU 60 is connected to the main ROM 61 and the main RAM 62, and has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 61.

  The main ROM 61 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 60, for example, various programs in addition to a program for causing the main CPU 60 to execute the processing shown in FIGS. .

  The main RAM 62 has a function of storing values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 60. As a temporary storage area of the main CPU 60, another readable and writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 62.

  The initial reset circuit 63 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The serial communication IC 64 transmits a command from the main CPU 60 to the sub control circuit 7, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 65 is for generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later, and is connected to the main CPU 60.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 6 include, in addition to the symbol display device 2, sensors, solenoids, and a backup clear switch 80.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbol display device 2 performs variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game as described above. The normal symbol display device 20, the normal symbol hold display device 21, and the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. The first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23, the first special symbol hold display device 24, the second special symbol hold display device 25, the first special symbol during change indicator lamp 26, and the second special A symbol change indicator lamp 27 is included.

  The sensors shown in FIG. 4 include a first count sensor 161, a second count sensor 162, a general winning opening ball entry sensor 181, a passing ball sensor 151, a first start opening entrance ball sensor 141, and a second start opening entrance ball sensor 142 are included. The first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when the game ball passes a predetermined area of the first and second big winning openings 16A, 16B. is there. The general winning a prize entrance sensor 181 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when the gaming ball is won in the general winning opening 18. The passing ball sensor 151 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 15. The first start entrance ball sensor 141 and the second start entrance ball sensor 142 supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 6 when the game ball is won in the first and second start ports 14A and 14B. It is a thing.

  The solenoids include an ordinary electric role solenoid 144, a first large winning opening solenoid 171, and a second large winning opening solenoid 172. The normal motor combination solenoid 144 is for driving a pair of blade members 143 as a common electric combination in order to allow winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B. The first large winning opening solenoid 171 is for driving the first shutter 17A in order to open the first large winning opening 16A. The second big winning opening solenoid 172 is for driving the second shutter 17B in order to open the second big winning opening 16B.

  The back clear switch 80 clears backup data at the time of power interruption or the like according to the operation of the game arcade manager.

  A payout / firing control circuit 81 is further connected to the main control circuit 6. The dispensing and firing control circuit 81 is connected to the dispensing device 82 and the dispensing device 83, and controls the dispensing device 82 and the dispensing device 83. Further, a card unit 84 is connected to the payout / firing control circuit 81. The card unit 84 can be transmitted and received to and from the ball lending operating unit 85 which outputs a signal for requesting the card unit 84 to lend a game ball by the operation of the player. The payout / firing control circuit 81 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 6 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82. The payout device 82 pays out the game ball. The payout / firing control circuit 81 further supplies power to the firing solenoid according to the turning angle when the firing handle of the launching device 83 is gripped by the player and turned clockwise. , Control the firing of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 7 is connected to the main control circuit 6 via a command input port (not shown), and is configured to be supplied with a command from the main control circuit 6. . The sub control circuit 7 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6, and the sub CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, movable member control circuit 74, display control circuit 75. , An audio control circuit 76, a lamp control circuit 77, and a button control circuit 78.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 72. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the sub control circuit 7 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 6.

  The program ROM 72 stores a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 71, for example, various tables in addition to a program for causing the sub CPU 71 to execute the processing shown in FIGS. ing. The programs and various tables may be stored in another storage medium readable by a computer instead of or in addition to the program ROM 72. As a storage medium in this case, for example, a hard disk drive, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge can be used. In addition, the above-described program and table may be downloaded from a server outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the power is turned on, and may be recorded in the work RAM 73.

  The work RAM 73 stores various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71. As a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71, other readable and writable storage media can be used instead of the work RAM 73 or in addition to the work RAM 73.

  The movable member control circuit 74 is for driving and controlling the movable members 4A and 4B as effects when the first and second special symbols 221 and 231 are fluctuatingly displayed, or as effects in the big hit gaming state. .

  The display control circuit 75 controls the display on the display decoration member 5 and the liquid crystal display device 3 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71. The display control circuit 75 controls the display decoration member 5 so as to control the display decoration member 5 to variably display or stop a predetermined digital number.

  The display control circuit 75 also buffers an image data processor (VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, and image data in order to display an image on the liquid crystal display 3. A frame buffer, a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal, and the like are included. The display control circuit 75 temporarily stores, in the frame buffer, image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative symbol image data, background image data, and various effect image data.

  The display control circuit 75 further supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 3 at a predetermined timing. The liquid crystal display 3 displays an image based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The voice control circuit 76 is for performing control relating to voice generated from the speaker 761 and includes, for example, a sound source IC for controlling voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal. (AMP) is included. The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 761, for example, notification, effect, and error notification. The sound source IC can select one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM according to an audio generation instruction supplied from the sub CPU 71. The sound source IC can also read selected audio data from the audio data ROM, convert the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supply the audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 761.

  The lamp control circuit 77 is for controlling the lamp 771 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal and a decoration data ROM and the like storing a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns. It is configured. The lamp 771 performs various notifications such as, for example, effects and notifications. The button control circuit 78 is for controlling the button 781 including an operation button and a jog dial, and is configured of an interface circuit or the like for inputting an operation signal from the button 781. The button 781 is used, for example, for the player to perform a pressing operation, a rotating operation, and the like at the time of rendering.

  FIG. 6 shows a state in which the main control circuit 6 supplies a signal to the sub control circuit 7 and the sub control circuit 7 can not supply a signal to the main control circuit 6, but the sub control The circuit 7 may be configured to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 6.

[Game flow]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state transitions between the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

  The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the big hit winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), and is shifted when the big hit gaming state by the normal big hit is ended. In the present embodiment, 50% of the big hit is usually a big hit (see FIGS. 9 and 11).

  The probability fluctuation gaming state is a gaming state in which the big hit winning probability is a high probability (for example, 1/30) and shifts when the big hit gaming state due to the probability fluctuation big hit is ended. In the present embodiment, 50% of the big hit is a probability fluctuation big hit (see FIGS. 9 and 11). Further, in the probability variation gaming state in the present invention, the hitting probability in the normal symbol game is a high probability (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)).

  The special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is a gaming state in which the first and second big winning openings 16A and 16B are opened, and a lottery is won in the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the first or second special The symbols 221 and 231 have specific modes (derived special symbols “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “a”, “b” , “C”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, “h” (see FIG. 9 and FIG. 11)) and then shift. The special gaming state is set to 4R, 8R, and 15R.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the big hit gaming state is finished by digesting a predetermined number of rounds, it shifts to either the normal gaming state or the probability fluctuation gaming state different in the big hit lottery probability, but shifted to any gaming state It may be in the time saving game state until it digests the predetermined number of predetermined games while giving a notification that it does not know. Here, the time saving game state is a high probability of hitting in a normal symbol game (for example, 255/256 (see FIG. 7)), and opening of the wing members 143 results in winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B. It is in a supported state.

  The number of time saving games is up to the next winning of the big hit lottery when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state, and becomes any of 20 times, 30 times and 50 times when transitioning to the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the wing member 143 is operated even if the number of times of game which is the maximum value set as the time-saving game number of times exceeds 50, the wing member 143 is in operation, 50 special symbol games after the big hit gaming state ends is a probability It is determined that it is a special symbol game by the fluctuation game state, and it is a probability fluctuation game state in which the short time game state continues until the jackpot lottery is won next regardless of the effect or the notification of the liquid crystal display device 3 etc. Determine. Further, there is also a case where it is informed that it is the probability fluctuation gaming state from the first special symbol game after the big hit gaming state is ended. In that case, it is determined that it is a probability fluctuation gaming state in which the short time gaming state continues until the jackpot lottery is won next time.

  When the short time game state is finished by digesting the predetermined number of time short games, the special effect mode is entered for the effect. The special effect mode is, for example, an effect in a normal gaming state in which 15 games continue. In this special effect mode, reach effect is unlikely to occur, but if reach occurs, an effect with a high hit probability is performed.

[Normal table hit judgment table]
FIG. 7 shows the hit determination table of the normal symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data regarding the hit determination table of the normal symbol is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The hit determination table for the normal symbol is referred to when performing the lottery for the hit of the normal symbol based on the acquired random number triggered by the passage ball sensor 151 detecting that the gaming ball has passed through the passage gate 15 is there. In the random lottery of normal symbols, the lottery random number range is 0 to 255, and the collision probability in the low probability state (the normal gaming state after the time reduction end and the big hit gaming state) is 0/256. Therefore, in the low probability state, the player does not win a hit, and in fact, there is no winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 14B. On the other hand, the hit probability in the high probability state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time in the normal gaming state) is 255/256, and it is easy to win a hit.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 8 shows the hit determination table of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data regarding the hit determination table of the first special symbol is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The hit determination table for the first special symbol is based on the acquired random number, triggered by the fact that the first start opening ball sensor 141 detects that the gaming ball has won the first start opening 14A. It is referred to when making a lottery. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the random number in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the random number in the probability variation gaming state is 10 of “0” to “9”. Is one. Therefore, the hit probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. When the random number is acquired, after the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped, the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is entered. On the other hand, when a random number other than the hit random number (lost random number) is acquired, there is no transition of the gaming state after the fluctuation of the first special symbol 221 is stopped.

[Pattern determination table of the first special symbol]
FIG. 9 shows a symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data regarding the symbol determination table of the first special symbol is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol acquires a big hit random number in the random lottery of the first special symbol 221 (“0” in the normal gaming state, “0” to “9” in the probability variation gaming state (FIG. 8) Reference) is referred to). In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, the lottery random number range is 0-5. In the symbol determination of the normal gaming state, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “A” at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol at “8R probability variation big hit” If the acquired random number is "2", the special symbol derived in the 4R probability variation big hit is "C", and the acquired random number is "3" to "5", the derived special symbol is "D" in the 4R normal big hit It corresponds to In the symbol judgment of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired random number is "0", the derived special symbol is "E" at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is "1," the derived special symbol at 8R probability variation big hit When "F", acquisition random number is "2", the special symbol derived by 4R probability variation big hit is "G", and when acquisition random number is "3" to "5", 4R normal jackpot derived special symbol is "H It corresponds to ".

  When the acquired random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the time-saving game from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state to the next winning of the special symbol in the big hit lottery It becomes a state. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is established. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is established. In the case where the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is "5", the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is attained.

[Collision judgment table for the second special symbol]
FIG. 10 shows the hit determination table of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data on the hit determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The hit determination table for the second special symbol 231 is referred to when performing the second special symbol lottery triggered by the fact that the second starting opening ball sensor 142 detects that the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 14B. It is In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the hit random number in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the random number in the probability variation gaming state is ten of “0” to “9”. is there. Therefore, the hit probability in the normal gaming state is a low probability of 1/300, and the hit probability in the probability variation gaming state is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300). When the big hit random number is acquired, after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol 231, it shifts to the special game state (big hit game state). On the other hand, when a non-big-hit random number (lost random number) is acquired, there is no transition of the gaming state after the change of the second special symbol 231 is stopped.

[Symbol determination table of the second special symbol]
FIG. 11 shows a symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data on the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 is stored in the main ROM 61.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 acquires a big hit random number in the random lottery of the second special symbol 231 (“0” in the normal gaming state and “0” to “9” in the probability variation gaming state (see FIG. Refer to 10))). In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, the random number range is 0-5. In the symbol determination in the normal gaming state, when the acquired random number is "0", the derived special symbol is "a" at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is "1," the derived special symbol at 8R probability variation big hit " b) When the acquired random number is "2", the derived special symbol is "c" at 4R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is "3" to "5", the derived special symbol is "d" at 4R normal big hit It corresponds to In the symbol judgment of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “e” at 15R probability variation big hit, and when the acquired random number is “1”, the derived special symbol is at 8R probability variation big hit In the case of "f", the acquisition random number is "2", the derivation special symbol is "g" at 4R probability variation big hit, in the case of acquisition random number "3" to "5", the derivation special symbol is "h" at 4R normal big hit It corresponds to

  When the acquired random numbers in the symbol determination lottery are “0”, “1”, and “2”, the time-saving game from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state to the next winning of the special symbol in the big hit lottery It becomes a state. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is established. When the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is established. In the case where the acquired random number in the symbol determination lottery is "5", the time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is attained.

[Variation time determination table]
FIG. 12 shows a variation time determination table of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data on the fluctuation time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61. In FIG. 12, the normal gaming state A, the normal gaming state B, and the probability fluctuation gaming state are classified for convenience, not the division of the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state. Here, the “normal gaming state A” is a low probability (normal gaming state) with a big hit winning probability, and a non-short game state, and the “normal gaming state B” is a low probability of a big hitting winning probability (normal gaming state) It means that there is a time-saving game state.

  The variation time determination table is the first based on the derived special symbol determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 of FIG. 9 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of FIG. 11 and the random number for variation time determination. The variation time of the special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is to be determined. The range of the fluctuation time determination random number is 0-2.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the normal gaming state A (no time reduction), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol hits per lottery When the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 50 seconds when it is “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. 60 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", that is, when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "normal big hit", when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the variation time is 40 seconds, " When it is 1 ", the fluctuation time is 55 seconds, and when it is" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the random drawing of the special symbol is "loss", the variation time is 10 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0". In the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the normal gaming state B (with time reduction), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol hits per lottery When the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds when it is “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. 40 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", that is, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is "normal big hit", when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the variation time is 25 seconds, " When it is 1 ", the fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and when it is" 2 ", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is "loss", when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds, "1" In the case of “”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the probability fluctuation gaming state, the derivation special symbol is “E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”, that is, the result of the lottery for hitting the special symbol “probability” In the case of "fluctuation big hit", when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 25 seconds. . If the derived special symbol is "H", that is, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "normal big hit" (except for the normal big hit with the second special symbol 231 (excluding the derived symbol "h"), the acquired fluctuation time When the determination random number is “0”, the variation time is 20 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 25 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the random drawing of the special symbol is "loss", the variation time is 5 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0". In the case of “”, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  If the derived special symbol is "h", that is, if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is "normal big hit", the fluctuation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. Do.

[Pulse time determination table]
FIG. 13 shows a pursuit time determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 2. This pursuit time determination table is referred to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “normally a big hit”. Data on the pursuit time determination table is stored in the main ROM 61, and the pursuit time is determined based on the special symbol of the previous hit and the acquired random number for determination of fluctuation time (random number range 0 to 2).

  Here, the “special symbol” is the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the probability fluctuation big hit that has triggered the transition to the current probability fluctuation state. That is, the pursuit time is specified in accordance with the special symbol (the number of big hit rounds) that has become the trigger of transition to the probability fluctuation state.

  The "following time" is a fluctuation time when the jackpot lottery result is usually a jackpot in the probability fluctuation gaming state shifted after the end of the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) after the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, during the pursuit time, even while the second special symbol 231 is fluctuatingly displayed, the lottery result of the first special symbol 221 triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14A Based on the first special symbol 221 repeatedly perform variable display / stop display. That is, in the variable display of the second special symbol 231 during the pursuit time, if the lottery result of the first special symbol 221 is displayed first, and the display result is a specific mode corresponding to the probability fluctuation big hit, the second [2] The probability fluctuation big hit in the random drawing of the first special symbol 221 is prioritized over the normal big hit in the random drawing of the special symbol 231. That is, even if a big hit is won normally in one special symbol, the variation time is over and until one special symbol stops, a definite variation big hit is drawn in the other special symbol lottery, and If the variation time to stop before one special symbol stops is selected, the other probability variation big hit symbol stops before the one special symbol in variation. Based on such both winning contents and fluctuation time, when the other probability change big hit symbol is stopped, the symbol scheduled to be stopped by the normal big hit of one special symbol is forcibly stopped by the lost symbol and the variation ends. The pursuit is realized by doing.

  If the special symbol is “A” or “a” (normally 15R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the pursuit time (second special symbol 231) The fluctuation time when "is a big hit" is 150 seconds, the pursuit time is 180 seconds when it is "1", the pursuit time is 210 seconds when it is "2", and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds) ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (normally 8R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, the pursuit time is 100 seconds, “1 In the case of “”, the pursuit time is 120 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  If the special symbol is "C" or "c" (normally 4R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), when the acquired random number for determining the variation time is "0", the pursuit time is 50 seconds, "1 In the case of “”, the pursuit time is 60 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the pursuit time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is "E" or "e" (15R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state), when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 200 seconds, and when it is "1". The pursuit time is 240 seconds, and when it is “2”, the pursuit time is 280 seconds, and the average pursuit time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  If the special symbol is "F" or "f" (8R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state), if the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 150 seconds, and if "1" The pursuit time is 180 seconds, and in the case of "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is "G" or "g" (4R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 100 seconds, and when "1". The chasing time is 120 seconds, and in the case of "2", the chasing time is 140 seconds, and the average chasing time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  The special symbol is the probability fluctuation big hit (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the normal gaming state A, B and the probability fluctuation big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state ( Even in the case of “E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”), the probability fluctuation jackpot with a large number of rounds advantageous for the player has a more favorable pursuit time (average value) It is done. That is, as the special symbol more advantageous to the player, the chasing time (average value) is favored, and the chasing possibility (the second special symbol 231 is a fluctuation time corresponding to “normal big hit” during the probability fluctuation gaming state). In the case of fluctuation, the probability fluctuation big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol 221, and the possibility of the first special symbol 221 being stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231 is made higher .

  Also, the special symbol is the probability fluctuation big hit ("A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c") in the normal gaming state A, B and the probability fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state In the big hit (“E”, “e”, “F”, “f”, “G” or “g”), the chase time (average value) is favored in the probability fluctuation jackpot in the probability fluctuation gaming state ing. That is, as the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player, the chase time (average value) is favored, and the chase possibility (a fluctuation time corresponding to “usually a big hit” during the probability fluctuation gaming state) If the special symbol 231 is fluctuating, the probability fluctuation big hit will be won in the lottery of the first special symbol 221, and the possibility of the first special symbol 221 being stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231 is increased It is done.

[Pulse time determination table (Modified example)]
FIG. 14 shows a modification of the pursuit time determination table of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This chase time determination table is basically the same as the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 13 and, for example, the relationship between the special symbol and the acquired random time determination random number and the chase time determined at that time is also shown. It is the same as the chase time determination table shown in 13. On the other hand, the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 14 is the chase time determination table shown in FIG. 13 in that it is determined whether the chase time is to be determined or not according to the progress stage (number of times of digestion) of time saving game. It is different from

  If the special symbol is "A", "a", "E" or "e" (normal gaming state A, B or 15R probability variation hit in probability variation state), the acquired variation time determination random number is " In the case of "0", the pursuit time is determined from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the eleventh rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and in the case of "2", the special game The pursuit time is determined from the 21st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is "A", "a", "E" or "e", when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the progress of time saving game since the end of the special gaming state The pursuit time is determined regardless of the stage (number of times of digestion), and in the case of “1”, the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 10th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the fluctuation time (for example, The same fluctuation time (like below) with derived symbol "H" in the probability fluctuation gaming state is decided, and in the case of "2", the pursuit time is decided from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state Usually, the fluctuation time is determined.

  If the special symbol is "B", "b", "F" or "f" (normal gaming state A, B or 8R probability variation hit in probability variation state), the acquired variation time determination random number is " In the case of "0", the pursuit time is determined from the 11th rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the 21st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and in the case of "2", the special game The pursuit time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is "B", "b", "F" or "f", the acquired variation time determination random number is "0" and the first 10 after the end of the special game state. Until the rotation, the pursuit time is not determined, and the normal fluctuation time is determined. When it is "1", the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and the fluctuation time is normally In the case of "2", the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined.

  If the special symbol is "C", "c", "G" or "g" (normal gaming state A, B or 4R probability variation hit in probability variation state), the acquired variation time determination random number is " In the case of "0", the pursuit time is determined from the 31st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and when "1", the pursuit time is determined from the 41st rotation after the end of the special gaming state, and in the case of "2" the special game The pursuit time is determined from the 51st rotation after the end of the state. In other words, when the special symbol is "C", "c", "G" or "g", when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state to 30 Until the turn, the change time is not determined and the normal change time is determined. When it is "1", the change time is not determined from the first turn to the 40th turn after the end of the special game state. In the case of "2", the pursuit time is not determined from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special game state, and the normal fluctuation time is determined.

  If the special symbol is "A", "a", "E" or "e" (normal gaming state A, B or 15R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state), the special symbol is "B", "b", If it is "F" or "f" (normal gaming state A, B or 8R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state), the special symbol is "C", "c", "G" or "g" (normal gaming state Compared with the case of A, B or 4R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state, the probability fluctuation big hit that became the transition trigger to the probability fluctuation gaming state is about as much probability fluctuation big hit as the number of rounds more advantageous for the player That is, as the special symbol more advantageous to the player, the progress stage of the short game (the number of times of digestion) is favored, and the chasing possibility (the random time corresponding to the “normal jackpot” during the probability fluctuation gaming state is second special 1st special when symbol 231 is changing Won probability change big hit in per drawing of the handle 221, a first special symbol 221 is adapted to be possible to display stops first) is higher than the second special symbol 231.

[Main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing main processing performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60).

  In the main process, the main CPU 60 first executes an initial setting process (S11). In this processing, the main CPU 60 executes RAM access permission, backup recovery processing, initialization of the work area, and the like. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S12.

  At S12, the main CPU 60 executes normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts random number values according to the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151, and refers to the hit determination table (see FIG. 7) of the normal symbols stored in the main ROM 61, Determine whether you have won. Main CPU 60 further executes a process of storing the determination result in main RAM 62. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal motorized combination (feather members 143 (see FIG. 1)) is in the open state, and the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 14B. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S13.

  At S13, the main CPU 60 executes normal symbol display device control processing. In this procedure, the main CPU 60 stores a control signal for driving the normal symbol display device 20 in the main RAM 62 based on the result of the normal symbol lottery stored in the main RAM 62, and the control signal is stored in the normal symbol display device 20. Send to The normal symbol display device 20 changes the display as the normal symbol by repeating blinking of the two LED lamps 201 and 202 based on the received control signal, and then causes the lamps 201 and 202 to be turned on or off. Take control.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes random number initial value update processing (S14). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random number value counter, the effect condition selection random number value counter, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol control process at S15 and executes a second special symbol control process at S16. The first special symbol control processing and the second special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, respectively, but after executing the first special symbol control processing (S15), the second special symbol control processing If (S16) is executed and the process is ended, the process proceeds to S17.

  At S17, the main CPU 60 executes special symbol display device control processing. In this process, main CPU 60 drives first special symbol display device 22 or second special symbol display device 23 in the first special symbol control process or second special symbol control process of FIG. 19 or FIG. 20. The control state flag is stored in the main RAM 62, and a control signal corresponding to the control flag is transmitted to the first or second special symbol display device 22, 23. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 controls the turning on / off of each segment of the 7-segment LED and the dots based on the received control signal, thereby the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol display device 22 2 Perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol 231. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S12, and the processes of S12 to S17 are repeated.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60). This system timer interrupt process is a process that may be executed by interrupting the main process even when the main process shown in FIG. 15 is being executed. It is executed according to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  In the system timer interrupt process, the main CPU 60 first increases each count value such as the big hit determination random number counter, the big hit symbol determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the fluctuation time determination random number counter by "1". The random number updating process is executed (S21).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes input detection processing for detecting winning or passing of the gaming ball to the starting opening etc (S22). Details of the input detection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

  Next, the main CPU 60 is a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 6 and the sub control circuit 7, and a special winning opening for measuring the opening time of the first and second special winning openings 16A and 16B. The update process of various timers, such as a time timer, is executed (S23). Then, an output process is performed to supply a signal for performing drive control based on various variables to the solenoid, the motor, and the like (S24).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes command output processing for supplying various commands to the sub control circuit 7 (S25), and then the payout ball control command for causing the payout device to perform the prize ball to the payout / firing control circuit A payout process such as transmission is executed (S26). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends, the address before the occurrence of the interrupt is restored, and the main process is executed.

[Input detection process]
FIGS. 17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the input detection process executed in S22 of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the input detection process, the main CPU 60 first loads the state of the first start inlet ball sensor 141 (S31), and determines whether the first start inlet ball sensor 141 has reacted. A determination process is performed (S32). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first start opening ball sensor 141 has reacted (S32: YES), the first special symbol hold number counter is loaded (S33), and the first special symbol hold is performed. A process is performed to determine whether the number counter is the upper limit (the number of reservations is 4) (S34).

  In S34, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol hold number counter is not the upper limit value (the hold number is 4) (S34: NO), it adds "1" to the first special symbol hold number counter (S35).

  When the processing of S35 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines in S32 that the first starting opening ball sensor 141 does not react (S32: NO), or in S34, the main CPU 60 holds the first special symbol holding number. When it is determined that the counter is the upper limit (the number of reservations is 4) (S34: YES), the state of the second start opening ball sensor 142 is loaded (S36), and the second start opening ball sensor 142 A process is performed to determine whether or not there is a response (S37). In this processing, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second starting opening ball sensor 142 has reacted (S37: YES), the second special symbol holding number counter is loaded (S38), and the second special symbol holding is performed. A process is performed to determine whether the number counter is the upper limit (the number of reservations is 4) (S39).

  In S39, when it is determined that the second special symbol holding number counter is not the upper limit value (the holding number is 4) (S39: NO), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second special symbol holding number counter (S40).

  When the process of S40 is completed, the main CPU 60 determines that the second starting opening ball sensor 142 does not react in S37 (S: 37 NO), or the second special symbol hold number counter has an upper limit value in S39. When it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 (S39: YES), as shown in FIG. 18, the main CPU 60 loads the state of the passing ball sensor 151 (S41), and the passing ball sensor 151 A process is performed to determine whether or not there is a response (S42). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the passing ball sensor 151 has reacted (S42: YES), the normal symbol holding ball number counter is loaded (S43), and the normal symbol holding number counter has an upper limit value (hold A process of determining whether the number is four) is executed (S44).

  In S44, when the main CPU 60 determines that the normal symbol holding number counter is not the upper limit (the number of holdings is 4) (NO), “1” is added to the normal symbol holding number counter (S45).

  When the processing of S45 is completed, when the main CPU 60 determines that the passing ball sensor 151 is not reacting in S42 (S42: NO), or in S44, the main CPU 60 sets the upper limit value for the normal symbol number counter If it is determined that the number is four) (S44: YES), the state of the first count sensor 161 is loaded (S46), and processing is performed to determine whether the first count sensor 161 has reacted. (S47). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first count sensor 161 has reacted (S47: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the first count sensor reaction frequency counter.

  If the process of S48 is completed, or if the main CPU 60 determines that the first count sensor 161 has not reacted in S47 (S47: NO), the state of the second count sensor 162 is loaded (S49) A process is performed to determine whether the second count sensor 162 has reacted (S50). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second count sensor 162 has reacted (S50: YES), the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the second count sensor reaction frequency counter.

  When the process of S51 ends, or when the main CPU 60 determines that the second count sensor 162 has not reacted in S50 (S50: NO), the present subroutine ends.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol control process executed in S15 of FIG. In FIG. 19, numerical values described on the side of S62 to S69 indicate control status flags of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as control status flags of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the gaming state of the first special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S62 to S69 to be performed. Here, S62 is a first special symbol memory check process (00), S63 is a first special symbol variation time management process (01), S64 is a first special symbol display time management process (02), and S65 is a special game state start Interval management processing (03), S66 is the first big winning opening open processing (04), S67 is the second large winning opening opening processing (05), S68 is the special game state end interval processing (06), S69 is the first 1 special symbol game end processing (07).

  In the first special symbol control processing, after the main CPU 60 executes processing for loading the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S61), the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 In accordance with the numerical value of, it is determined in each step (S62 to S69) whether or not various processing is to be executed, and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the first special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to "00", " By sequentially setting 01 "," 02 ", and" 07 ", the processes of S62, S63, S64, and S69 shown in FIG. 19 are executed at predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to "00", "01", By setting "02" and "03" in order, the processing of S62, S63, S64, and S65 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the special game state is executed. Further, when control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to "04" and "05" in order, thereby setting the processing of S66 and S67 shown in FIG. 19 to a predetermined timing. Will run and run a special game. Also, after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 executes the special game state end interval process (06 in S68) when the special game state is ended in the process of S66 or S67 shown in FIG. And the first special symbol game end processing (07) of S69.

  The details of the processes in S62 to S69 in FIG. 19 will be described later individually, but the processes in S62 to S69 will be briefly described below. Main CPU 60 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before the predetermined timing is reached, the process is terminated without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S62, the main CPU 60 displays the first special symbol variation time management process (S63) on condition that the value of the first special symbol hold number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol memory check process, the control status flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol of S63 after the lapse of the fluctuation time set as the waiting time timer The variable time management process is set to be performed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S63, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process, and the first special In the fluctuation of the symbol 221, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (when the first special symbol 221 has stopped changing), the control status flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management After setting, the waiting time is set to the waiting time timer. In the first special symbol variation time management process, by setting the control status flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer, after the waiting time after being set as the waiting time timer elapses, the S64 th 1 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S64, the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation When has passed, processing is executed to determine whether or not a big hit. The main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating special gaming status start interval management processing when it is a big hit, and uses the waiting time timer for the time corresponding to the special gaming status start interval. set. In the first special symbol display time management process, by setting the control status flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer, the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer The special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S65 is set to be executed after the lapse of time.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S65, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and the special gaming state start interval is When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first large winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the first big winning opening open process, sets the control status flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big winning opening opening time Set to timer. In the special gaming state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first large winning opening opening time timer are set, after the first large winning opening opening time timer is set The first big winning opening open processing (04) of S66 is set to be executed.

  In the first big winning opening open processing (04) of S66, when the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (04) indicating the big winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 60 executes the first big winning combination. Whether the condition that the mouth winning counter is a predetermined value (for example, "9") or more, or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first big winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied or not Execute processing to determine When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the first special symbol 221, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (05) indicating the second big winning opening open processing is set to the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set to the second big winning opening opening time timer. In the first large winning opening opening process, the second large winning opening opening process (05) of S67 is executed by setting the control status flag (05) of the first special symbol 221, and the first special symbol 221 is executed. By setting the control state flag (06) of the special game state end interval process (06) of S68 is set to be executed.

  In the second big winning opening open processing (05) of S67, the main CPU 60 performs the second processing when the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening opening processing. Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the second large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the first special symbol 221, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening open process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening opening time timer. In the second large winning opening opening process, the first large winning opening opening process (04) of S66 is executed again by setting the control status flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and the first special symbol is processed. When the control state flag (06) of 221 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S68 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S68, when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval, the main CPU 60 opens the first special winning opening open time Clear the time set in the timer or the second big winning opening opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining balls of the winning opening opened last in that time Do the processing. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (remaining ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. In the special game state end interval process, the control state flag (07) of the first special symbol 221 is set, so that the first special symbol game end process (07) of S69 is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol game end process (07) of S69, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol when the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (07) indicating the end of the first special symbol game. A value (00) indicating memory check processing is set. In the first special symbol game end process, the first special symbol storage check process of S62 is set to be executed again, and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol control process executed in S16 of FIG. In FIG. 20, the numerical values described on the side of S72 to S79 indicate the control status flags of the second special symbol corresponding to those steps, and the memory functioning as the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62 It is stored in the area. The control status flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the gaming status of the second special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes in S72 to S79. Here, S72 is a second special symbol memory check process (00), S73 is a second special symbol variation time management process (01), S74 is a second special symbol display time management process (02), S75 is a special gaming state start Interval management process (03), S76 is the first big winning opening open process (04), S77 is the second big winning opening open process (05), S78 is the special gaming state end interval process (06), S79 is the first 2 special symbol game end processing (07).

  In the second special symbol control process, after the main CPU 60 first executes a process of loading the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S71), the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 In accordance with the numerical value of, it is determined in each step (S72 to S79) whether or not various processing is to be executed, and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the second special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) and the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", "02". , And “07” in order, the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S79 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing. On the other hand, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to "00", "01", By setting "02" and "03" in order, the processing of S72, S73, S74, and S75 shown in FIG. 20 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the special gaming state is executed. Further, when control to the special game state is executed, main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to "04" and "05" in order to make the processing of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. 20 predetermined timing. Will run and run a special game. Also, after the control to the special game state is executed, the main CPU 60 executes the special game state end interval process of S78 when the special game state is ended in the process of S76 and S77 shown in FIG. And the second special symbol game end processing (07) of S79.

  The details of the processes in S72 to S79 in FIG. 20 will be described later individually, but the processes in S72 to S79 will be briefly described below. Main CPU 60 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. That is, before the predetermined timing is reached, the process is terminated without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S72, the main CPU 60 executes the second special symbol variation time management process of the second special symbol 231 (provided that the value of the second special symbol hold number counter is not 0) ( While setting the control state flag (01) of the 2nd special symbol which shows S73), the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol memory check process, by setting the control status flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, the second special symbol of S73 after the lapse of the fluctuation time set as the waiting time timer The variable time management process is set to be performed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) of S73, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process, and the second special In the fluctuation of the symbol 231, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (when the second special symbol 231 has stopped changing), the control status flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol display time management After setting, the waiting time is set to the waiting time timer. In the second special symbol variation time management process, by setting the control status flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, after the waiting time after being set as the waiting time timer elapses, the S74 th 2 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management process (02) of S74, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation When has passed, processing is executed to determine whether or not a big hit. The main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating special gaming status start interval management processing when it is a big hit, and uses the waiting time timer for the time corresponding to the special gaming status start interval. set. In the second special symbol display time management process, by setting the control status flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer The special game state start interval management process (03) of S75 is set to be executed after the lapse of time.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S75, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and the special gaming state start interval is When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first large winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 further sets a value indicating the first big winning opening open process in the control status flag (04) of the second special symbol 231, and opens the upper opening time limit (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big winning opening open. Set to time timer. In the special gaming state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first large winning opening open time timer are set, after the first large winning opening open time timer is set It is set such that the process of opening the first big winning opening in S76 (04) is executed.

  In the first large winning opening open processing (04) of S76, the main CPU 60 sets the first special winning opening open processing value to the first special winning opening opening processing (04). Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the second special symbol 231, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (05) indicating the second large winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second large opening opening time timer. In the first large winning opening opening process, the second large winning opening opening process (05) of S77 is executed by setting the control status flag (05) of the second special symbol 231, and the second special symbol 231 is executed. By setting the control state flag (06) of the special game state end interval process (06) of S78 is set to be executed.

  In the second large winning opening open processing (05) of S77, the main CPU 60 sets the second special symbol 231 when the control state flag of the second special winning opening 231 is the value (05) indicating the processing during the second large winning opening opening. Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the second large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the second special symbol 231, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening open process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening opening time timer. In the second large winning opening open processing, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set so that the first large winning opening opening processing (04) of S76 is executed again, and the second special special symbol When the control state flag (06) of 231 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S78 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval processing (06) of S78, when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval, the main CPU 60 opens the first special winning opening open time Clear the time set in the timer or the second big winning opening opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining balls of the winning opening opened last in that time Do the processing. Then, when the time (remaining ball check processing time) corresponding to the special gaming state end interval has elapsed, a value (07) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. In the special game state end interval process, the control state flag (07) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79 is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol game end process (07) of S79, the main CPU 60 executes the second special symbol memory check process when the control state flag of the second special symbol is the value (07) indicating the special symbol game end. Set the value (00) to indicate. In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol storage check process of S71 to be executed again, and ends this subroutine.

[First special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 21 shows the first special symbol storage check process executed in S62 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S82. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value indicating the first special symbol storage check (S81: NO), the present subroutine is ended.

  In S82, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is 0 or not. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the first special symbol game) (S 82: YES), the first special symbol It is determined that data is not stored in the starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), and the process proceeds to S83. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter is not 0 (the first special symbol game start memory is stored) (S 82: NO), it corresponds to the first special symbol 221 Since there is a starting memory to be stored, the process proceeds to S84.

  In S83, since the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory for the first special symbol game in the processing of S82, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM, and ends this subroutine. Main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display start command to sub control circuit 7 in accordance with the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in the main RAM. The demonstration display start command may be sent to the sub control circuit 7 when the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S83, but will be described later together with the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in S83. When the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S103 of FIG. 22, it may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  At S84, main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol non-variation flag is set. Here, the first special symbol non-change flag is set in S176 of FIG. 27 described later, and is set when shifting to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the second special symbol 231 It is. That is, the first special symbol invariable flag is a flag for preventing the first special symbol game from being played when the special gaming state based on the second special symbol is being executed. Therefore, in S84, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is set (S84: YES), the present subroutine ends. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol invariable flag is not set (S84: NO), the main CPU 60 executes processing to clear the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag (S85). Main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display end command to sub control circuit 7 in accordance with the clearing of the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag from the main RAM. The demo display end command may be sent to the sub control circuit 7 when the first special demo display processing flag is cleared in S85, but the second special symbol demo display processing flag is cleared in S105 of FIG. 22 described later. It may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when it is turned on.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the control status flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol variation time management processing (S86), and shifts the processing to S87.

  At S87, the main CPU 60 executes special gaming state determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the gaming state flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of judgment values (big hit judgment values) to be hit based on the read game state flag. Do. That is, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, the collision determination table for probability fluctuation state having a large number of collision determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a predetermined value, the collision determination value is A small hit determination table for the normal gaming state is referred to (see FIG. 8). As described above, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is the probability fluctuation state, the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It becomes.

  The main CPU 60 then extracts the jackpot determination random number value of the first special symbol start storage area extracted at the start winning prize and set in the first special symbol 221 start storage area (0), and the selected hit determination table refer. Then, the main CPU 60 determines that it is a hit if the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, that is, if the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal gaming state, it hits in the probability fluctuation gaming state. If the determination random number value is “0 to 9”, processing for determining a hit is executed (see FIG. 8). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player as the special gaming state determination processing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol determination process (S88). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a hit, based on the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 shown in FIG. 9, and if it is not a hit (case of loss) Execute processing to determine the lost symbol. When this process ends, the process moves to S89.

  At S89, the main CPU 60 executes a first special symbol variation time determination process. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the first special symbol 221 based on the gaming state at the time of the winning lottery, the first special symbol 221 determined in the processing of S88, and the variation time determination random number ( See Figure 12). Then, the main CPU 60 stores the determined fluctuation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Main CPU 60 determines a variation display mode of first special symbol 221 in first special symbol display device 22 based on data indicating the determined variation time. Data indicating the fluctuation time stored in the RAM 62 is supplied from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 executes the effect display according to the received first special symbol variation pattern designation command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the determined fluctuation time in the waiting time timer (S90), and executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display ( S91), the present subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 22 shows the second special symbol storage check process executed in S72 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: YES), the process proceeds to S102. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value indicating the second special symbol storage check (S101: NO), the present subroutine is ended.

  At S102, main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is zero. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is 0 (there is no start memory of the second special symbol game) (S102: YES), the second special symbol It is determined that data is not stored in the start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the process proceeds to S103. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter is not 0 (the second special symbol game start memory is stored) (S 102: NO), it corresponds to the second special symbol 231 Since there is a starting memory to be stored, the process proceeds to S104.

  In S103, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory for the second special symbol game in the processing of S102, so sets the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. Main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display start command to sub control circuit 7 in accordance with the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in main RAM 62. The demonstration display start command may be sent to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S103, but with the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag set in S103. When the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is set in S83 of FIG. 21 described above, it may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  At S104, main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the second special symbol non-change flag is set. Here, the second special symbol invariable flag is set in S156 of FIG. 26 described later, and is set when transitioning to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the first special symbol 221 It is. That is, since the second special symbol non-change flag is executing the special gaming state based on the first special symbol 221, it is a flag for preventing the second special symbol game from being played. Therefore, when the main CPU 60 determines in S104 that the second special symbol invariable flag is set (S104: YES), the present subroutine ends. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S104: NO), the main CPU 60 executes processing to clear the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag (S105). Main CPU 60 transmits a demonstration display end command to sub control circuit 7 in accordance with clearing of the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag from main RAM 62. The demo display end command may be sent to the sub control circuit 7 when the second special symbol demonstration display processing flag is cleared in S105, but the first special symbol demonstration display processing flag is S85 in FIG. 21 described above. It may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 when it is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the control status flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the second special symbol variation time management processing (S106), and shifts the processing to S107.

  At S107, the main CPU 60 executes special gaming state determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the gaming state flag, and selects one hitting judgment table from a plurality of hitting judgment tables having different numbers of judging values (hit judging values) to be hit based on the read gaming state flag. Do. That is, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, the collision determination table for probability fluctuation state having a large number of collision determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a predetermined value, the collision determination value is A small hit determination table for the normal gaming state is referred to (see FIG. 10). Thus, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in the probability variation state, the probability of shifting to the hit gaming state (special gaming state) is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It becomes.

  Then, main CPU 60 refers to the random number value for hit determination of the second special symbol start storage area extracted at the start winning prize and set in the second special symbol start storage area (0) and the selected hit determination table Do. Then, the main CPU 60 determines that it is a hit if the hit determination random number value and the hit determination value match, that is, if the hit determination random number value is “0” in the normal gaming state, it hits in the probability fluctuation gaming state. If the judgment random number value is “0 to 9”, it is judged as a hit (see FIG. 10). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player as the special gaming state determination processing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol determination process (S108). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines a hit symbol if the result of the hit determination is a hit based on the symbol determination table of the second special symbol shown in FIG. 11, and if it is not a hit (if it is lost) Executes the process of determining the lost symbol. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S109.

  At S109, the main CPU 60 executes a second special symbol fluctuation time determination process. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, but on the condition that it is a normal big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the second special symbol 231 according to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Set a fluctuation time (following time) longer than normal as the fluctuation time of. On the other hand, when it is not a normal big hit in the probability variation gaming state, the variation time is set in accordance with the variation time determination table of FIG. 12 like the variation time of the first special symbol 221.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the determined fluctuation time in the waiting time timer (S110), and then executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display ( S111), this subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol fluctuation time determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, first, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state (S121). When the main CPU 60 determines that the game is in the probability variation gaming state (S121: YES), the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game normally derives a big hit (S122). That is, processing is performed to determine whether the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to a special symbol that usually derives a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the normal jackpot is derived (S122: YES), the main CPU 62 sets a follow-up notification flag to a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S123). Here, the chase notification flag is to report that the normal jackpot has been won in the probability variation gaming state (usually it is a special symbol for deriving a big hit), and the chase notification is issued when the chase notification flag is set. Executes a process of transmitting a follow-up notification start command to start the secondary control circuit 7. Thereby, the sub control circuit 7 can recognize that the pursuit time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the follow-up time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14), and executes the processing of setting the fluctuation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S124). At this time, the main CPU 60 is based on the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the previous special game state stored in the main RAM 62, and the random time determination random number for the special symbol in the previous special game state. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined with reference to the chase time table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14). Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, the sub control circuit 7 can perform effects corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that it is not in the probability variation gaming state (S121: NO), or in the probability variation gaming state (S121: YES), it is normally determined that there is no big hit (S122: NO), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the fluctuation time determination table of FIG. 12, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S125). That is, in S125, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined as usual, and it is set.

  When the main CPU 60 sets the variation time for the second special symbol 231 in S124 or S125, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

[First special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol fluctuation time management process ((01) S131). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: YES), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S131: NO), the present subroutine ends.

  In S132, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is "0", and if it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0" (S132: YES) , S133. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S133, main CPU 60 determines whether first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, or “H” ( A process is performed to determine whether or not it is shown in FIG. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to S134, and it is determined that it is not a symbol for deriving a special gaming state If it has (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  In S134, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is changing (YES), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S135 and determines that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (NO), the process proceeds to S136.

  At S135, the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, to determine the special symbol to derive the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the first special symbol 221 during the change of the second special symbol 231, in the pursuit time, hit the lottery in the first special symbol 221 In this case, the hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is prioritized. Therefore, when the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is changing during the second special symbol 231, it is changed to the special symbol of losing and forcedly stopped, and the second special symbol 231 is The special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is cancelled, and the second special symbol 231 is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol if it is in the process of being changed by the derived symbol corresponding to the loss.

  In S136, main CPU 60 sets (stores) a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of first special symbol 221 in the control status flag of first special symbol 221. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S137). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ((01) S141). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value is (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: YES), the process proceeds to S142. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S141: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S142, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is "0", and when it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0" (S142: YES) , And shift the processing to S143. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S143, main CPU 60 determines whether second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, or “h” ( A process of determining whether or not it is shown in FIG. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to S144, and it is determined that it is not a symbol for deriving a special gaming state If it is determined (NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  At S144, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S144: YES), the process proceeds to S145, and it is determined that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S144: NO), the process proceeds to S146.

  At S145, the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, since the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is determined in the second special symbol 231 during the change of the first special symbol 221, in order to give priority to the stop display of the second special symbol 231 which is a big hit. In addition, the first special symbol 221 is forcibly stopped to shorten the fluctuation stop time. At this time, when the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is changing, the first special symbol 221 is changed to a special symbol of losing and forced to stop, the first special symbol 221 The special game state (big hit game state) of is canceled, and when the first special symbol 221 is changing with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, the game is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol.

  In S146, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control status flag of the second special symbol 231. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S147). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends. In addition, you may perform the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-fluctuation flag performed by S156 mentioned later following this process.

[First special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol display time management process executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. It executes (S151). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: YES), the process proceeds to S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: NO), the present subroutine ends.

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S151 that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S151: YES), the first special symbol display A process of determining whether or not the value of the after-determination waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is "0" is executed (S152). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S152: YES), the processing in S153 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. In the case (S152: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S153, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether to shift to a special gaming state (is a big hit) based on the first special symbol 221. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S153: YES), it shifts the processing to S154, and if it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S153: NO), the processing to S161 Transition.

  In S154, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, after the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the special gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S 155), it executes processing to set the second special symbol invariable flag (S 156), and processing in S 157 Migrate That is, while maintaining the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 during the special gaming state, the main CPU 60 prevents the variable display of the second special symbol 231 from being performed.

  At S157, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S157: YES), after executing a process of clearing the chase notification flag in order to forcibly terminate the chase notification (S158) , S159. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S157: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S159.

  At S159, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 62 is "0". In this process, it can be determined whether or not it is a time saving game state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time saving counter is not “0”, it can be determined that the time saving game state is set, and therefore, the process proceeds to S160 to clear the time saving counter. At S160, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the time counter in the main RAM 62, and ends the present subroutine. In addition, you may perform the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-fluctuation flag performed by S156 following this process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (S159: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction game mode is not set, so there is no need to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine

  In S161, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing in the predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing a second special symbol display time management process executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the special symbol display time management process. (S171). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S171: YES), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S171: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S172, when the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, the value of the waiting time timer after confirmation corresponding to the second special symbol display management process is A process of determining whether it is "0" is executed. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S172: YES), the process proceeds to S173 and determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0”. In the case (S172: NO), the present subroutine ends.

  In S173, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not to shift (is a hit) to a special gaming state based on the second special symbol 231. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S173: YES), it shifts the processing to S174, and if it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S173: NO), the processing to S181 Transition.

  In S174, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, after the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the special gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S175), it executes processing to set the first special symbol invariable flag (S176), and the processing to S177 is performed. Migrate That is, while maintaining the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 during the special gaming state, the main CPU 60 prevents the variable display of the first special symbol 221 from being performed.

  At S177, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S177: YES), after executing the processing of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly terminate the chase notification (S178) , Shift the processing to S179. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S177: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S179.

  At S179, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time reduction number counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, it can be determined whether or not it is a time saving game state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time saving counter is not “0”, it can be determined that the time saving game state is set, and therefore, the process proceeds to S180 in order to clear the time saving counter. In S180, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the time counter in the main RAM 62, and ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S179: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction game mode is not set, so there is no need to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine

  In S181, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting a value (07) indicating the second special symbol end processing in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine.

[Special game state start interval management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the special gaming state start interval management process executed in S65 of FIG. 19 or S75 of FIG.

  In this special game state start interval management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (03) indicating the special game state start interval management process. A determination process is performed (S191). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process (S191: YES), the process proceeds to S192. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process (S191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  At S192, main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special gaming state start interval management process is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (S192: YES), the process proceeds to S193, and the value of the waiting time timer is determined not to be "0". (S192: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S193, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening open preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the upper limit value of the special winning opening open number counter of the main RAM 62. Specifically, the main CPU 60 sets the number of big hit rounds corresponding to the special symbol from which the special gaming state is derived, that is, "15", "8" or "4" as the upper limit value of the large winning opening open number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 60 controls the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the predetermined area functioning as the control status flag in the main RAM 62, indicating the processing during the opening of the first special winning opening. After the process of setting the first special winning opening opening upper limit time is set in the special winning opening opening time timer (S195), the present subroutine is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special game state, the first large winning opening 16A is opened earlier than the second large winning opening 16B.

[First big winning opening open process]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a process during opening of the first big winning opening that is executed in S66 of FIG. 19 or S76 of FIG.

  In the process of opening the first special winning opening, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the processing of opening the first special winning opening. A process of determining whether or not it is executed (S201). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the processing for opening the first big winning opening (S201: YES), the process proceeds to S202. If it is determined that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (04) indicating the processing during the opening of the first special winning opening (S201: NO), the present subroutine Finish.

  In S202, main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value of the number of rounds set in S193 of the special gaming state start interval management process shown in FIG. "" Or "4") is determined. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit (S202: YES), the process proceeds to S212, and the value of the round number counter is determined not to be the upper limit (S202: NO), the process proceeds to S203.

  In S203, the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the value of the round number counter after performing the first special winning opening opening process (S204).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a residual ball check process of the second big winning opening 16B (S205). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks the presence and the number of uncounted game balls remaining in the second large winning opening 16B after the second large winning opening 16B is closed. By this processing, it is possible to accurately count the number of gaming balls that have won in the second large winning opening 16B, including the winning balls (so-called over winning) after reaching the predetermined number of gaming balls.

  In such residual ball check processing of the second large winning opening 16B, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (number of winning gaming balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first large winning opening 16A is 9 or more. (S206: YES), or until it is determined that the special winning opening open timer is 0 (S207: YES), it is repeatedly performed (S206: NO, S207: NO).

  As understood from S203, the residual ball check process of the second big winning opening 16B is performed while the first big winning opening 16A is open. Therefore, it is possible to omit the interval between rounds from the closing of the second large winning opening 16B to the opening of the first large winning opening 16A. As a result, the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, so it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game.

  If the main CPU 60 determines that the number of responses (number of winning game balls) in the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big winning opening 16A is 9 or more (S206: YES), or the big winning opening open timer Is determined to be 0 (S207: YES), the residual ball check process (S205) of the second large winning opening 16B is ended, and the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second large winning opening 16B is completed. A process of clearing the number of reactions is executed (S208).

  Next, after the main CPU 60 performs the closing process of the first big winning opening 16A (S209), the main CPU 60 sets a predetermined area which functions as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. 2) A process of setting the value (05) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S210). The main CPU 60 further executes a process of setting the open upper limit time of the second big winning opening 16B in the big winning opening open time timer (S211), and the present subroutine ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the second large winning opening 16B is opened after closing the first large winning opening 16A on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round in the special gaming state (S202: NO) . On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S202: YES), the control status flag (06) indicating the special gaming status end interval processing is used as the control status flag in the main RAM 62. A process of setting the predetermined area to function is executed (S212), and the present subroutine ends.

[Second big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the processing during opening of the second big winning opening that is executed in S67 of FIG. 19 or S77 of FIG.

  In the second large winning opening open process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening open process. A process of determining whether or not it is executed (S221). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening open process (S221: YES), the process proceeds to S222. If it is determined that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is not the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening open processing (S221: NO), the present subroutine Finish.

  In S222, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the round number counter is the upper limit value, that is, the upper limit value ("15", "8") of the round number set in S193 of the special gaming state start interval management process shown in FIG. Or “4”) is determined. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the round number counter is the upper limit (S222: YES), the process proceeds to S232, and the value of the round number counter is determined not to be the upper limit (S222: NO), the process proceeds to S223.

  In S223, the main CPU 60 adds “1” to the value of the round number counter after performing the second winning opening opening process (S224).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a residual ball check process of the first big winning opening 16A (S225). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks the presence and the number of uncounted game balls remaining in the first large winning opening 16A after the first large winning opening 16A is closed. By this processing, it is possible to accurately count the number of gaming balls that have won in the first large winning opening 16A, including the winning balls (so-called over winning) after reaching the predetermined number of gaming balls.

  In such residual ball check processing of the first large winning opening 16A, the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions (number of winning gaming balls) at the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second large winning opening 16B is 9 or more. (S226: YES), or until it is determined that the special winning opening open timer is 0 (S227: YES), it is repeatedly performed (S226: NO, S227: NO).

  As can be seen from S223, the residual ball check process of the first large winning opening 16A is performed while the second large winning opening 16B is open. Therefore, it is possible to omit the inter-round interval between the closing of the first large winning opening 16A and the opening of the second large winning opening 16B. As a result, the time required to end the special game state can be shortened by the interval between rounds, so it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game.

  If the main CPU 60 determines that the number of responses (number of winning game balls) in the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is 9 or more (S226: YES), or the big winning opening open timer Is determined to be 0 (S227: YES), the residual ball check process (S225) of the first large winning opening 16A is ended, and the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first large winning opening 16A is completed. A process of clearing the number of reactions is executed (S228).

  Next, after performing the closing process of the second big winning opening 16B (S229), the main CPU 60 sets a predetermined area which functions as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. 1) A process of setting a value (04) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is executed (S230). The main CPU 60 further executes processing for setting the open upper limit time of the first big winning opening 16A in the big winning opening open time timer (S231), and the present subroutine is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 16A is opened after closing the second large winning opening 16B on condition that the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit round in the special gaming state (S222: NO) . On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the number of rounds has reached the upper limit round (S222: YES), the control status flag (06) indicating the special gaming status end interval processing is set as the control status flag in the main RAM 62. A process of setting the predetermined area to function is executed (S212), and the present subroutine ends.

[Special game state end interval processing]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the special game state end interval process executed in S68 of FIG. 19 or S78 of FIG.

  In this special game state end interval process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (06) indicating the special game state end interval process. A process is performed (S241). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag is the value (06) indicating the special gaming status end interval processing (S241: YES), the processing proceeds to S242, and the value indicating the special gaming status ending interval processing If it is determined that (06) is not true (S241: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S242, the main CPU 60 executes processing to clear either the first large winning opening opening time timer or the second large winning opening opening time timer set last. After the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the residual ball check processing time to the waiting time timer (S 243), the main CPU 60 executes residual ball check processing for the special winning opening that was finally opened (S 244). The main CPU 60 checks the remaining balls for the first large winning opening 16A or the second large winning opening 16B of the final round in the special gaming state until the set waiting time (remaining ball check processing time) elapses (S245: YES) The process is executed (S244, S245: NO).

  When the residual ball check process is completed (S245: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the reaction number counter of the first count sensor 161 or the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the big winning opening opened at the last (last round) The first special symbol game end processing or the second special symbol game end processing as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 displaying the special symbol derived from the special gaming state (S246). A process of setting the indicated value (07) in a predetermined area that functions as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62 is executed (S247), and this subroutine is ended.

[First special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol game end processing executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end process. (S251). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S251: YES), the processing proceeds to S252, and the control status If it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S251: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S252, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S 252: YES), the process proceeds to S 254, and if the value of the time reduction game count is determined not to be “0” (S252: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving number counter is executed (S253).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the first special symbol game is a first special symbol game in which a special gaming state of a normal big hit is derived (S254). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the first special symbol game in which the special gaming state of the big hit is usually derived (S 254: NO), the processing proceeds to S 256 and the first special game state of the big hit is normally derived If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S254: YES), the time reduction number corresponding to the derived special game state (usually a big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S255). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is "D" or "H" corresponding to 4R normal big hit, "50", "30" or "20" in the time reduction counter according to the acquired random number. Set one of. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S256.

  At S256, the main CPU 60 executes processing to update the specific-time short counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates a specific time shorting counter used when the special gaming state derived in the first special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 60 has the derived special symbol corresponding to the probability fluctuation big hit "A", "B", "C", "E", "F" or "G" In this case, the special time counter is set to infinity (until the next special gaming state is derived), and the derived special symbol is “D” or “H” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit. The processing to clear this specific time short-time counter is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the second special symbol non-change flag (see S156 in FIG. 26) is set (S257). If the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol invariable flag is not set (S 257: NO), the process proceeds to S 259 and it is determined that the second special symbol invariable flag is set. In the case where it is determined that the second special symbol invariable flag is cleared (S258: YES), the process proceeds to S259.

  At S259, main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of pending items corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, in the first special symbol storage area Make an update. Also, in this process, when the first special symbol game is in a special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit), it is used in the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game and in the first special symbol game The random time determining random number is stored in the main RAM 62 until the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 (S260), and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game end processing executed in S79 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether the control state flag of the second special symbol is the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end process ((07) S271). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S271: YES), the processing is shifted to S272 and the control status If it is determined that the flag is not the value (07) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S271: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  At S272, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S 272: YES), the process proceeds to S 274, and if the value of the time reduction game count is determined not to be “0” (S272: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving number counter is executed (S273).

  In S274, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol game is a second special symbol game in which a special gaming state of a normal big hit is derived (S274). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the second special symbol game in which the special gaming state of the big hit is normally derived (S 274: NO), the processing proceeds to S 276 and the second special game state of the big hit is normally derived If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S274: YES), the time reduction number corresponding to the derived special game state (normally big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S275). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is "d" or "h" corresponding to 4R normal big hit, "50", "30", or "20" in the time reduction counter according to the acquired random number. Set one of. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S276.

  At S276, the main CPU 60 executes a process of updating the specific-time short counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates a specific time shorting counter used when the special gaming state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, when the derived special symbol corresponding to probability fluctuation big hit is “a”, “b”, “c”, “e”, “f” or “g”, the main CPU 60 determines the specific time Set the number counter to infinity (until the next special game state is derived), and clear this specific time counter if the derived special symbol is “d” or “h” corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot Do the processing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag (see S176 in FIG. 27) is set (S277). When the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S277: NO), the process proceeds to S279, and it is determined that the first special symbol non-change flag is set In the case (S277: YES), after the process of clearing the first special symbol non-change flag is executed (S278), the process proceeds to S279.

  At S279, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (second special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of pending items corresponding to the second special symbol 231 so as to decrease by "1" in the second special symbol storage area Make an update. Also, in this process, when the second special symbol game is a special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit), it is used in the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game and the second special symbol game The random time determining random number is stored in the main RAM 62 until the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control status flag of the second special symbol 231 (S280), and the present subroutine is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol control process (S16) is performed after executing the first special symbol control process (S15) as the processing order with the first special symbol 221 as the pursuit target. In this way, temporarily the scheduled stop time of the first special symbol 221 scheduled for a definite variation big hit symbol stop and the scheduled scheduled stop time of the second special symbol 231 normally scheduled for a big hit symbol stop are exactly the same, ie, the remaining fluctuation time Even if it is the same, the first special symbol control process (S15) is executed first to forcibly and in advance control the second special symbol 231 in the first special symbol control process (S15) It becomes possible to execute change processing. By the processing similar to such pre-emption control, the probability variation big hit based on the first special symbol 221 is executed, and the second special symbol 231 is forcibly stopped by losing, so the same remaining variation time is selected It is also possible to chase after, and it is possible to extend the chase period. If the second special symbol is to be pursued, the second special symbol control process can be coped with by replacing the flow before the first special symbol control process, and a highly versatile gaming machine can be provided. .

  Next, processing in the sub control circuit 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sub control circuit 7. The sub control circuit 7 receives various commands from the main control circuit 6, and performs display control processing (see FIG. 37), voice control processing (see FIG. 38), lamp control processing (see FIG. 39), and movable member control Various processing such as processing (see FIG. 40) is performed. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In the main processing of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 first executes initialization processing (S291). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes an initialization setting process in response to power on.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes random number value update processing (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of updating random number values (random numbers for effect determination, random numbers for big hit effect determination, random numbers for stop symbol determination, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 executes command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In this process, the sub CPU 71 analyzes the command received from the main control circuit 6 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. Run.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sequentially executes the display control process (S294), the voice control process (S295), the lamp control process (S296), and the movable member control process (S297), and then shifts the process to S292 The process of 297 is repeatedly executed. The details of the processing of S292 to 297 will be described later.

Command analysis processing
FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process executed in S293 of FIG.

  In this command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether or not there is a reception command (S301). If the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a reception command (S301: YES), the process proceeds to S302, and if it is determined that there is no reception command, the present subroutine ends.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 executes read processing of command data stored in the reception buffer. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S303.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not a fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. In this process, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command is received (S303: YES), the process proceeds to S304, and when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command is not received (S303: NO), The processing shifts to step S305.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a plurality of predetermined effect patterns in accordance with the effect determination table stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 7, based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect determination random number value. Determine the presentation pattern. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether or not a derived symbol designation command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the derived symbol designation command has been received (S305: YES), the process proceeds to S306, and if it is determined that the derived symbol designation command has not been received ( S305: NO), the process proceeds to S307.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining a derived decorative symbol to be stopped in the variation from a plurality of derived decorative symbols determined in advance based on the derived symbol specification command, and ends this subroutine.

  In S307, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether or not a follow-up notification start command has been received. The chase notification start command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 60 when the chase notification flag is set in the main RAM 62 by the main CPU 60 in S123 of FIG. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the chase notification start command has been received (S 307: YES), the process proceeds to S 308, and if it is determined that the chase notification start command has not been received ( S307: NO), the process proceeds to S310.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a follow-up notification preparation flag in the work RAM 73 (S308), and then executes a process of setting a follow-up time timer (S309). The follow-up notification preparation flag is a flag necessary to execute the follow-up notification effect. This is confirmed in S323 of display control processing of FIG. 37 described later, S331 of voice control processing of FIG. 38, S341 of lamp control processing of FIG. 39, and S351 of movable member control processing of FIG. The follow-up time timer is loaded in S324 of display control processing of FIG. 37 described later, S332 of voice control processing of FIG. 38, S342 of lamp control processing of FIG. 39, and S352 of movable member control processing of FIG. is there. The value of the chase time timer is determined by the main CPU 60 with reference to FIG. 13 (or FIG. 14) in S124 of FIG. 23, and is the fluctuation time (chuck time) of the second special symbol 231 set in the main RAM 62 , Transmitted from the main CPU 60.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether or not the follow notification notification end command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a follow-up notification end command has been received (S310: YES), the process proceeds to S311, and if it is determined that a follow-up notification end command has not been received ( S310: NO), the process proceeds to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes the processing of clearing the follow notification notification preparation flag from the work RAM 73, and then ends the present subroutine.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether a demo display start command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demo display start command has been received (S312: YES), the process proceeds to S313, and if it is determined that the demo display start command has not been received ( S312: NO), the process proceeds to S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting a demonstration display execution flag in the work RAM 73, and ends the present subroutine.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether a demo display end command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demo display end command has been received (S 314: YES), the process proceeds to S 315, and if it is determined that the demo display end command has not been received ( S314: NO), the process proceeds to S316.

  In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for clearing the demonstration display execution flag from the work RAM 73, and ends the present subroutine.

  In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs processing corresponding to the received other command, for example, start winning update processing for updating the number of stored start winnings (number of holdings), effect in the special gaming state (special gaming state starting effect, first or The determination processing of the effect during opening of the second large winning opening 16A, 16B, the effect at the end of the special gaming state) is executed. When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

Display control processing
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display control process performed in S294 of FIG. The display control process is a process of controlling display on the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5.

  In the display control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether the demonstration display execution flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S321). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display execution flag is set (S 321: YES), after executing the demonstration display process (S 322), the process proceeds to S 323 and the demonstration display execution is performed. If it is determined that the flag is not set (S321: NO), the process proceeds to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S323: YES), the process proceeds to S324, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S323: NO), the process proceeds to S327.

  In S324, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase time countdown display processing (S325). This process is performed as a display of a digital number by two 7 segment LED in the display decoration member 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the countdown of the chase time may be made to display the remaining time of chase time correctly (display at one time), or to divide the plural times so as to select the continuous / non-continuous every specific time May be displayed. For example, when 90 seconds are determined as the pursuit time, the countdown may be started from 90 seconds and ended in 0 seconds, or may be started from 45 seconds and started again from 0 seconds in 0 seconds. You may do it. During the pursuit time countdown, the displayed count value may be increased. The pursuit time may be counted down in another display device such as the liquid crystal display device 3 instead of or in addition to the display decoration member 5.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start opening winning promotion display process (S326). In this process, the liquid crystal display device 3 displays that the first starting hole 14A should be made to have a game ball and that a big hit lottery with the first special symbol display device 22 should be made. This is because when a reach effect occurs as a decorative symbol production in a predetermined gaming state, or when the decorative symbols are aligned, there is a player who stops the launch of the gaming ball by stopping the so-called hit, so the game ball It is necessary to urge the player to hit the first starting opening 14A to win a game ball. In addition, when the decorative pattern is complete, because the special game state is digested by hitting the right, if the player misunderstands that the special game state is to be started, the first hit is the first. 1 Since there is no possibility of winning the game ball in the starting opening 14A, promoting the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 14A also in the meaning of prompting attention that the special gaming state is not started immediately (promoting the left strike ) Is important. It is preferable that the liquid crystal display device 3 actively give an explanation of the chase time and a display to the effect that the chase time is, in addition to the display for promoting the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 14A. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 3, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is retracted downward, and the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed / stopped thereabove It may be displayed.

  When the sub CPU 71 completes the process of S326, or when it is determined that the pursuit notification preparation flag is not set in S323 (S323: NO), display processing in the other liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5 Is executed (S327), and this subroutine is ended.

  The display processing in the liquid crystal display device 3 and the display decoration member 5 is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting data for performing display on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 75. For example, when displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 3, in the display control circuit 75, VDP (not shown) is based on data for displaying an effect image from the sub CPU 71, data of a decorative symbol, Various image data such as background image data and effect image data are read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3.

[Voice control processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the voice control process executed in S295 of FIG. The voice control process is a process of controlling voice data (notification sound, sound effect, music, speech, etc.) output from the speaker 761.

  In this voice control process, the sub CPU 71 first executes a process of determining whether a follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S331: YES), the process proceeds to S332, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S331: NO), the process proceeds to S335.

  In S332, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase time countdown voice output processing (S333). This processing is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting audio data to the audio control circuit 76 and controlling the speaker 761 by the audio control circuit 76. For example, music specific to the chase time is output from the speaker 761, and the remaining chase time is announced by voice, such as "remaining 30 seconds".

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a first starting opening winning promotion sound output process (S334). In this process, for example, a voice such as "Please put a ball in the start chucker (the first start port 14A)" is output through the speaker 761.

  If the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S331 (S331: NO), the sub-CPU 71 executes other voice output processing (S335), and this subroutine is executed. finish.

[Ramp control processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the lamp control process performed in S296 of FIG. The lamp control process is a process of controlling an effect pattern (lights on / off of the lamps) by the lamps 771.

  In the lamp control process, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S342, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S341: NO), the process proceeds to S344.

  In S342, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase time countdown ramp output processing (S343). This processing is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting lamp lighting pattern data to the lamp control circuit 77 and controlling the lamp 771 by the lamp control circuit 77. For the lamp 771, for example, the lamp 771 is turned on / off in a pattern specific to the pursuit time.

  When the sub-CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S341 (S341: NO), the sub CPU 71 executes other lamp output processing (S344), and this subroutine is executed. finish.

[Movable member control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the movable member control process performed in S296 of FIG.

  In the movable member control process, first, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of determining whether the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S351). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73 (S 351: YES), the process proceeds to S 352, and the follow-up notification preparation flag is set in the work RAM 73. If it is determined that there is not (S351: NO), the process proceeds to S354.

  In S352, after loading the chase time timer, the sub CPU 71 executes chase movement processing (S353). This process is executed by the sub CPU 71 transmitting data for moving the movable members 4A and 4B to the movable member control circuit 74 and controlling the movable members 4A and 4B by the movable member control circuit 74. In this process, the movable member control circuit 74 moves, for example, the launch cylinder as the movable member 4B up and down to vibrate left and right, or vibrates the character body as the movable member 4A at the standby position above the liquid crystal display device 3. , And is moved to the center of the liquid crystal display 3 and rotated at the center of the liquid crystal display 3.

  If the sub CPU 71 determines that the follow-up notification preparation flag is not set in S 351 (S 351: NO), the sub-CPU 71 executes other movable member movable processing (S 354). Finish.

[Modification]
Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following, the description in common with the pachinko gaming machine described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40 is basically omitted and the differences are mainly described. I assume.

  In this modification, a small hit is added as a hit in addition to the probability fluctuation big hit and the normal big hit, and it is possible to set a tracking time corresponding to the small hit. Here, the "small hit" refers to a hit where there is no change in the gaming state before and after the small hit gaming state which is shifted after the small hit. Specifically, when the small hitting game state is digested in the normal gaming state and the small hitting gaming state is digested, the gaming state after the small hitting gaming state remains the normal gaming state before the small hitting gaming state, and the probability variation game There is no transition to the state. Similarly, when the small hit gaming state is digested in the small fluctuation gaming state, the gaming state after the small hitting gaming state remains the small fluctuation gaming state before the small hitting gaming state, and the normal gaming state There is no need to move to

  In the small hit gaming state in this modified example, the first large winning opening 16A opens the small hitting with the first special symbol 221, and the second large winning opening 16B opens the small hitting with the second special symbol 231. The total open time is very short, for example, 1.8 seconds.

  The opening time and opening number of the first large winning opening 16A or the second winning opening 16B may be designed appropriately, and in the small hitting gaming state, the first large winning opening 16A and the second winning as in the big hitting gaming state The mouth 16B may be alternately opened.

[First special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 41 shows a hit determination table of the first special symbol of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hit determination table of the first special symbol is a variation of the hit determination table of the first special symbol of FIG.

  The hit determination table of the first special symbol of the modification is triggered by the fact that the first start opening ball sensor 141 detects that the gaming ball has won in the first start opening 14A, based on the acquired random number. It is referred to when making a lottery per special symbol. In the first special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, and the big hit random number value in the normal gaming state is one “0”, and the big hit random number value in the probability variation gaming state is 10 of “0” to “9” Is one. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. In addition, the small hitting random number value in the normal gaming state is two “10” and “11”, and the small hitting random number value in the probability variation gaming state is also two “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is acquired, after the change stop of the first special symbol 221, it shifts to the special game state, and when the small hit random number is obtained, the small hit game state after the change stop of the first special symbol 221 Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of acquiring (other than random number) other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, there is no transition of the gaming state after the variation stop of the first special symbol 221.

[Pattern determination table of the first special symbol]
FIG. 42 shows the symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The symbol determination table of the first special symbol is a modification of the hit determination table of the first special symbol of FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the first special symbol of the modification acquires the big hit random number or the small hit random number in the random lottery of the first special symbol 221 (in the normal gaming state, "0", "10", "11", probability fluctuation) It is referred to when “0” to “11” are acquired in the gaming state (see FIG. 41). In the symbol determination of the first special symbol 221, a symbol determination random number is used, and the lottery random number range is 0-5.

  In the symbol determination in the normal gaming state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “A” at 15R probability variation big hit, and the acquired symbol determination random number is “1” 8R. If the derived special symbol is "B" and the acquired symbol determination random number is "2", the derived symbol is "C" and the acquired symbol determination random number is "3" to "5". In the case of “4R, a special symbol derived at a normal big hit corresponds to“ D ”. When the acquired special game state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “E”.

  In the symbol judgment of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired symbol judgment random number is “0”, the derived symbol is “F” at 15R probability variation big hit, and the acquired symbol judgment random number is “1”. If the special symbol derived in the 8R probability variation big hit is "G" and the acquired symbol determination random number is "2", the derived symbol in the 4R probability variation big hit is "H", the acquired symbol determination random number is "3"-" In the case of 5 ", the special symbol derived in 4R usually big hit corresponds to" I ". When the acquired special game state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “J”.

  When the random number for symbol judgment in the symbol judgment lottery is “0”, “1”, and “2”, it is from the first rotation after the end of the special gaming state to the next big win in the big hit lottery of the special symbol It becomes time saving game state. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short game state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is set. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, it becomes a time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, the short game state from the first rotation to the twentieth rotation after the end of the special gaming state is established. In the case of a small hit, the short time gaming state is not newly started, that is, when a small hit is won in the non short time gaming state (normal gaming state A), the small hit gaming state If the game is not in the short game mode after the end of the game, and the small hit is won in the short game mode (the normal game mode B and the probability change game mode), the short game mode is continued after the small hit game mode is over. However, the number of time savings is also taken over.

[Collision judgment table for the second special symbol]
FIG. 43 shows a hit determination table of the second special symbol of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hit determination table of the second special symbol is a variation of the hit determination table of the second special symbol of FIG.

  The hit determination table for the second special symbol of the modified example is when the second special symbol lottery is triggered by the fact that the second start opening ball sensor 142 detects that the game ball has won in the second start opening 14B. Is referred to. In the second special symbol lottery, the lottery random number range is 0 to 299, the hit random number value in the normal gaming state is one of “0”, and the hit random number value in the probability variation gaming state is 10 of “0” to “9”. Is one. Therefore, the jackpot probability is a low probability of 1/300 in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot probability is a high probability of 1/30 (10/300) in the probability variation gaming state. In addition, the small hitting random number value in the normal gaming state is two “10” and “11”, and the small hitting random number value in the probability variation gaming state is also two “10” and “11”. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1/150 (2/300) in both the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state.

  When the big hit random number is acquired, after the change stop of the second special symbol 231, it shifts to the special game state, and when the small hit random number is obtained, the small hit game state after the change stop of the second special symbol 231 Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of acquiring (loss random number) other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, there is no transition of the gaming state after the fluctuation of the second special symbol 231 is stopped.

[Symbol determination table of the second special symbol]
FIG. 44 shows a symbol determination table of the second special symbol of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The symbol determination table of the second special symbol is a modification of the hit determination table of the first special symbol of FIG.

  The symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of the modification acquires the big hit random number or the small hit random number in the random lottery of the second special symbol 231 (in the normal gaming state, "0", "10", "11", probability) It is referred to when “0” to “11” are acquired in the variation gaming state (see FIG. 43). In the symbol determination of the second special symbol 231, a symbol determination random number is used, and the random number range is 0-5.

  In the symbol determination in the normal gaming state, when the acquired symbol determination random number is “0”, the derived special symbol is “a” at 15R probability variation big hit, and the acquired symbol determination random number is “1” 8R. If the derived special symbol is "b" and the acquired symbol determination random number is "2", the derived symbol is "c" and the acquired symbol determination random number is "3" to "5". In the case of “4R, the derived special symbol corresponds to“ d ”at 4R usually a big hit. When the acquired special game state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “e”.

  In the symbol judgment of the probability variation gaming state, when the acquired symbol judgment random number is “0”, the derived symbol is “f” at 15R probability variation big hit, and the acquired symbol judgment random number is “1”. If the special symbol derived in the 8R probability variation big hit is "g", and the acquired symbol determination random number is "2", the derived symbol in the 4R probability variation big hit is "h", the acquired symbol determination random number is "3"-" In the case of 5 ", the derived special symbol corresponds to" i "at 4R usually a big hit. When the acquired special game state determination random number corresponds to a small hit random number (“10”, “11”), the derived special symbol corresponds to “j”.

  Acquisition of random numbers for symbol judgment in the symbol judgment lottery If the random numbers for “0”, “1” and “2”, win the big hit in the big hit lottery of the special symbol from the first turn after the end of the special gaming state It will be a short game state until it is done. When the random number for symbol determination in the symbol determination lottery is “3”, the short game state from the first rotation to the 50th rotation after the end of the special gaming state is obtained. When the acquired random number of the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “4”, it becomes a time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 30th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. When the acquisition random number of the symbol determination random number in the symbol determination lottery is “5”, it becomes a time-saving gaming state from the first rotation to the 20th rotation after the end of the special gaming state. In the case of a small hit, the short time gaming state is not newly started, that is, when a small hit is won in the non short time gaming state (normal gaming state A), the small hit gaming state If the game is not in the short game mode after the end of the game, and the small hit is won in the short game mode (the normal game mode B and the probability change game mode), the short game mode is continued after the small hit game mode is over. However, the number of time savings is also taken over.

[Variation time determination table]
FIG. 45 shows a variation time determination table of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This fluctuation time determination table is a modification of the fluctuation time determination table of FIG.

  The variation time determination table of the modified example is based on the derived special symbol determined in the symbol determination table of the first special symbol 221 of FIG. 42 or the symbol determination table of the second special symbol 231 of FIG. The variation time of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is determined. The range of the fluctuation time determination random number is 0-2.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the normal gaming state A (no time reduction), the derived special symbol is “A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”, that is, the special symbol hits per lottery When the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 50 seconds when it is “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. 60 seconds. If the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", or "E" or "e", that is, the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "normal big hit" or "small hit" When the random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 40 seconds, when it is “1”, the fluctuation time is 55 seconds, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation time is 65 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the random drawing of the special symbol is "loss", the variation time is 10 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0". In the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the normal gaming state B (with time reduction), the derivation special symbol is "A", "a", "B", "b", "C", or "c", that is, the random drawing of the special symbol If the result is “probability fluctuation big hit”, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds when it is “1”, and the fluctuation time is “2”. Is 40 seconds. If the derived special symbol is "D" or "d", or "E" or "e", that is, the result of the lottery for the special symbol is "normal big hit" or "small hit" When the random number is “0”, the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, when it is “1”, the fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is "loss", when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds, "1" In the case of “”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds.

  In the fluctuation time determination in the probability fluctuation gaming state, the derived special symbol is "F", "f", "G", "g", "H" or "h", that is, the result of the lottery of hitting the special symbol "probability" In the case of "fluctuation big hit", when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the fluctuation time is 15 seconds, when it is "1", the fluctuation time is 20 seconds, and when it is "2", the fluctuation time is 25 seconds. . If the derived special symbol is "I", "J", or "j", that is, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is the "normal big hit" or "small hit" of the first special symbol 221, the acquired fluctuation time When the determination random number is “0”, the variation time is 20 seconds, when “1”, the variation time is 25 seconds, and when “2”, the variation time is 30 seconds. When the derived special symbol is "-" (not applicable), that is, when the result of the random drawing of the special symbol is "loss", the variation time is 5 seconds when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0". In the case of “”, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds.

  If the derived special symbol is "i", that is, if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is "normal big hit", the fluctuation time is determined based on the pursuit time determination table shown in FIG. Do.

[Pulse time determination table]
FIG. 46 shows a chase time determination table of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This chase time determination table is a modification of the chase time determination table of FIG.

  The pursuit time determination table of the modification is to be referred to in order to determine the fluctuation time when the result of the lottery of the second special symbol 231 in the probability fluctuation state is “usually a big hit”. The pursuit time is determined based on the special symbol of the previous hit and the acquired random number for determining the fluctuation time (random number range 0 to 2).

  If the special symbol is “A” or “a” (normally 15R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, the pursuit time (second special symbol 231) The fluctuation time when "is a big hit" is 150 seconds, the pursuit time is 180 seconds when it is "1", the pursuit time is 210 seconds when it is "2", and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds) ).

  When the special symbol is “B” or “b” (normally 8R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), when the acquired variation time determination random number is “0”, the pursuit time is 100 seconds, “1 In the case of “”, the pursuit time is 120 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the pursuit time is 140 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  If the special symbol is "C" or "c" (normally 4R probability variation hit in gaming state A, B), when the acquired random number for determining the variation time is "0", the pursuit time is 50 seconds, "1 In the case of “”, the pursuit time is 60 seconds, and in the case of “2”, the pursuit time is 70 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 1 minute (60 seconds).

  When the special symbol is "F" or "f" (15R probability variation big hit in the probability variation state), when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 200 seconds, and when "1". The pursuit time is 240 seconds, and when it is “2”, the pursuit time is 280 seconds, and the average pursuit time is 4 minutes (240 seconds).

  When the special symbol is "G" or "g" (8R probability variation big hit in probability fluctuation state), if the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 150 seconds, and if "1" The pursuit time is 180 seconds, and in the case of "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds, and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  When the special symbol is "H" or "h" (4R probability variation big hit in probability variation state), when the acquired variation time determination random number is "0", the pursuit time is 100 seconds, and when it is "1". The chasing time is 120 seconds, and in the case of "2", the chasing time is 140 seconds, and the average chasing time is 2 minutes (120 seconds).

  When the special symbol is “J” or “j” (small hit in probability fluctuation state), the chasing time is 150 seconds when the acquired fluctuation time determination random number is “0”, and chasing when it is “1”. When the time is 180 seconds, and when "2", the pursuit time is 210 seconds and the average value of the pursuit time is 3 minutes (180 seconds).

  The special symbol is the probability fluctuation big hit (“A”, “a”, “B”, “b”, “C” or “c”) in the normal gaming state A, B and the probability fluctuation big hit in the probability fluctuation gaming state ( Even in the case of “F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H” or “h”), the probability fluctuation big hit having a large number of rounds advantageous by the player has a pursuit time (average value) It is preferential. That is, as the special symbol more advantageous to the player, the chase time (average value) is favored, and the chase possibility (the fluctuation time corresponding to the “normal jackpot” in the second special symbol 231 during the probability change gaming state) In the case of being fluctuated, the probability fluctuation big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol 221, and the possibility of the first special symbol 221 being stopped earlier than the second special symbol 231 is made higher ing.

  Also, the special symbol is the probability fluctuation big hit ("A", "a", "B", "b", "C" or "c") in the normal gaming state A, B and the probability fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state In the big hit (“F”, “f”, “G”, “g”, “H” or “h”), the chase time (average value) is better for the probability fluctuation jackpot in the probability fluctuation gaming state It is done. That is, as the special symbol acquired in a more advantageous situation for the player, the pursuit time (average value) is favored, and the pursuit possibility (the second special symbol 231 becomes “usually a big hit” during the probability variation gaming state) If you are fluctuating with the corresponding fluctuation time, win the probability fluctuation big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol 221, and the possibility of the first special symbol 221 being stopped and displayed earlier than the second special symbol 231 is high It is made to be.

  The variation time when the special symbol is a small hit ("J" or "j") in the probability variation state is determined using the variation time determination table in FIG. 45 described above, but the chase time determination in FIG. As shown in the table, not only by the special symbol (probability fluctuation big hit) of the previous hit and the random time determination random number acquired at that time, the special symbol of the previous small hit and it acquired at that time The pursuit time is also set by the random number for fluctuation time determination. From such a configuration, by making it possible to change the chasing time triggered by a small hit, the game characteristics are diversified and the interest of the game is improved.

The determination of the chase time is similar to the chase time determination table described with reference to FIG.
You may make it determine pursuit time according to the progress stage (the number of times of digestion) of time saving game.

[First special symbol control process]
FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a first special symbol control process of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first special symbol control process is a modification of the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19 executed in S15 of FIG.

  47, the numerical values described on the side of S362 to S372 indicate the control status flags of the first special symbol 221 corresponding to those steps, and function as the control status flags of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control status flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the gaming status of the first special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S362 to S372 to be performed. Here, S362 to S368 and S372 are the same as S62 to S69 in the first special symbol control process of FIG. 19, and in the first special symbol control process of the modification, S369 to S371 regarding small hits are added. In this respect, it differs from the first special symbol control process of FIG. Here, S362 is a first special symbol memory check process (00), S363 is a first special symbol variation time management process (01), S364 is a first special symbol display time management process (02), S365 is a special gaming state start Interval management processing (03), S366 is the first big winning opening open processing (04), S367 is the second large winning opening opening processing (05), S368 is the special game state end interval processing (06), S369 is small The hit gaming state start interval processing (07), S370 is a small hit gaming state first large winning opening open processing (08), S371 is a small hit gaming state end interval processing (09), S372 is the first 1 special symbol game end processing (10).

  In the first special symbol control process of the modification, after the main CPU 60 first executes processing for loading the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 stored in the main RAM 62 (S 361), the first special symbol 221 is In accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag, it is determined in each step (S362 to S372) whether or not to execute various processing, and one step for the numerical value is executed to advance the first special symbol game. Become.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state, when the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 controls the control status flag of the first special symbol 221. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processes of S362, S363, S364, and S372 shown in FIG. 47 are executed at predetermined timing.

  When the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to "00", when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Execute the processing of S362, S363, S364, and S365 shown in FIG. 47 at a predetermined timing by setting 01 "," 02 ", and" 03 "in order, and execute control to the big hit gaming state. become. Furthermore, when control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag to "04" and "05" in order, thereby setting the processing of S366 and S367 shown in FIG. 47 to a predetermined timing. It will be executed and a big hit game will be executed. When the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 also terminates the big hit gaming state end interval processing of S 368 if the big hit gaming state is ended in the processing of S 366 or S 367 shown in FIG. 47. And S372 execute the first special symbol game end process (10).

  When the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to "00" when the result of the hit determination is a small hit. By sequentially setting “01”, “02”, “07”, “08”, “09”, and “10”, S362, S363, S364, S369, S370, S371, and S372 shown in FIG. Processing is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the small hit gaming state is executed.

  In the processing of S362 to S372 in FIG. 47, the processing related to the small hit will be described later, but the processing in S362 to S372 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol storage check process (00) of S362, the main CPU 60 performs the first special symbol variation time management process (S363) on condition that the value of the first special symbol hold number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 221 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the first special symbol memory check process, the control status flag (01) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer are set, so that the first special symbol of S 363 after the lapse of the fluctuation time set as the waiting time timer The fluctuation time management process (01) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol variation time management process (01) of S363, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process. When a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in the fluctuation of the symbol 221 (when the first special symbol 221 has stopped changing), the control status flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the first special symbol display time management process After setting, the waiting time is set to the waiting time timer. In the first special symbol variation time management process, by setting the control status flag (02) of the first special symbol 221 and the waiting time timer, after the waiting time after being set as the waiting time timer elapses, the third of S364 1 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol display time management process (02) of S364, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation When has passed, processing is executed to determine whether or not a special game state or a small hit.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (03) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the special gaming status start interval management process when it is a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special gaming status start interval to the waiting time timer Do. Thus, the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S365 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (07) of the first special symbol 221 indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management processing when the small hit is small, and the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval Set to the waiting time timer. Thus, the small hit gaming state start interval management process (07) of S369 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S365, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process, and the special gaming state start interval is When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets the value indicating the first big winning opening open process, sets the control status flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first big winning opening opening time Set to timer. In the special gaming state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the first special symbol 221 and the first large winning opening opening time timer are set, after the first large winning opening opening time timer is set It is set such that the process of opening the first big winning opening in S366 (04) is executed.

  In the first big winning opening open processing (04) of S366, the main CPU 60 sets the first special winning opening 221 to the first big winning opening opening processing (4). Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the first special symbol 221, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (05) indicating the second big winning opening open process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and an open upper limit (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second big winning opening open time timer. Thereby, in the first big winning opening open processing, the control flag (05) of the first special symbol 221 is set, whereby the second big winning opening opening processing (05) of S367 is executed, and the first When the control status flag (06) of the special symbol 221 is set, the special game status end interval processing (06) of S368 is set to be executed.

  In the second big winning opening open processing (05) of S367, when the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 60 performs the second Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the second large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the big hit gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 while it determines that it is not the final round, A value (04) indicating the first large winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221, and an opening upper limit (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first large opening opening time timer. In the second large winning opening opening processing, the first large winning opening opening processing (04) of S366 is executed again by setting the control status flag (04) of the first special symbol 221, and the first special symbol is processed. When the control state flag (06) of 221 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S368 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval process (06) of S368, the main CPU 60 sets the first special winning opening open time when the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval. Clear the time set in the timer or the second big winning opening opening time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and check the remaining balls of the winning opening opened last in that time Do the processing. Then, when the time corresponding to the special game state end interval (remaining ball check processing time) has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thus, the first special symbol game end process (10) of S372 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state start interval process (07) of S369, the main CPU 60 sets the small hit gaming state start interval management process as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 to a small hit gaming state start process. When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, processing for opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 further opens the first large winning opening (processing during the small hitting gaming state first large winning opening open) and sets the control state flag (08) of the first special symbol 221 and opens the upper limit time (for example, about 25 seconds) is set to the first big winning opening opening time timer. As a result, after the first large winning opening opening time timer is set, the small hitting gaming state first large winning opening opening processing (08) of S 370 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming character first large winning opening open processing (08) of S370, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 to a small hitting gaming state first large winning opening open processing (08 (08) ), The condition that the first large winning opening winning combination counter is a predetermined value (for example "9") or more, the open upper limit time has elapsed (the first large winning opening opening time timer is "0") If it is determined that one of the conditions is satisfied, a value (09) indicating the small hitting gaming state end interval processing is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thus, the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S371 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state end interval processing (09) of S371, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 indicates the small hit gaming state end interval (09), and the small hit gaming state end interval A value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game when the corresponding time (the first big winning opening opened in the small hitting gaming state, or the remaining ball checking processing time in the second big winning opening) has elapsed Is set in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221. Thus, the first special symbol game end process (10) of S372 is set to be executed.

  In the first special symbol game end process (10) of S372, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol when the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (10) indicating the end of the first special symbol game. A value (00) indicating memory check processing is set. In the first special symbol game end process, the first special symbol memory check process of S362 is set to be executed again, and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol control process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol control process of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The second special symbol control process is a modification of the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20 executed in S16 of FIG.

  In FIG. 48, numerical values described on the side of S382 to S392 indicate control state flags of the second special symbol 231 corresponding to those steps, and function as control state flags of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62. It is stored in the storage area. The control status flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates the gaming status of the second special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processing from S382 to S392. Here, S382 to S388 and S392 are the same as S72 to S79 in the second special symbol control process of FIG. 20, and in the second special symbol control process of the modified example, S389 to S391 concerning small hits are added In this respect, it differs from the second special symbol control process of FIG. Here, S382 is a second special symbol memory check process (00), S383 is a second special symbol variation time management process (01), S384 is a second special symbol display time management process (02), S385 is a special gaming state start Interval management process (03), S386 is the first big winning opening open process (04), S387 is the second big winning opening open process (05), S388 is the special gaming state end interval process (06), S389 is small The hit gaming state start interval processing (07), S390 is a small hit gaming state second large winning opening open processing (08), S391 is a small hit gaming state end interval processing (09), S392 is the first 2 special symbol game end processing (10).

  In the second special symbol control process of the modification, after the main CPU 60 first executes processing for loading the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 stored in the main RAM 62 (S 381), the second special symbol 231 is In accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag, it is determined in each step (S382 to S392) whether or not various processing is to be executed, and the step for the numerical value is executed to advance the second special symbol game.

  Specifically, when the gaming state is not the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 controls the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 when the result of the hit determination is a loss. By sequentially setting “00”, “01”, “02”, and “10”, the processes of S382, S383, S384, and S392 shown in FIG. 48 are executed at predetermined timing.

  When the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to "00", " Execute the processing of S382, S383, S384 and S385 shown in FIG. 48 at a predetermined timing by setting 01 "," 02 "and" 03 "in order, and execute control to the big hit gaming state become. Further, when control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the control state flag is set to “04” and “05” in order, and the processing of S 386 and S 387 shown in FIG. 48 is performed at a predetermined timing. Run and you will be playing a big hit game. When the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 60 also terminates the big hit gaming state end interval processing of S 388 if the end of the big hit gaming state is made in the processing of S 386 or S 387 shown in FIG. And the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392.

  When the gaming state is not a special gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to "00", "01", "02", "07". By setting “08”, “09”, and “10” in order, the processing of S382, S383, S384, S389, S390, S391, and S392 shown in FIG. The control to the game state will be executed.

  In the processes of S382 to S392 of FIG. 48, the process related to the small hit will be described later, but the processes of S382 to S392 will be briefly described below.

  In the first special symbol memory check process (00) of S382, the main CPU 60 displays the second special symbol variation time management process (S383) on condition that the value of the second special symbol hold number counter is not 0. The control state flag (01) of the special symbol 231 is set, and the fluctuation time is set as a waiting time timer. In the second special symbol memory check process, by setting the control status flag (01) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, the second special symbol S383 after the lapse of the fluctuation time set as the waiting time timer The fluctuation time management process (01) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process (01) of S383, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process. The second special symbol 231 control status flag (02) showing the second special symbol display time management when a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the variation of the special symbol 231 (when the second special symbol 231 has stopped changing) After setting, the waiting time is set to the waiting time timer. In the second special symbol variation time management process, by setting the control status flag (02) of the second special symbol 231 and the waiting time timer, after the waiting time after being set as the waiting time timer elapses, the third in S384 2 Special symbol display time management process (02) is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol display time management process (02) of S384, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process, and waits after confirmation When has passed, processing is executed to determine whether or not a special game state or a small hit.

  The main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (03) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the special gaming status start interval management processing when it is a big hit, and sets the time corresponding to the special gaming status start interval to the waiting time timer Do. Thus, the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S385 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the special gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  On the other hand, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag (07) of the second special symbol 231 indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management processing when the small hit is small, and the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval Set to the waiting time timer. Thereby, the small hit gaming state start interval management process (07) of S389 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the small hit gaming state start interval set as the waiting time timer has elapsed.

  In the special gaming state start interval management process (03) of S385, the main CPU 60 sets the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 to a value (03) indicating the special gaming state start interval management process. When the corresponding time has elapsed, processing for opening the first big winning opening 16A is executed. The main CPU 60 sets a value indicating the second big winning opening open process, sets the control status flag (04) of the second special symbol 231, and opens the upper limit opening time (for example, about 25 seconds) to the first large winning opening opening time Set to timer. In the special gaming state start interval management process, after the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 and the first large winning opening opening time timer are set, the first large winning opening opening processing (04) of S386 is executed Set to be

  In the first big winning opening open processing (04) of S386, the main CPU 60 sets the first large winning combination when the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (04) indicating the large winning opening opening processing. Whether the condition that the mouth winning counter is a predetermined value (for example, "9") or more, or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the first big winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied or not Execute processing to determine When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the second special symbol 231, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (05) indicating the second large winning opening opening process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the second large opening opening time timer. Thus, in the first large winning opening open processing, the control state flag (05) of the second special symbol is set, whereby the second large winning opening opening processing (05) of S387 is executed, and the second When the control status flag (06) of the special symbol 231 is set, the special game status end interval processing (06) of S388 is set to be executed.

  In the second big winning opening open processing (05) of S387, when the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (05) indicating the second large winning opening opening processing, the main CPU 60 performs the second Whether the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "9") or the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the second large winning opening opening time timer is "0") Execute processing to determine whether or not. When the main CPU 60 determines that any of the conditions is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is greater than or equal to the maximum value (last round). Run. When the main CPU 60 determines that it is the final round, it sets the value (06) indicating the special gaming state end interval processing to the control status flag of the second special symbol 231, but determines that it is not the final round, A value (04) indicating the first big winning opening open process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 25 seconds) is set in the first big winning opening opening time timer. In the second large winning opening open processing, the control state flag (04) of the second special symbol 231 is set, so that the first large winning opening opening processing (04) of S386 is executed again, and the second special special symbol When the control state flag (06) of 231 is set, the special game state end interval process (06) of S388 is set to be executed.

  In the special game state end interval processing (06) of S388, when the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (06) indicating the special game state end interval, the main CPU 60 opens the first special winning opening. Clear the time set in the time timer, or the second big winning opening open time timer, set the remaining ball check processing time in the waiting time timer, and the remaining ball of the big winning opening opened last in that time Perform check processing. Then, when the time (remaining ball check processing time) corresponding to the special gaming state end interval has elapsed, a value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. As a result, the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state start interval processing (07) of S 389, the main CPU 60 has the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 a value (07) indicating the small hitting gaming state start interval management processing, and the small hit gaming state start When the time corresponding to the interval has elapsed, processing for opening the second large winning opening 16B is executed. The main CPU 60 further opens the second large winning opening 16B (small hit gaming state second large winning opening open processing), while setting the control state flag (08) of the second special symbol 231, and the opening upper limit time (for example, About 25 seconds) is set to the first large winning opening opening time timer. As a result, after the first large winning opening opening time timer is set, the small hitting gaming state second large winning opening opening processing (08) of S 390 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state second large winning opening open processing (08) of S390, the main CPU 60 has a value indicating that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 indicates a small hitting gaming state second large winning opening opening processing (08 ), The condition that the second large winning opening winning combination counter is a predetermined value (for example "9") or more, the open upper limit time has passed (the first large winning opening opening time timer is "0") If it is determined that one of the conditions is satisfied, a value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval process is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. Thus, the small hitting game state end interval process (09) of S391 is set to be executed.

  In the small hit gaming state end interval processing (09) of S391, the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval, and the small hit gaming state end interval A value indicating the end of the second special symbol game (10 when the corresponding time (the first big winning opening 16A opened in the small hitting gaming state or the second big winning opening 16B residual ball check processing) has elapsed. ) Is set in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231. As a result, the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392 is set to be executed.

  In the second special symbol game end process (10) of S392, when the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (10) indicating the end of the second special symbol game, the main CPU 60 selects the second special symbol. A value (00) indicating memory check processing is set. In the second special symbol game end process, the first special symbol memory check process of S 382 is set to be executed again, and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol fluctuation time determination process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the second special symbol variation time determination process of the variation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The second special symbol variation time determination process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time determination process executed in S109 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time determination process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state (S401). When the main CPU 60 determines that the game is in the probability variation gaming state (S401: YES), the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the second special symbol game usually derives a big hit or a small hit (S402) . That is, processing is performed to determine whether the determined second special symbol 231 corresponds to a special symbol that usually derives a big hit or a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that a normal big hit or a small hit is derived (S402: YES), the follow notification flag is set to a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S403). Here, the chase notification flag is to report that the player has won the normal big hit or small hit in the probability variation gaming state (usually it is a special symbol for deriving the big hit or small hit), and this chase notification flag is set When it is determined that the follow-up notification start command to start the follow-up notification is sent to the sub control circuit 7 is executed. Thereby, the sub control circuit 7 can recognize that the pursuit time has started.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines the variation time of the second special symbol 231 with reference to the follow-up time determination table of FIG. 46, and executes a process of setting the variation time in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 (S404). At this time, the main CPU 60 is based on the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the previous special game state stored in the main RAM 62, and the random time determination random number for the special symbol in the previous special game state. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 in the second special symbol game is determined with reference to the pursuit time determination table of FIG. Then, the main CPU 60 transmits the pursuit time (variation time) to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, the sub control circuit 7 can perform effects corresponding to the pursuit time.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that it is not in the probability variation gaming state (S401: NO), or in the probability variation gaming state (S401: YES), it is usually determined that there is no big hit or small hit. (S402: NO), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined according to the fluctuation time determination table of FIG. 45, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special symbol 231 is set (S405). That is, in S405, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is determined as usual, and it is set.

  When the main CPU 60 sets the variation time for the second special symbol 231 in S404 or S405, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

[First special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation time management process executed in S363 of FIG. The first special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the first special symbol variation time management process executed in S63 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol fluctuation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol fluctuation time management process ((01) S411). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S411: YES), the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01) indicating the first special symbol variation time management process (S411: NO), the present subroutine ends.

  In S412, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the first special symbol 221 is "0", and if it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0" (S412: YES) , S413. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S413, main CPU 60 determines whether first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined first special symbol 221 is “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, “H”, “ A process is performed to determine whether or not I "or" J "(see FIG. 42). In this processing, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hit gaming state (S413: YES), the processing is shifted to S414. If it is determined that the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state is not derived (S413: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  In S414, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the second special symbol 231 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is changing (S414: YES), the processing proceeds to S415, and it is determined that the second special symbol 231 is not changing. (S414: NO), the process proceeds to S416.

  At S415, the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231. That is, to determine the special symbol for deriving the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hitting gaming state in the first special symbol 221 during the change of the second special symbol 231 is the first special within the chase time Since it means that the winning lottery has been won in the symbol 221, priority is given to the hitting corresponding to the first special symbol 221. Therefore, when the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hitting gaming state is changing, the second special symbol 231 is changed to the special symbol for losing and forcedly stopped, the second special symbol 231 (2) If the special game state (big hit game state) or small hit game state of the special symbol 231 is canceled, and the second special symbol 231 is changing with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, it is compulsorily without changing the special symbol Stop it. In addition, you may perform the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-fluctuation flag performed by S156 of FIG. 26 following this process.

  In S416, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 in the control status flag of the first special symbol 221. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S417). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[Second special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation time management process executed in S383 of FIG. The second special symbol variation time management process is a modification of the second special symbol variation time management process executed in S73 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol variation time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process ((01) S421). When the main CPU 60 determines that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S421: YES), the process proceeds to S422. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the value is the value (01) indicating the second special symbol variation time management process (S421: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S422, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the waiting time timer of the second special symbol 231 is "0", and if it is determined that the waiting time timer is "0" (S422: YES) , S423. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S423, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving the special game state (big hit game state) or the small hit game state in the main CPU 60. In this process, the main CPU 60 determines that the determined second special symbol 231 is “a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “g”, “h”, “ A process is performed to determine whether i "or" j "(see FIG. 44). In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol 231 is a symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or a small hitting gaming state (S 423: YES), the processing is shifted to S 424. If it is determined that the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the symbol for deriving the small hitting gaming state is not determined (S 423: NO), the processing proceeds to S 426.

  In S424, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the first special symbol 221 is changing. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol 221 is changing (S424: YES), it shifts the process to S425 and determines that the first special symbol 221 is not changing. (S424: NO), the process proceeds to S426.

  At S425, the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the first special symbol 221. That is, the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small is selected because the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hit deriving the small hit gaming state is determined in the second special symbol 231 during the change of the first special symbol 221 In order to give priority to the stop display of the second special symbol 231 which is a hit gaming state, the derived symbol corresponding to the first special symbol 221 changes the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or the small hitting gaming state If it is inside, change it to the special symbol of the loss and forcibly stop it, and cancel the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) or small hitting gaming state of the first special symbol 221, and the first special symbol 221 is In the case of variation in the derived symbol corresponding to the loss, forcedly stop without changing the derived special symbol. In addition, you may perform the process which sets the 2nd special symbol non-fluctuation flag performed by S156 of FIG. 26 following this process.

  In S426, the main CPU 60 sets (stores) the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process as the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 in the control status flag of the second special symbol 231. Run.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to set (store) the post-confirmation waiting time as a waiting time timer in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 62 (S427). When this process ends, the present subroutine ends.

[First special symbol display time management process]
52 and 53 are flowcharts showing a first special symbol display time management process executed in S364 of FIG. The first special symbol display time management process is a modification of the first special symbol display time management process executed in S64 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process. Execute (S431). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S431: YES), the process proceeds to S432. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S431: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S431, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (02) indicating the first special symbol display time management process (S431: YES), the first special symbol display A process is executed to determine whether the value of the after-confirmation waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is "0" (S432). If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S432: YES), the process proceeds to S433, and it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0” If it has (S432: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  At S433, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether to shift to the special game state based on the first special symbol 221. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S433: YES), it shifts the process to S434, and if it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S433: NO), it proceeds to S441. Transition.

  In S434, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the special gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S 435), and then executes processing to set the second special symbol invariable flag (S 436), and processing in S 437 Migrate That is, while maintaining the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 during the special gaming state, the main CPU 60 prevents the variable display of the second special symbol 231 from being performed.

  In S437, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S 437: YES), after executing the process of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly terminate chase notification (S 438) , Shift the processing to S439. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S437: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S439.

  At S439, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not it is a time saving game state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time saving counter is not “0”, it can be determined that the time saving game mode is set, and therefore, the process proceeds to S440 to clear the time saving counter. At S440, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the time counter on the main RAM 62, and ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S439: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction game mode is not set, so there is no need to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S433 that it does not shift to the special game state (S433: NO), as shown in FIG. 53, does it shift to the small hit gaming state in S441 based on the first special symbol 221? Execute processing to determine whether or not. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the small hit gaming state (S441: YES), it shifts the processing to S442, and if it determines not to shift to the small hit gaming state (S441: NO), to S447. Migrate the process.

  In S442, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the value (07) indicating the small hitting game state start interval management process in the predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the small hit gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S 443), and then executes processing for setting the second special symbol non-variation flag (S 444). Migrate the process. That is, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol 221 during the small hitting gaming state, but does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol 231.

  At S445, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S445: YES), after executing the processing of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly terminate the chase notification (S446) , End this subroutine. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S445: NO), the main subroutine ends.

  In S447, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing in the predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Second special symbol display time management process]
54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol display time management process executed in S384 of FIG. The second special symbol display time management process is a modification of the second special symbol display time management process executed in S74 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 60 first determines whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process. It executes (S451). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S451: YES), the process proceeds to S452. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S451: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S451, when the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (02) indicating the second special symbol display time management process (S451: YES), the second special symbol display A process of determining whether or not the value of the after-determination waiting time timer corresponding to the management process is "0" is executed (S452). If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is “0” (S 452: YES), the process proceeds to S 453, and it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer after determination is not “0” If it has (S452: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S453, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether to shift to the special game state based on the second special symbol 231. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the special gaming state (S 453: YES), it shifts the processing to S 454, and if it determines not to shift to the special gaming state (S 453: NO), the processing to S 461 Transition.

  In S454, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (03) indicating a special gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting the special gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S455), and then executes processing for setting the first special symbol invariable flag (S456), and processing in S457 Migrate That is, while maintaining the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 during the special gaming state, the main CPU 60 prevents the variable display of the first special symbol 221 from being performed.

  At S457, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S 457: YES), after executing a process of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly terminate chase notification (S 458) , Shift the processing to S459. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S457: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S459.

  At S459, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 62 is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 60 can determine whether or not it is a time saving game state. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time saving counter is not “0”, it can be determined that the time saving game mode is set, and therefore, the process proceeds to S460 to clear the time saving counter. At S460, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the hour counter on the main RAM 62, and ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S 459: YES), it can be determined that the time reduction game mode is not set, so there is no need to clear the time reduction counter. Exit the subroutine

  If the main CPU 60 determines in S 453 that it does not shift to the special gaming state (S 453: NO), as shown in FIG. 55, in S 461 whether to shift to the small hitting gaming state based on the second special symbol 231 Execute processing to determine whether or not. If the main CPU 60 determines to shift to the small hit gaming state (S 461: YES), it shifts the process to S 462, and if it determines not to shift to the small hit gaming state (S 461: NO), to S 467 Migrate the process.

  In S462, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a value (07) indicating a small hit gaming state start interval management process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to set the small hit gaming state start interval time to the waiting time timer (S463), and then executes processing to set the first special symbol non-change flag (S464), to S465 Migrate the process. That is, while maintaining the stop display state of the second special symbol 231 during the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 60 prevents the variable display of the first special symbol 221 from being performed.

  At S465, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether a follow-up notification flag is set. In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is set (S465: YES), after executing a process of clearing the chase notification flag to forcibly terminate the chase notification (S466) , End this subroutine. At this time, the main CPU 60 transmits a follow-up notification end command to the sub control circuit 7. As a result, in the sub control circuit 7, the effect on follow-up notification, for example, the countdown by the display decoration member 5, and the stop display of each decorative symbol 31, 32 of the liquid crystal display device 3 are determined. On the other hand, when the main CPU 60 determines that the chase notification flag is not set (S465: NO), the main subroutine ends.

  In S467, the main CPU 60 performs processing for setting the value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end processing in the predetermined area serving as the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 in the main RAM 62, and ends this subroutine. .

[Small hit gaming state start interval management processing]
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the small hit gaming state start interval management process executed in S369 of FIG. 47 and S389 of FIG.

  In the small hit gaming state start interval management process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process. A process of determining whether or not is executed (S471). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process (S471: YES), the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07) indicating the small hit gaming state start interval management process (S471: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the present subroutine.

  In S472, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hitting gaming state start interval management process is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S 472: YES), the process proceeds to S 473 and the value of the waiting time timer is determined not to be “0”. (S472: NO), this subroutine ends.

  In S473, the main CPU 60 executes a special winning opening opening preparation process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting the upper limit value of the special winning opening open number counter of the main RAM 62. The number of times of opening of the special winning opening in the small hit gaming state is appropriately set, and may be one or more times. However, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the first special symbol 221, the number of opening of the first large winning opening 16A is defined, while the number of opening of the second large winning opening 16B is "0". On the other hand, in the case of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol 231, while the opening number of the second large winning opening 16B is defined, the opening number of the first large winning opening 16A is "0" Ru.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 to a value (08) indicating processing during the large winning opening opening in the small hitting gaming state in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62. After the process of setting the control state flag is performed (S474), the process of setting the opening time timer of the special winning opening to open the special winning opening open upper limit time is executed (S475), and this subroutine is ended.

[Small hit gaming state first big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the small hit gaming state first big winning opening open processing executed in S370 of FIG.

  In the small hit gaming state first large winning opening open processing, the main CPU 60 first, the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is a value (08) indicating the small hitting gaming state first large winning opening open processing A process is performed to determine whether or not (S481). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state first large winning opening open process (S 481: YES), the process proceeds to S 482 If it is determined that the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 is not the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state first large winning opening open process (S481: NO), the present subroutine is ended.

  At S482, the main CPU 60 executes the first winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of driving the first shutter 17A by controlling the first big winning opening solenoid 171.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the number of reactions (number of winning game balls) at the first count sensor 161 corresponding to the first big winning opening 16A is nine or more (S483). In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of reactions in the first count sensor 161 is nine or more (S483: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S484.

  At S484, main CPU 60 determines whether or not the open time timer of first big winning opening 16A is "0". In this processing, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the open time timer is “0” (S 484: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the processing to S 483.

  In the processes of S483 and S484, until the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the first count sensor 161 is nine or more (S483: YES), or the open time timer determines that it is “0” (S484: YES), repeatedly executed.

  If the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the first count sensor 161 is nine or more (S483: YES), or if it determines that the open time timer is "0" (S484: YES), The first big winning opening closing process is executed (S485). In this process, the main CPU 60 controls the first large winning opening solenoid 171 to drive the first shutter 17A to close the first large winning opening 16A.

  Next, after the main CPU 60 performs processing to set the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval processing in the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 (S486), the remaining ball check processing time is a waiting time The process of setting the timer is executed (S487), and the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit gaming state second big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the small hit gaming state second big winning opening open processing executed in S390 of FIG.

  In this small hit gaming state second large winning opening open processing, the main CPU 60 first, the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is a value (08) indicating a small hitting gaming state second large winning opening open processing A process is performed to determine whether or not (S491). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (08) indicating the small hit gaming state second large winning opening open process (S 491: YES), the process proceeds to S 492. If it is determined that the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 is not the value (08) indicating the small hitting gaming state second large winning opening open process (S491: NO), the present subroutine is ended.

  At S492, the main CPU 60 executes a second winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 60 executes a process of driving the second shutter 17B by controlling the second large winning opening solenoid 172.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the number of reactions (number of winning game balls) in the second count sensor 162 corresponding to the second big winning opening 16B is 9 or more (S493). In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the number of reactions in the second count sensor 162 is nine or more (S493: NO), the process proceeds to S494.

  At S494, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the open time timer of the second big winning opening 16B is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 60 does not determine that the open time timer is “0” (S494: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts the process to S493.

  In the processes of S493 and S494, until the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the second count sensor 162 is nine or more (S493: YES), or until the open time timer determines that it is “0” (S494: YES), repeatedly executed.

  If the main CPU 60 determines that the number of reactions at the second count sensor 162 is nine or more (S493: YES), or if it determines that the open time timer is “0” (S494: YES), The second big winning opening closing process is executed (S495). In this process, the main CPU 60 controls the second large winning opening solenoid 172 to drive the second shutter 17B to close the second large winning opening 16B.

  Next, after the main CPU 60 performs processing to set the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval processing in the control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S 496), the remaining ball check processing time is a waiting time The process of setting the timer is executed (S497), and the present subroutine ends.

[Small hit game state end interval processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the small hitting gaming state end interval process executed in S371 of FIG. 47 and S391 of FIG.

  In this small hit game state end interval process, first, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag of the first special symbol 221 or the second special symbol 231 is a value (09) indicating the small hit game state end interval process. A determination process is executed (S501). When the main CPU 60 determines that the control state flag is the value (09) indicating the small hit gaming state end interval processing (S501: YES), the processing proceeds to S502, and the small hit gaming state end interval processing If it is determined that the value is not the indicated value (09) (S501: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  In S502, the main CPU 60 executes the residual ball check processing of the large winning opening in which the small hit gaming state has been executed, and thereafter, until the waiting time set as the residual ball check time elapses (S503: YES), A residual ball check process is executed on the big winning opening 16A or the second big winning opening 16B (S502, S503: NO).

  When the residual ball check process is finished (S503: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the reaction number counter of the count sensor 161 or 162 corresponding to the opened big winning opening 16A or 16B (S504), and the small hit game A process of setting a control state flag having a value (10) indicating the end process of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game displaying the special symbol whose state has been derived is executed (S505), and this subroutine is ended.

[First special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol game end processing executed in S372 of FIG. The first special symbol game end process is a modification of the first special symbol game end process executed in S69 of FIG.

  In the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes a process of determining whether the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end process. (S601). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the first special symbol 221 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S601: YES), the processing proceeds to S602, and the control status If it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end process (S601: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  At S602, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. When the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S602: YES), the processing proceeds to S604, and when the value of the time reduction game count is determined not to be “0” (S602: NO), a process of subtracting "1" from the time saving number counter is executed (S603).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of determining whether or not the first special symbol game is a first special symbol game in which a special gaming state of a normal big hit is derived (S604). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the first special symbol game that normally derived the special game state of the big hit (S604: NO), the processing proceeds to S606, and the first special game state of the big hit is normally derived If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S604: YES), the time reduction number corresponding to the derived special game state (normally big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S605). Specifically, when the derived special symbol is "D" or "I" corresponding to 4R normal big hit, according to the acquired random number, "50", "30" and "20" in the hour reduction counter Set one. After that, the process proceeds to S606.

  In S606, the main CPU 60 executes a process of updating the specific time short-time counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates a specific time shorting counter used when the special gaming state derived in the first special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 60 determines that the derived special symbol corresponds to the probability fluctuation big hit "A", "B", "C", "F", "G" or "H". In the case where the special time counter is set to infinity (until the special gaming state is derived next time), the derived special symbol is “D” or “I” corresponding to the 4R normal big hit. The processing to clear this specific time short-time counter is performed. In the case of "E" or "J" corresponding to the small hit, since the game state returns to the original state after the end of the small hit gaming state, updating of the time saving number is not performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the second special symbol non-change flag (see S444 in FIG. 53) is set (S607). When the main CPU 60 determines that the second special symbol invariable flag is not set (S607: NO), the process proceeds to S609, and it is determined that the second special symbol invariable flag is set. In the case (S607: YES), after the process of clearing the second special symbol non-change flag is executed (S608), the process proceeds to S609.

  At S609, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (first special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of pending items corresponding to the first special symbol 221 so as to decrease by “1”, in the first special symbol storage area Make an update. Also, in this process, when the first special symbol game is a special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) or a small hitting gaming state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the first special symbol game, and the first special special The random time determining random number used in the symbol game is stored in the main RAM 62 until the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) or the small hitting gaming state is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting a value (00) indicating the first special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control status flag of the first special symbol 221 (S610), and the present subroutine is ended.

[Second special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol game end processing executed in S392 of FIG. This second special symbol game end process is a modification of the first special symbol game end process executed in S79 of FIG.

  In the second special symbol game end process, the main CPU 60 first executes processing to determine whether the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end process. (S621). If the main CPU 60 determines that the control status flag of the second special symbol 231 is the value (10) indicating the first special symbol game end processing (S 621: YES), the processing proceeds to S 622 and the control status If it is determined that the flag is not the value (10) indicating the second special symbol game end processing (S621: NO), this subroutine is ended.

  At S622, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. If the main CPU 60 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S 622: YES), the process proceeds to S 624, and if the value of the time reduction game count is determined not to be “0” (S622: NO), a process of subtracting “1” from the time saving number counter is executed (S623).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing to determine whether or not the second special symbol game is a second special symbol game in which a special gaming state of a normal big hit is derived (S624). If the main CPU 60 determines that it is not the second special symbol game that normally derived the special game state of the big hit (S 624: NO), the process proceeds to S 626 and the second specially derived special game state of the big hit If it is determined that the game is a special symbol game (S624: YES), the time reduction number corresponding to the derived special game state (normally a big hit) is added to the time reduction number counter (S625). Conditionally, when the derived symbol is "d" or "i" corresponding to 4R normal big hit, any of "50", "30" and "20" in the time reduction counter according to the acquired random number Set the Thereafter, the process proceeds to S626.

  At S626, the main CPU 60 executes processing to update the specific-time short counter. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates a specific time shorting counter used when the special gaming state derived in the second special symbol game is a probability fluctuation big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the main CPU 60 determines that the derived special symbol corresponds to the probability fluctuation jackpot “a”, “b”, “c”, “f”, “g”, or “h”. In the case where the special time counter is set to infinity (until the special gaming state is derived next time), the derived special symbol is "d" or "i" corresponding to the 4R normal big hit. The processing to clear this specific time short-time counter is performed. In the case of "e" or "j" corresponding to the small hit, since the game state returns to the original state after the end of the small hit gaming state, updating of the time saving number is not performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag (see S464 in FIG. 55) is set (S627). If the main CPU 60 determines that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S627: NO), the process proceeds to S629, and it is determined that the first special symbol non-change flag is set In the case (S627: YES), after the process of clearing the first special symbol non-change flag is executed (S628), the process proceeds to S629.

  At S629, the main CPU 60 executes other processing. Specifically, the main CPU 60 stores and updates data (second special symbol start storage information) indicating the number of pending items corresponding to the second special symbol 231 so as to decrease by "1" in the second special symbol storage area Make an update. Also, in this process, when the second special symbol game is a special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) or a small hitting gaming state, the special symbol information (derived special symbol) in the second special symbol game, and the second special The random time determining random number used in the symbol game is stored in the main RAM 62 until the special gaming state (probability fluctuation big hit) or the small hitting gaming state is derived next.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes processing for setting a value (00) indicating the second special symbol storage check in the main RAM 62 as a control state flag of the second special symbol 231 (S630), and the present subroutine is ended.

  As another embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the processing described below may be executed. Hereinafter, the processing flow and the temporal flow in another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, about the component the same as that of embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is suitably attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
The processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 78.

[Main processing]
First, main processing under control of the main CPU 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 60 first performs a watchdog timer disable process (S1001). In this process, the value of the watchdog timer is reset.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs input / output port setting processing (S1002). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the power failure detection state is in progress (S1003). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HI (high level). When the power failure detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power failure detection state is in progress, and when the power failure detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power failure detection state is not in the power failure detection state.

  When it is determined in the process of S1003 that the power failure is detected (S1003: YES), the main CPU 60 repeats the process of S1003. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1003 that the power failure is not detected (S1003: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process (S1004). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 7 receives a signal.

  Next, the main CPU 60 permits writing to the RAM (S1005). In this processing, the main CPU 60 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 62. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether the backup clear switch 80 (see FIG. 4) is on (S1006).

  When it is determined in the process of S1006 that the backup clear switch 80 is not on (S1006: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is a power failure detection flag (S1007). When it is determined that the power failure detection flag is present (S1007: YES), the main CPU 60 calculates a work damage check value (S1008). In this process, the main CPU 60 performs damage check of the work area and calculates a work damage check value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the work damage check value is a normal value (S1009). When it is determined that the work damage check value is the normal value (S1009: YES), the main CPU 60 sets 7FFEH in the stack pointer (S1010). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 initializes the work area at the time of power recovery (S1011).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs high probability gaming state display notification processing at the time of power recovery (S1012). In this process, when the gaming state at the time of power recovery is the gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state) in which the big hit probability of the special symbol game is high probability, the main CPU 60 notifies that the probability fluctuation gaming state is at power recovery. To be displayed on the liquid crystal display 3. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power on (power recovery) or at the end of fluctuation.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a power recovery command (S1013). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores in the main RAM 62 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. The command stored in the main RAM 62 for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption is sent to the sub control circuit 7 thereafter.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of CPU peripheral devices (S1014). When this process is completed, the program address returns to the address before the power interruption. In other words, the program address returned from the stack area is returned to the program address indicated by the program counter.

  When it is determined that the backup clear switch 80 is on in the process of S1006 (S1006: YES), when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is not present in the process of S1007 (S1007: NO), or work damage check in the process of S1009. When determining that the value is not the normal value (S1009: NO), the main CPU 60 sets 8000H in the stack pointer (S1015).

  Next, the main CPU 60 acquires the initial value of the jackpot determination related random number (S1016). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the entire work area (S1017). Then, the main CPU 60 sets an initial value of the jackpot determination-related random number (S1018).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs initialization of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM (S1019). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a command for initializing the RAM (S1020). That is, the command at the time of initialization of the RAM is stored in the main RAM 62. The command at the time of initialization of the RAM stored in the main RAM 62 is then transmitted to the sub control circuit 7.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs initial setting of CPU peripheral devices (S1021). Then, the system timer interrupt processing is inhibited (S1022). System timer interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 updates the initial value random number (S1023). That is, the initial random number counter value is updated. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 permits system timer interrupt processing (S1024). Next, the main CPU 60 updates the effect random number (S1025). That is, the effect random number counter value is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 60 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 62, and determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026). If it is determined that the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more (S1026: YES), the main CPU 60 subtracts 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer (S1027).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol control process (S1028), and then performs a second special symbol control process (S1029). In these processes, the main CPU 60 extracts a random number for determining a big hit and a random number for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed with reference to any of a plurality of hit determination tables described later stored in the main ROM 61. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the special symbol lottery, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 62.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs normal symbol control processing (S1030). In this process, the main CPU 60 extracts a random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 151. Then, with reference to the hit determination table of the normal symbol stored in the main ROM 61, the normal symbol lottery is performed. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hit has been won in the normal symbol lottery, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 62. When the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery, the pair of wing members 143 serving as the normal motorized product is in the open state, and the game ball can easily win (enter) the second starting opening 14B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs symbol display device control processing (S1031). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores, in the main RAM 62, control signals for driving the first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 and the normal symbol display device 20. The control signal is generated based on the results of the first special symbol control processing and the second special symbol control processing stored in the main RAM 62 in the processing of S1028 to S1030 and the result of the normal symbol control processing. Thereafter, the main CPU 60 transmits the control signal stored in the main RAM 62 to the first special symbol display device 22, the second special symbol display device 23, and the normal symbol display device 20. The first special symbol display device 22 or the second special symbol display device 23 variably displays the special symbol based on the received control signal, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays the normal symbol based on the received control signal, and then displays it in a stop.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs game information data generation processing (S1032). In this process, the main CPU 60 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or hall computer, and stores the data in the main RAM 62.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs symbol holding number data generation processing (S1033). In this process, the main CPU 60 stores, in the main RAM 62, control signals for driving the first special symbol holding display device 24, the second special symbol holding display device 25, and the normal symbol holding display device 21. This control signal is a detection signal from the first start entrance ball sensor 141, the second start entrance ball sensor 142, and the passing ball sensor 151, and the execution of the variation display of the first and second special symbols and the normal symbol. It is generated based on the update result of the pending number data updated according to.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs port output processing (S1034). In this process, the main CPU 60 outputs the control signal stored in the main RAM 62 in the processes of S1031, S1032 and S1033 described above from each port. Specifically, power is supplied to an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED and a common motorized combination solenoid 144 that opens and closes a pair of blade members 143 in the second large winning opening 16B.

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 performs a winning opening related command control process (S1035). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs payout processing (S1036). In this process, the main CPU 60 checks whether the game ball has won the first big winning opening 16A, the second big winning opening 16B, the first starting opening 14A, the second starting opening 14B, and the general winning opening 18 or not. Do. Then, when there is a winning, the payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / fire control circuit 81.

[First special symbol control process]
Next, the first special symbol control process performed in S1028 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1041). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 64, numerical values shown in the lower part of S1042 to S1049 represent control state flags corresponding to those steps. The control state flag is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 advances the first special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute the various processes of S1042 to S1049 based on the value of the control state flag. The control status flag indicates the gaming status of the first special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processing from step S1042 to step S1049.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step of S1042 to S1049. Before this predetermined timing is reached, another subroutine is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S1041 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol storage check process (S1042). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value "01H" indicating the first special symbol fluctuation time management in the control state flag. Then, the hit determination, the determination of the first special symbol, the determination of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the determination of the variation time of the first special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol variation time management process (S1043). In this process, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “02H” indicating the first special symbol display time management in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a first special symbol display time management process (S1044). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. Further, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs hit start interval management processing (S1045). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (S 1046). In this process, when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. Thus, in the present embodiment, an inter-round interval is applied.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening open process (S1047). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening to the control state flag when the number of times of opening the special winning opening has not reached the upper limit value. Further, when the number of times of opening the special winning opening reaches the upper limit value, the value "06H" indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs hit end interval processing (S1048). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the first special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs first special symbol game end processing (S1049). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value "00H" indicating the first special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, by setting the control status flag, the first special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 22 is executed. Specifically, when it is not a big hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 controls the control status flag in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", "07H" set. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1042, S1043, S1044 and S1049 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when it is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "03H". Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1042, S1043, S1044 and S1045 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to a big hit or small hit gaming state.

  And when performing control to a big hit game state, main CPU60 sets a control state flag in order of "04H" and "05H." Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1047 and S1046 at a predetermined timing, and executes the big hit game.

  Further, when the termination condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in the order. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of step S1046, step S1048, and step S1049 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game. Thus, the first special symbol control process branches the process according to the status.

[Second special symbol control process]
Next, the second special symbol control process performed in S1029 of the main process (see FIG. 63) will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol control process is also configured in the same steps as the first special symbol control process described above.

  First, the main CPU 60 loads the control state flag stored in the main RAM 62 (S1051). That is, the main CPU 60 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 62.

  In FIG. 65, the numerical values shown in the lower part of S1052 to S1059 represent control state flags corresponding to those steps. The control state flag is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 62. The main CPU 60 advances the second special symbol game by executing each step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  The main CPU 60 determines whether or not to execute the various processing of S1052 to S1059 based on the value of the control state flag. The control status flag indicates the gaming status of the second special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processing from step S1052 to step S1059.

  Further, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step of S1052 to S1059. Before this predetermined timing is reached, another subroutine is executed without executing the processing of each step. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  When the process of S1051 ends, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol storage check process (S1052). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value “01H” indicating the second special symbol fluctuation time management in the control state flag. Then, the hit determination, the determination of the second special symbol, the determination of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the determination of the variation time of the second special symbol, and the like are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs second special symbol variation time management processing (S1053). In this process, when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “02H” indicating the second special symbol display time management in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol display time management process (S1054). In this process, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “03H” indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. Further, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs hit start interval management processing (S1055). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (S1056). In this process, when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “04H” indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening open process (S1057). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets the value “05H” indicating the waiting time management before the special winning opening reopening to the control state flag when the number of times of opening the special winning opening has not reached the upper limit value. Further, when the number of times of opening the special winning opening reaches the upper limit value, the value "06H" indicating the hit end interval is set in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs hit end interval processing (S1058). In this process, when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 60 sets a value “07H” indicating the end of the second special symbol game in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a second special symbol game end process (S1059). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a value "00H" indicating a special symbol storage check in the control state flag.

  As described above, by setting the control state flag, the second special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 23 is executed. Specifically, when it is not a big hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 60 controls the control status flag in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", "07H" set. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1052, S1053, S1054, and S1059 at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when it is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 60 sets the control status flag in the order of "00H", "01H", "02H", and "03H". Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1052, S1053, S1054 and S1055 at a predetermined timing, and executes control to a big hit or a small hit gaming state.

  And when performing control to a big hit game state, main CPU60 sets a control state flag in order of "04H" and "05H." Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of S1057 and S1056 at a predetermined timing to execute the big hit game.

  Further, when the termination condition of the big hit game is satisfied, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” in the order. Thereby, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of step S1056, step S1058, and step S1059 at a predetermined timing, and ends the big hit game.

  As described above, also in the second special symbol control process, the process is branched according to the status. Although detailed illustration and explanation are omitted, also in the normal symbol control processing (S1030 in FIG. 63), the processing is branched according to the status as in the first special symbol control processing and the second special symbol control processing. There is.

  The program of the present embodiment is a call instruction in the case where the process is branched according to the status, and is programmed so as to enable pure return processing from the small module to the parent module. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case of arranging the jump table.

[Special symbol memory check process]
Next, special symbol storage check processing performed in S1042 and S1052 of the first special symbol control processing and the second special symbol control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, unless it refuses, the special symbol memory check process demonstrated below is demonstrated as what is applied to a 1st special symbol control process. The special symbol memory check process applied to the second special symbol control process is the same as that applied to the first special symbol control process, and the processing content is "first" replaced with "second". Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is "00H" which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process (S1061). When determining that the control state flag is not "00H" (S1061: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process.

  When it is determined in the process of S1061 that the control state flag is "00H" (S1061: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is start storage of the first special symbol game (S1062).

  In the process of S1062, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) provided in the main RAM 62. If data is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4), the main CPU 60 determines that there is a start storage of the first special symbol game. On the other hand, if no data is stored in any of the special symbol start storage areas, the main CPU 60 determines that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game.

  In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as start storage. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the four reserved first special symbols is stored as start storage.

  The first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) show one specific example of the hold information storage means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In addition, the fact that the data (information) of the first special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the first special symbol start storage area (0) is a specific example of the lottery start condition in the gaming machine of the present invention being established. Indicates In the main RAM 62 of the present embodiment, second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4) are also provided as in the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4).

  When it is determined in the process of S1062 that there is no start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a demonstration display process (S1063). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing.

  In the demonstration display process, the main CPU 60 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 62. That is, when the main CPU 60 keeps the state that the start memory of the first special symbol game (the special symbol start storage area storing the big hit determination random number value) becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) , A predetermined value is set as a demonstration display permission value.

  Further, the main CPU 60 sets demonstration display command data in the main RAM 62 when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. When receiving the demonstration display command data, the sub control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to display a demonstration screen.

  When it is determined in the process of S1062 that there is start memory of the first special symbol game (S1062: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol non-change flag is set (S1064). The first special symbol invariable flag in this embodiment can be set in the special symbol display time management process for the second special symbol, and shifts to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the second special symbol It is set when you In the following description, since the special symbol display time management process regarding the second special symbol is omitted, the description regarding the process of setting the first special symbol invariable flag is also omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1064 that the first special symbol non-change flag is set (S1064: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process . On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol non-change flag is not set (S1064: NO), the main CPU 60 sets a value "01H" indicating special symbol fluctuation time management in the control state flag (S1065). Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol storage transfer processing (S1066).

  In the special symbol storage transfer process, the main CPU 60 corresponds to the first special symbol to be variably displayed, and each of the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) 0) Shift (store) to (3).

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs a big hit determination process (S1067). This jackpot determination process corresponds to the transition lottery means according to the gaming machine of the present invention. In this process, the main CPU 60 reads the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables based on the read high probability flag. The plurality of hit determination tables are different in the number of determination values (the value of the acquired random number serving as the big hit) serving as the big hit.

  When the high probability flag is a predetermined value, the main CPU 60 selects a high probability collision determination table with a large number of big hit judgment values, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, the number of big hit judgment values. Select the hit determination table with the smaller number. Thereby, when the gaming state flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is in the high probability state (probability changing gaming state), the big hit than in the low probability state (the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state) The probability of shifting to the gaming state is high. Thus, the plurality of hit determination tables in the present embodiment are not particularly illustrated, but unlike the hit determination tables shown in FIGS. 8 and 10 described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are particularly tied. The jackpot probability is defined to be different depending on the value of the high probability flag.

  After that, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of the first special symbol start winning and previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the selected hit determination table . Then, when the big hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match, the main CPU 60 determines that it is a big hit.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol determination processing (S1068). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines the jackpot symbol as the derivation special symbol for the first special symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not a big hit (in the case of a loss), the main CPU 60 determines the lost symbol as the derivation special symbol of the first special symbol.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing (S1069). In this process, the main CPU 60 selects the fluctuation time determination table (see FIG. 12) of the above-described embodiment based on the result of the jackpot determination determined in the process of step S1067. Then, the main CPU 60 refers to the selected variation time determination table and determines a variation pattern including the variation time based on the gaming state, the derived special symbol, and the acquired variation time determination random number value, and a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 Store in

  Data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22. Thereby, the first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the special symbol according to the determined variation pattern, and then stops and displays the derived special symbol as the first special symbol determined in the process of S1068.

  Further, data indicating a variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a variation pattern command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 determines the content of the effect display based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and executes the effect display.

  Next, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol variation time setting processing (S 1070). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first timer, and clears the storage area used for the present variation display. In the first timer according to the present embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, fluctuation start waiting time, hit start interval time, winning opening opening time, inter-round interval time, which will be described later. The hit end interval time is set at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 62 (S1071). The special symbol effect start command is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 performs control to start rendering based on the received special symbol rendering start command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 clears the value of the first special symbol start storage area (0) used for the variable display of this time (S1072). When the process of S1072 is finished, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol storage check process regarding the first special symbol, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process. In addition, the special symbol memory check process regarding the 2nd special symbol is the same.

[Special symbol determination process]
Next, special symbol determination processing performed in S1068 of the special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 66) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the special symbol determination processing described below is related to the first special symbol, the same is true for the special symbol determination processing regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the result of the big hit determination process (S1067 in FIG. 66) is a big hit (S1091).

  In the process of S1091, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (S1091: YES), the main CPU 60 is a big hit in the first special symbol based on the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol decision counter. The symbol is determined (S1092). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets the data of the jackpot symbol in the determined first special symbol, and sets the command of the jackpot symbol (S1093).

  In the process of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets the data of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62, and supplies it to the first special symbol display device 22. The first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops the first special symbol in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol.

  The command of the big hit symbol in the first special symbol set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the sub control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display 3 to display the big hit of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of S1093, the main CPU 60 sets hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbol (big hit symbol) in the main RAM 62 (S1094).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the big winning opening open frequency related data in the main RAM 62 (S1095). There are three types of jackpots according to the present embodiment: a jackpot of 4R, a jackpot of 8R, and a jackpot of 15R. When the type of the jackpot is 4R, the main CPU 60 sets “4” as the number of times of opening of the big winning opening opening related data. Also, when the type of the big hit is a big hit of 8R, “8” is set as the big winning opening open frequency related data. Further, when the type of the big hit is a big hit of 15R, “15” is set as the big winning opening open frequency related data. After the process of S1095, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination process, and shifts the process to the special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 66).

  When it is determined in the process of S1091 that the result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (S1091: NO), the main CPU 60 sets data of the lost symbol and sets a command of the lost symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1096).

  In the process of S1096, the main CPU 60 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. Then, data of the lost symbol is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 in accordance with the changing first special symbol.

  When the data of the lost symbol is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22, the first special symbol display device 22 variably displays the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Stop display.

  Further, the command of the lost symbol set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol designating command. As a result, the sub control circuit 7 causes the liquid crystal display device 3 to display the missing aspect of the decorative symbol. After the process of S1096, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol determination process, and shifts the process to the special symbol storage check process (see FIG. 66).

[Special symbol variation time management process]
Next, special symbol variation time management processing relating to the first special symbol performed in S1043 of the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the special symbol variation time management process described below relates to the first special symbol, the same is true for the special symbol variation time management process regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is “01H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process (S1111). When determining that the control status flag is not "01H" (S1111: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol variation time management processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1111 that the control state flag is “01H” (S1111: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is “0” (S1112). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the fluctuation time set in the first timer is not digested (S1112: NO), the main CPU 60 changes the special symbol The time management process is ended, and the process is transferred to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the fluctuation time set in the first timer has been consumed (S1112: YES), the main CPU 60 indicates the management of special symbol display time "02H" is set in the control state flag (S1113).

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol (S1114). That is, in this embodiment, in the case of determining a special symbol for deriving a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in the first special symbol during fluctuation of the second special symbol, within the pursuit time (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol) In the inside), since it is a case where it wins a lottery in the first special symbol, priority is given to the hit corresponding to the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is fluctuating with the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) being scheduled to stop, the second special symbol is forcibly changed to the special symbol of the loss and is stopped, the second The special gaming state (big hit gaming state) of the special symbol is canceled. In addition, when the second special symbol is fluctuating with the derived symbol corresponding to the loss being scheduled to be stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped without changing the special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, forced stop and forced change processing of the first special symbol are similarly performed in the special symbol variation time management processing regarding the second special symbol. As a result, even if the first special symbol is fluctuating with the derived symbol corresponding to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) being scheduled to stop, the first special symbol is forcibly changed to the special symbol for losing and is stopped, the first special symbol 1 Special game state (big hit game state) of special symbol may be canceled.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a second special symbol non-variation flag (S1115). That is, the second special symbol invariable flag is set when shifting to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the first special symbol, and executes the special gaming state based on the first special symbol. In order to prevent the second special symbol game from being played. Thereby, while in the special gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 60 maintains the stop display state of the first special symbol, but does not perform the variation display of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, although not particularly illustrated, similarly, in the special symbol variation time management process relating to the second special symbol, a process of setting the first special symbol invariable flag is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a symbol stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1116). The symbol stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the sub control circuit 7 recognizes that the special symbol is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a fluctuation start waiting time (for example, 10 msec) in the first timer (S1117). The fluctuation start waiting time is a waiting time from the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the start of the fluctuation display of the next special symbol.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Next, a first special symbol display time management process performed in S1044 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol display time management process described below relates to the first special symbol, but the same is true for the special symbol display time management process regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is "02H" which is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (S1121). When determining that the control state flag is not "02H" (S1121: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the control state flag is "02H" (S1121: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S1122). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the fluctuation start waiting time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  When it is determined in the process of S1122 that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the fluctuation start waiting time set in the first timer is not digested (S1122: NO), the main CPU 60 1) It is determined whether or not the special game is a big hit (S1123). When determining that the first special game is not a big hit (S1123: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1123 that the first special game is a big hit (S1123: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the game state flag (S1124). In the jackpot gaming state, the common drawing probability and the special drawing probability are set low. Therefore, the first probability variation gaming state flag, the second probability variation gaming state flag, and the time saving gaming status flag are turned off. A big hit game state flag may be provided to turn on the big hit game state flag. When the process of S1124 is finished, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  In the process of S1122, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the fluctuation start waiting time set in the first timer is digested (S1122: YES), the main CPU 60 executes the first special It is determined whether the game is a big hit (S1125). When determining that the first special game is not a big hit (S1125: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S1126).

  When it is determined in the process of S1126 that the value of the time saving number counter is not “0” (S1126: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (S1127). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S1128).

  When it is determined in the process of S1128 that the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S1128: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the time saving number flag (S1129). Then, the main CPU 60 sets a time reduction counter end command in the main RAM 62 (S1130). The time counter end command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub control circuit 7 that has received the hour-time counter end command recognizes that it shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When it is determined in the process of S1125 that the special game is a big hit (S1125: YES), the main CPU 60 sets "03H", which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process, in the control state flag (S1131).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit start interval time (for example, 300 msec) corresponding to the first special symbol in the first timer (S1132). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “FFH” in the main RAM 62 as the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter (S1133).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1134). The special symbol effect stop command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. Upon receiving the special symbol effect stop command, the sub control circuit 7 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets a big hit start command corresponding to the first special symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1135). The big hit start command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The sub control circuit 7 having received the big hit start command recognizes the start of the big hit game. After the process of S1135, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  If it is determined in S1126 that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1126: YES), if it is determined in S128 that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (NO), S1130 After the processing, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end processing, in the control state flag (S1136).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 62 (S1137). After the process of S1137, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Perform start interval management process]
Next, the hit start interval management process performed in S1045 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is “03H” which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process (S1151). When determining that the control state flag is not "03H" (S1151: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1151 that the control state flag is "03H" (S1151: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S1152). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit start interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1152, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit start interval time is not digested (S1152: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management process. , Transfer the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1152 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit start interval time has been consumed (S1152: YES), the main CPU 60 determines that the special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value Are set in the main RAM 62 (S1153).

  The upper limit value in the process of S1153 is the special winning opening open frequency related data set in the main RAM 62 in the process of S1095 of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 67). That is, in the process of S1153, the main CPU 60 sets "4", "8", or "15" as the upper limit value of the number-of-big-money winning opening opening counter. The value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is synonymous with the number of rounds.

  According to the present embodiment, after the symbol stop display (S1116 in FIG. 68), the large winning opening opening number counter upper limit value is set (S1153 in FIG. 70) in order of processing. As another example, the setting of the special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value may be performed in the next process when the result of the lottery is a big hit in the special symbol determination process (S1068 in FIG. 66).

  Next, the main CPU 60 adds one to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 62 (S1154). As described above, in the process of S1133 of the special symbol display time management process (see FIG. 69), "FFH (that is, -1)" is set to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter. Therefore, when the process of S1153 is performed, the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, in the first round of the big hit (the first round), the number of rounds is managed by associating “0” as the value of the big winning opening opening number counter.

  If the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is initially set to “0”, it is determined after the opening process of the first round whether the number of rounds is the final round (N−1). Then, when the final round number is not N-1, the inter-round interval processing is performed, 1 is added to the large winning a prize opening opening number counter, and the opening processing of the second round and thereafter is performed. Such processing is repeated until the final round number reaches N-1. That is, it is necessary to separately perform only the opening process of the first round.

  On the other hand, when "FFH (that is, -1)" is set to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter, "FFH (that is, -1) to the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter until the hit start interval management process. ) Is set. Therefore, management of the actual number of rounds does not involve the initial value (FFH). As a result, regardless of the type of the jackpot, the opening process from the first round to the Nth round can be consolidated into one process, and the use area of the main ROM 61 can be reduced.

  After the process of S1154, the main CPU 60 sets the opening and closing patterns of the first and second big winning openings 16A and 16B for each round according to the type of the big hit symbol (S1155). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the main winning opening open display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1156). The special winning opening open display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special winning opening opening display command.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the value “04H” indicating the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening to the control state flag (S1157). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 clears the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 62 (S1158). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening opening time (for example, 300000 msec) in the first timer (S1159).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a special winning opening operating signal (S1160). The special winning opening operating signal is data indicating that the first large winning opening 16A or the second large winning opening 16B is open. In this process, the main CPU 60 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to open the special winning opening. The variable updated in this way drives the solenoid (first large winning opening solenoid 171, second large winning opening solenoid 172) related to the large winning opening by the port output process (S1034 in FIG. 63) to obtain a large winning opening Open the door. When the process of S1160 is finished, the main CPU 60 ends the hit start interval management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
Next, the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening is performed in S1046 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. The waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening described below relates to the first special symbol, but the same is true for the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is “05H”, which is a value indicating waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening (S1171). If it is determined that the control status flag is not "05H" (S1171: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, and performs the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). Transfer to

  When it is determined in the process of S1171 that the control state flag is "05H" (S1171: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S1172). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the inter-round interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1172, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the inter-round interval time is not digested (S1172: NO), the main CPU 60 waits for the special winning opening before reopening. The management process is ended, and the process is transferred to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1172 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the inter-round interval time has been consumed (S1172: YES), the main CPU 60 determines the number of times of opening the special winning opening in the main RAM 62. One is added to the value of the counter (S1173).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the main winning opening open display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1174). The special winning opening open display command data in this case is data indicating the second round and thereafter. The special winning opening open display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special winning opening opening display command. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 71 to add 1 to the round counter.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “04H”, which is a value indicating the special winning opening opening process, in the control state flag (S1175). Then, the main CPU 60 clears the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 62 (S1176).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the special winning opening open time (for example, 300000 msec) in the first timer (S1177). After that, the main CPU 60 sets a monitoring target large winning opening operating signal (first large winning opening operating signal or second large winning opening operating signal) in the main RAM 62 (S1178). In the present embodiment, the winning opening intended for opening in the odd round is the first winning opening 16A, and the winning opening intended for opening in the even round is the second winning opening 16B. When the process of S1178 is finished, the main CPU 60 ends the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

[Big winning opening opening process]
Next, the special winning opening opening process performed in S1047 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the special winning opening opening processing described below relates to the first special symbol, the same is true for the special winning opening opening processing regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the control state flag is "04H", which is a value indicating the special winning opening opening process (S1191). When determining that the control state flag is not "04H" (S1191: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening opening process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1191 that the control state flag is "04H" (S1191: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special winning opening counter is "10" or more (S1192). When it is determined that the special winning opening counter is not "10" or more (S1192: NO), the main CPU 60 performs a special winning opening opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round (S1193).

  In the process of S1193, the main CPU 60 opens and closes the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B according to the opening and closing pattern for each round set in S1155 of the hit start interval management process (see FIG. 70). Specifically, according to the opening and closing pattern for each round, the process of alternately closing and opening the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B is repeated after waiting for an inter-round interval time. The operations of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is “0” (S1194). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1194, when it is determined that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the big winning opening opening time is not digested (S1194: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening opening process. The processing is transferred to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1194 that the value of the first timer is "0", that is, it is determined that the big winning opening opening time has been consumed (S1194: YES), or the big winning opening counter is "10" or more in the process of S1192. When it is determined that (S1192: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the first timer (S1195). Then, the main CPU 60 sets the big winning opening closing data (S1196).

  In the process of S1196, the main CPU 60 updates the variable located in the main RAM 62 based on the data read from the main ROM 61 in order to close the open special winning opening. The variables updated in this manner drive solenoids (first large winning opening solenoid 171, second large winning opening solenoid 172) related to the large winning opening being opened by the port output process (S1034 in FIG. 63). , Open the big winning opening is closed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or higher than the special winning opening open frequency upper limit value (S1197). When it is determined that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not equal to or higher than the high winning opening open frequency upper limit (S1197: NO), the main CPU 60 sets an inter-round interval time (for example, 50 msec) in the first timer ( S1198).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets the remaining monitoring time (for example, 1000 msec) for the closed big winning opening to the second timer (S1199). The value of the second timer set in this process is subtracted in a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) described later.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “05H”, which is a value indicating waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening, in the control state flag (S1200).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets inter-round display command data in the main RAM 62 (S1201). The inter-round display command data set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as an inter round display command. When the process of S1201 ends, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening opening process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1197 that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or higher than the special winning opening opening upper limit value (S1197: YES), the main CPU 60 monitors the remaining monitoring time for the closed special winning opening (for example, 1000 msec) ) Is set to the second timer (S1202). If the value of the special winning opening open number counter is equal to or higher than the special winning opening opening number upper limit value, it is the final round (four rounds, eight rounds, or fifteen rounds) of the big hit game. Therefore, in the process of S1202, the closed special winning opening is the second large winning opening 16B.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a hit end interval time (for example, 800 msec) in the first timer (S1203). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 sets “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval process, in the control state flag (S1204).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets an interval end display command data per special symbol in the main RAM 62 (S1205). The special symbol hit interval end display command data is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7 as a special symbol hit interval end display command. After finishing the processing of S1205, the main CPU 60 ends the special winning opening opening processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Period finish interval processing]
Next, the hit ending interval process performed in S1048 of the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the hit end interval processing described below relates to the first special symbol, the hit end interval processing regarding the second special symbol is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval process (S1211). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "06H" (S1211: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  If it is determined in the process of S121 that the control state flag is "06H" (S1211: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S1212). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  In the process of S1212, when the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that the hit end interval time is not digested (S1212: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval process, The processing is transferred to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1212 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S1212: YES), the main CPU 60 indicates the special symbol game end process. “07H”, which is the above, is set in the control state flag (S1213).

  After the processing of S1213, the main CPU 60 sets control data according to the winning symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning in the main RAM 62 (S1214). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets a first probability game state flag or a second probability game state flag as control data. At this time, the main CPU 60 sets one of “20”, “30”, and “50” in the time saving number counter.

  Specifically, when the type of the big hit is a big hit of 15R, the main CPU 60 sets a first probability variation gaming state flag as control data. Also, if the type of the big hit is 8R or 4R and the gaming state at the time of winning is any of the first probability gaming state, the second probability gaming state, and the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 60 is the first The probability variation gaming state flag is set as control data. When the first probability variation gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming status is shifted from the big hit gaming state to the first probability variation gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the type of the big hit is a big hit of 8R or 4R and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 60 sets a second probability variation gaming state flag as control data. When the second probability variation gaming state flag is set as control data, the gaming status is shifted from the big hit gaming state to the second probability variation gaming state.

  After the processing of S1214, the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, the first special symbol game end processing performed in S1049 of the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although the special symbol game end processing described below relates to the first special symbol, the same is true for the special symbol game end processing regarding the second special symbol.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is “07H” which is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (S1221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "07H" (S1221: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end process and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in the process of S1221 that the control state flag is "07H" (S1221: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the second special symbol non-change flag (see S1115 in FIG. 68) is set or not. It discriminates (S1222). When it is determined that the second special symbol invariable flag is not set (S1222: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of S1224 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol non-change flag is set (S1222: YES), the main CPU 60 executes processing to clear the second special symbol non-change flag (S1223), and thereafter, in S1224. Transfer to processing.

  In the process of S1224, the main CPU 60 sets "00H", which is a value indicating the special symbol storage check process, in the control state flag (S1224). After the processing of S214, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol game end processing and shifts the processing to the second special symbol control processing (see FIG. 65).

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, system timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 60 may interrupt the main processing being executed and execute system timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main CPU 60 saves the register (S1231). Next, the main CPU 60 performs timer update processing (S1232). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates various timers such as the first timer and the second timer.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data (S1233). In this process, the main CPU 60 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 60 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 63 of the main control circuit 6.

  The initial reset circuit 63 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) has elapsed, the initial reset circuit 63 transmits a system reset signal to the main CPU 60. When the main CPU 60 receives a system reset signal from the initial reset circuit 63, the main CPU 60 enters a system reset state. The predetermined time is determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 63 after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 63 is cleared.

  After the processing of S1233, the main CPU 60 performs random number update processing (S1234). In this process, the main CPU 60 updates random numbers such as a big hit determination counter, a symbol determination counter, a hit determination counter, a variation pattern determination counter, and a presentation pattern determination counter. The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a fixed timing every 2 msec in order to secure fairness.

  After the processing of S1234, the main CPU 60 performs switch input processing (S1235). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input to the switch sensor. The main CPU 60 receives detection signals transmitted from various switch sensors such as the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, and the general winning opening ball entry sensor 181, and the various switch sensors detect the game ball In this case, it is determined that the switch sensor has received an input.

  After the processing of S1235, the main CPU 60 restores the register (S1236). In this process, the main CPU 60 restores the register to the address before the interrupt process. After the processing of S1236, the main CPU 60 ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[Timer update processing]
Next, the timer update process performed in S1232 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer (S1241). The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (activation) of system timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of times of execution (activation) of the system timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 60 subtracts one from the value of the first timer (S1242). In this process, when any value is set in the first timer, the main CPU 60 subtracts one from the value. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 subtracts one from the value of the second timer (S1243). In this process, when any value is set in the second timer, the main CPU 60 subtracts one from the value.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the second timer is "0" (S1244). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the remaining monitoring time has been consumed. In the process of S1244, when it is determined that the value of the second timer is not “0”, that is, the residual monitoring time is not digested (S1244: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the timer update process and performs the process. Transfer to system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75).

  In the process of S1244, when the value of the second timer is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the remaining monitoring time has been consumed (S1244: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the remaining ball monitoring process, and the monitoring target The special winning opening in-operation signal is turned off (S1245). Here, the second timer may be "0" anywhere from 00H to 07H. Therefore, it is not necessary to make a decision in each processing of 00H to 07H by processing collectively in the timer interrupt processing, and it is possible to reduce the control load. After the processing of S1245, the main CPU 60 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to a system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75).

[Switch input processing]
Next, the switch input process performed in S1235 of the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 performs a prize ball related switch check process (S1251). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning hole entrance ball sensor 181, the first start port entrance ball sensor 141, and the second start port entrance ball sensor 142. Determine if In other words, whether or not the first count sensor 161, the second count sensor 162, the general winning opening entrance ball sensor 181, the first starting opening entrance ball sensor 141, and the second starting opening entrance ball sensor 142 have detected the gaming ball To determine

  When the main CPU 60 determines that there is an input from the first count sensor 161 and the second count sensor 162, the main CPU 60 adds one to the value of the special winning opening counter. When it is determined that the general winning a prize entrance sensor 181 has been input, the value of the general winning opening counter is incremented by one. Further, when it is determined that there is an input of the first start opening ball sensor 141 or the second start opening ball sensor 142, 1 is added to the value of the first start hole counter or the second start hole counter.

  After the processing of S1251, the main CPU 60 performs special symbol related switch check processing (S1252). The special symbol related switch check process will be described later. Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs normal symbol related switch check processing (S1253).

  In the process of S1253, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing ball sensor 151, in other words, whether or not the passing ball sensor 151 has detected a gaming ball. When it is determined in this process that there is an input of the passing ball sensor 151, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the number of pending items is the upper limit (for example, four), and determines that it is the upper limit. End the check process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of held pieces is not the upper limit, the main CPU 60 extracts a random number for collision determination from the collision determination counter of the normal symbol game, and further extracts a random number for collision determination from the symbol determination counter. Do. Then, the extracted random number for hit determination and the random number for symbol determination are stored in the normal symbol storage area of the main RAM 62.

  After the process of S1253, the main CPU 60 performs an abnormality related switch check process (S1254). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the input result of the abnormality related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  As an abnormality related switch, for example, an open / close switch of a glass door can be mentioned. When the open / close switch of the glass door detects that the glass door is opened, the main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  In addition, as another example of the abnormality related switch, a first count sensor 161 and a second count sensor 162 can be mentioned. The main CPU 60 determines that the input result of the abnormality related switch indicates an abnormal state when there is an input of the first count sensor 161 when the first large winning opening active signal is OFF. In addition, when there is an input of the second count sensor 162 when the second large winning opening active signal is OFF, it is determined that the input result of the abnormality related switch indicates an abnormal state.

  When it is determined that the input result of the abnormality related switch indicates an abnormal state, the main CPU 60 performs processing for notifying an abnormality. On the other hand, when determining that the input result of the abnormality related switch does not indicate the abnormal state, the main CPU 60 ends the abnormality related switch check process.

  After the processing of S1254, the main CPU 60 ends the switch input processing, and shifts the processing to a system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75).

[Special symbol related switch check process]
Next, the special symbol related switch check process performed in S1252 of the switch input process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the special symbol start winning for the first start opening 14A is detected (S1261). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input of the first start inlet ball sensor 141.

  In the process of S 1261, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning to the first start opening 44 is detected, that is, there is an input of the first start opening ball sensor 141 (S 1261: YES), the main CPU 60 1) It is determined whether or not start memory of the special symbol is 4 or more (S1262). When it is determined that the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more (S1262: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  When it is determined in the process of S1262 that the start storage of the first special symbol is not 4 or more (S1262: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start storage of the first special symbol (S1263). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random number value acquisition processing (S1264).

  In the process of S1264, the main CPU 60 extracts the jackpot determination random number value, the random symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, the main side effect selection random number value, and the hold effect selection random number value from the counters. Then, the extracted various random number value groups are stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The first special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment has first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (4). The determination result based on the jackpot determination random number value and the hit symbol determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22. In addition, various random number value groups extracted by the special symbol start winning being detected during the fluctuation of the special symbol by the first and second special symbol display devices 22 and 23 are the first special symbol start storage area (1) It is stored in order to (4).

  After the processing of S1264, the main CPU 60 sets the first special symbol fluctuation state data in the main RAM 62 (S1265). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1266). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to perform the hold effect (pre-reading effect) based on the random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the starting opening winning command on the main RAM 62 (S1267). The start opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The secondary control circuit 7 that has received the starting opening winning combination command recognizes that there is a starting opening winning combination and the success or failure of the big hit lottery result. The processing here is to predict and judge whether or not a big hit is made based on the acquired random number, and this processing makes it possible to determine in advance the start of the game balls that have started winnings before the actual start of the change. ing. In addition, the big hit judgment of implementation is performed by the process of above-mentioned S1067.

  The starting opening winning command includes data indicating the content of the winning effect (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed) when it is determined to perform the winning effect in the process of S1266. . As a result, so-called "pre-reading effect (hold effect)" can be performed such that the effect is performed based on the start memory information before the change execution.

  After the processing of S1267, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  In the process of S1261, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning to the first start opening 14A is not detected, that is, there is no input of the first start entrance ball sensor 141 (S1261: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not the special symbol start winning for the second start opening 14B is detected (S1268). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not there is an input from the second start opening ball sensor 142.

  In the process of S1268, when it is determined that the special symbol start winning to the second start opening 14B is not detected, that is, there is no input of the second start opening ball sensor 142 (S1268: NO), the main CPU 60 It is determined whether or not the starting memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269). When it is determined that the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more (S1269: YES), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing, and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

  When it is determined in the process of S1269 that the start storage of the second special symbol is not 4 or more (S1269: NO), the main CPU 60 adds 1 to the start storage of the second special symbol (S1270). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs various random number value acquisition processing (S1271).

  In the process of S1271, the main CPU 60 extracts a jackpot determination random number value, a random symbol determination random number value, a reach determination random number value, a main side effect selection random number value, and a hold effect selection random number value from respective counters. Then, the extracted various random number value groups are stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 62.

  The second special symbol start storage area of the present embodiment is provided from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to (4). The determination result based on the jackpot determination random number value and the hit symbol determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 23. In addition, various random number value groups extracted by the special symbol start winning to the second starting opening 14B being detected during the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the 1st and 2nd special symbol display devices 22 and 23, the 2nd special The symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored.

  After the processing of S1271, the main CPU 60 sets the second special symbol fluctuation state data in the main RAM 62 (S1272). Subsequently, the main CPU 60 performs a winning effect determination process (S1273). In this process, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not to perform the hold effect (pre-reading effect) based on the random number lottery.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets the starting opening winning command on the main RAM 62 (S1274). The start opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main CPU 60 of the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The secondary control circuit 7 that has received the starting opening winning combination command recognizes that there is a starting opening winning combination and the success or failure of the big hit lottery result.

  The starting opening winning command includes data indicating the content of the winning effect (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed) when it is determined to perform the winning effect in the process of S1273. . As a result, so-called "pre-reading effect (hold effect)" can be performed such that the effect is performed based on the start memory information before the change execution.

  After the processing of S1274, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol related switch check processing and shifts the processing to the switch input processing (see FIG. 77).

<Operation of the big winning opening>
Next, the operation of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a time chart relating to the operation of the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the first special symbol display device 22 or the first special symbol display device 23, as shown in FIG. 79, the first large winning opening 16A after the hit start interval time (300 msec) has elapsed. Becomes open. The hit start interval time and the opening time of the first big winning opening 16A (big winning opening opening time) are managed by the first timer.

  When the first big winning opening 16A is opened, the first big winning opening in-operation signal is set (on). The first large winning opening active signal is data indicating that the first large winning opening 16A is open, and the counting of gaming balls by the first count sensor 161 is the first large winning opening active signal is ON It becomes effective when.

  Thereafter, when the first large winning opening 16A is closed, the second large winning opening 16B is opened after an inter-round interval time (50 msec) has elapsed. The inter-round interval time is managed by the first timer.

  Further, even when the first big winning opening 16A is closed, the on of the first big winning opening in-operation signal is maintained until the residual ball monitoring time (1000 msec) elapses. This is to enable the counting of gaming balls by the first count sensor 161 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the first big winning opening 16A is closed. Thereby, it is possible to count the game balls not counted when the first big winning opening 16A is in the closing state, after the first big winning opening 16A is in the closing state, and the first big winning opening 16A It is possible to accurately count the game balls that have been won. The residual sphere monitoring time is managed by a second timer.

  In this embodiment, the interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer, and the residual ball monitoring time is managed by the second timer. Therefore, even if the remaining ball monitoring time has not elapsed, if the inter-round interval time has elapsed, it is possible to open the second large winning opening 16B.

  Therefore, the time from the closing of the first large winning opening 16A to the opening of the second large winning opening 16B and the time of the second large winning opening 16B from the closing It can shorten the time to open it. That is, the time during which the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are in the closed state can be set only to the inter-round interval time (50 msec).

  The interval time between rounds is open next time even if the game ball directly above the first large winning opening 16A moves when the first large winning opening 16A is closed, it will be released next It is desirable for the time to be located above the second big winning opening 16B.

  If the next big hit game is started before the remaining ball monitoring time related to the second big winning opening 16B after the final round of the big hit game ends, the first big winning opening during the remaining ball monitoring time 16A will be in the open state. As a result, the first big winning opening in-operation signal is turned on, and the big hit game will be continued. Therefore, after the big hit game is over (after the second big winning opening 16B is closed), the next big hit game is started (the first big winning opening 16A is opened) after the residual ball monitoring time It is desirable to make it shorter than the shortest time until

  By the way, before the remaining ball monitoring time related to the first big winning opening 16A in the first round elapses, the second counting sensor 162 of the second big winning opening 16B may count ten gaming balls. In this case, in order to manage the inter-round interval time by the first timer, the second timer performs the second round of the second round before the remaining ball monitoring time according to the first large winning opening 16A of the first round has elapsed. It becomes necessary to manage the residual ball monitoring time concerning big winning opening 16B. Therefore, the output time of the signal during the first large winning opening in operation related to the first large winning opening 16A in the first round becomes short, and all the gaming balls winning in the first large winning opening 16A in the first round may not be counted. There is.

  In order to alleviate such a phenomenon, for example, a timer (for example, a second timer) for providing three timers and managing a residual ball monitoring time related to the first large winning opening 16A and a second large winning opening 16B A timer (for example, a third timer) for managing the residual ball monitoring time may be separately provided. As a result, even if the other big winning opening is opened and closed before the remaining ball monitoring time for one big winning opening elapses, the interval time between rounds managed by the first timer has passed, Until just before the special winning opening opens, it is possible to output a special winning opening in-operation signal pertaining to one of the special winning openings. As a result, it is possible to extend the time for counting the gaming balls that have won in one big winning opening by the interval time between rounds.

  At this time, the interval time between rounds is managed by the first timer, the residual monitoring time related to the first large winning opening 16A is managed by the second timer, and the residual monitoring time related to the second large winning opening 16B is managed by the third timer. Managed Then, the special winning opening in-operation signal is output when both the first large winning opening 16A and the second large winning opening 16B are in operation.

  In a normal gaming machine, an error is detected when the game ball is detected by the count sensor of the special winning opening that is a target when the special winning opening operation signal is not output. However, in order to avoid such an error, it is desirable not to detect an error for a predetermined time (for example, 3000 msec) after the output of the special winning opening operation signal is finished.

  The above phenomenon is not a phenomenon that occurs frequently. For example, the launcher in a typical pachinko gaming machine including this embodiment has the ability to launch about 100 gaming balls per minute, and the time required to launch one gaming ball is It is about 600 msec. In a state where the player keeps firing the game ball, usually about five game balls are positioned on the game area while falling by their own weight. Even if all the five gaming balls win the open big winning opening, it takes about 3000 msec to fire the remaining five gaming balls that can be won. Therefore, when the remaining ball monitoring time is set to 1000 msec, it is considered extremely unlikely that the other big winning opening opens and closes before the remaining ball monitoring time related to one big winning opening passes.

  Next, another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a first embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Table for determining the big hit, table for determining the big hit symbol]
FIG. 80 shows the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the jackpot determination table is a first starting opening ball entry sensor that the gaming ball has won in either one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B. It is referred to when performing the big hit lottery by a special symbol based on the big hit determination random number triggered by the detection by the 141 and the second start opening ball entry sensor 142. The jackpot determination random numbers used for the special symbol lottery are 300 of 0 to 299. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot determination random number "0" is extracted, the determination result by the jackpot lottery is a big hit. On the other hand, when the jackpot judging random numbers “1” to “299” are extracted, the judgment result by the jackpot lottery is lost. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the probability variation gaming state, when the jackpot determination random numbers "0" to "9" are extracted, the determination result by the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the jackpot judging random numbers “10” to “299” are extracted, the judgment result by the jackpot lottery is lost. That is, in this embodiment, the structure of the big hit lottery which becomes different winning probability for each of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is not adopted, and any special symbol 221, 231 is selected. On the other hand, a big hit lottery is performed with the same winning probability.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 (c) and (d), the jackpot symbol determination table extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number according to the jackpot lottery determination result, and the first jackpot symbol determination random number is extracted based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number It is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. The jackpot symbol determination random numbers used when determining the stop symbol are six 0-5. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 is as follows by referring to the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol). If the judgment result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, if the big hit symbol determination random number "0" is extracted, the decision result of the big hit type is 15R probability variation and the stop symbol becomes "A" and the big hit symbol determination random number "1" When is extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is 8R probability variation and the stop symbol is "B", and when the big hit symbol determination random number "2" is extracted, the determination result of the big hit type is 4R probability variation and the big stop symbol Becomes "C", and the big hit symbol determination random numbers "3" to "5" are extracted, the judgment result of the big hit type is 4R and the big hit is the stop symbol is respectively "D", "E", "F" Become. When the determination result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the determination result of the big hit type is lost and the stopped symbol becomes "G" no matter which of the big hit symbol determination random numbers "0" to "5" is extracted. As shown in FIG. 80 (d), the stop symbol of the second special symbol 231 is as follows by referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol). If the judgment result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, if the big hit symbol determination random numbers “0” and “1” are extracted, the decision result of the big hit type is 15R certainty big hit and the stopped symbols become “H” and “I” respectively When the jackpot symbol determination random number "2" is extracted, the judgment result of the jackpot type is 4R probability variation and the stop symbol becomes "J" and the jackpot symbol determination random numbers "3" to "5" are extracted The determination result of the jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot and the stop symbols are respectively "K", "L", and "M". When the determination result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the determination result of the big hit type is lost and the stopped symbol becomes "N" regardless of which of the random numbers "0" to "5" for determining a big hit symbol is extracted.

  In the present embodiment, the number of time-savings (the number of times of short-time gaming) continues until the next big hit in the probability variation big hit, and is usually 50 times in the big hit. Moreover, as another example of this embodiment, it is good also as the following not only in what was mentioned above. For example, the type of big hit is not limited to four types of 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, and various other round number big hit may be provided. Also, the big winning opening may be opened several times during one round. The opening time of the big winning opening need not always be a uniform time, and may be changed depending on the round or the big hit type. In the description of the present embodiment, small hits are not particularly mentioned, but small hits where the gaming state does not change before and after the occurrence of the big winning opening are provided and small hits are generated when a predetermined big hit determination random number is extracted. You may do it. The jackpot determination table may be a plurality of different tables that can be applied separately according to the winning starting hole as in the above-described embodiment. The jackpot symbol determination table may be a common table corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The time reduction number may be a probability variation big hit or a predetermined number set in advance. At that time, it is possible to set the number of time reductions to 50 times in a certain probability variation big hit, and to continue to the next big hit in other probability variation big hits. Also, a plurality of types of normal jackpots with different numbers of rounds may be provided, and the numbers of times of the regular jackpots of different numbers of rounds may be different, or the numbers of regular jackpots of the same number of rounds may be different. In the following description, the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B are both non-probability changing non-short game states (not belonging to the short time gaming state as the gaming state), and are referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern etc. Only the difference in the table is described as different.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
FIG. 81 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used for the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. 81 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 81 (b) is a second special symbol variation pattern determination corresponding to the second special symbol 231. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is a first special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number triggered by the determination of the jackpot type being obtained. And the second special symbol 231 is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal gaming state A, with regard to the first special symbol 221, if random numbers "0" to "79" for fluctuation time determination are extracted in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit in a big hit lottery. When fluctuation pattern 1, fluctuation time 60s, fluctuation pattern specification command “h0” is determined, and fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 2, fluctuation time 100s, fluctuation pattern specification command “ h1 is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and 8R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 3, fluctuation time 60 s, fluctuation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 4, the fluctuation time 60s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h3" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the random number for fluctuation time determination “0” to “19” is extracted, fluctuation pattern 5, fluctuation time 60s, fluctuation pattern specification command “h4” is decided, fluctuation time is decided When random numbers "20" to "99" are extracted, fluctuation pattern 6, fluctuation time 100 s, and fluctuation pattern designation command "h5" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “93” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 7, fluctuation time 20 s, fluctuation pattern designation command “h6” are determined, and fluctuation time determination random numbers “ When 94 "to" 98 "are extracted, fluctuation pattern 8, fluctuation time 60s, fluctuation pattern specification command" h7 "are determined, and when fluctuation time determination random number" 99 "is extracted, fluctuation pattern 9, fluctuation At time 100 s, a fluctuation pattern designation command "h8" is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal gaming state A, regarding the second special symbol 231, when random numbers “0” to “79” for fluctuation time determination are extracted in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit in a big hit lottery. When fluctuation pattern 10, fluctuation time 4s, fluctuation pattern specification command “h9” are determined and fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 11, fluctuation time 6s, fluctuation pattern specification command “ h10 is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 12, the fluctuation time 6s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h11" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 13, the fluctuation time 6s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h12" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 14, the fluctuation time 6s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h13” are determined. As described above, in the normal gaming state A, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol 231 is 6 seconds at the longest, and the time is generally shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221.

  FIG. 82 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used for the short time gaming state in the first embodiment. FIG. 82 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 82 (b) is a second special symbol variation pattern determination corresponding to the second special symbol 231. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) also has the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number triggered by the determination result of the big hit type being obtained. It is referred to in determining various fluctuation conditions such as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol 231. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in the case of the time saving game state, with regard to the first special symbol 221, in the case of the 15R probability variation big hit in the big hit lottery, the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. Pattern 15, fluctuation time 5s, and fluctuation pattern designation command "h14" are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and 8R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 16, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h15" are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 17, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h16" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 18, the fluctuation time 5s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h17" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 19, the fluctuation time 1 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h18” are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the case of the short time game state, in the case of the 15R probability variation big hit in the big hit lottery for the second special symbol 231, the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted. A pattern 20, a fluctuation time 1 s, and a fluctuation pattern designation command "h19" are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 21, the fluctuation time 1 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h20" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 22, the fluctuation time 1 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h21" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 23, the fluctuation time 1 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h22” are determined. As described above, the variation time of the special symbol in the time saving gaming state is generally shorter than the variation time of the special symbol in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A described above and the normal gaming state B described later).

  FIG. 83 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used for the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. FIG. 83 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 83 (b) is a second special symbol variation pattern determination corresponding to the second special symbol 231. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 83 (b) also has the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number triggered by the determination result of the big hit type being obtained. It is referred to in determining various fluctuation conditions such as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation pattern designation command for the special symbol 231. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), in the normal gaming state B, regarding the first special symbol 221, if random numbers "0" to "79" for fluctuation time determination are extracted in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit in a big hit lottery. When fluctuation pattern 24, fluctuation time 30s, fluctuation pattern specification command “h23” is determined, and fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 25, fluctuation time 50s, fluctuation pattern specification command “ h24 "is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and 8R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 26, the fluctuation time 30s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h25" are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R certainty variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 27, the fluctuation time 30s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h26" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "19" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 28, the fluctuation time 30s, the fluctuation pattern specification command "h27" are determined, and the fluctuation time is determined When the random numbers "20" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 29, the fluctuation time 50s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h28" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “93” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 30, fluctuation time 10 s, fluctuation pattern designation command “h29” are determined, and the fluctuation time determination random numbers “ When 94 "to" 98 "are extracted, fluctuation pattern 31, fluctuation time 30s, fluctuation pattern specification command" h30 "are determined, and fluctuation time determination random number" 99 "is extracted, fluctuation pattern 32, fluctuation At time 50 s, a fluctuation pattern designation command "h31" is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in the normal gaming state B, with regard to the second special symbol 231, in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit in a big hit lottery, when random numbers “0” to “79” for fluctuation time determination are extracted, When fluctuation pattern 33, fluctuation time 2s, fluctuation pattern specification command "h32" are determined, and fluctuation time determination random numbers "80" to "99" are extracted, fluctuation pattern 34, fluctuation time 3s, fluctuation pattern specification command " h33 "is determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 35, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h34” are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 36, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h35" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 37, the fluctuation time 3s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h36" are determined. Thus, the variation time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state B is a half time generally shorter than the variation time of the special symbol in the normal gaming state A.

  Data indicating a variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table, and a variation pattern designation command are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 It is memorized. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern when the variation time of the first special symbol 221 is 100 s in the normal gaming state A, and the variation pattern when the variation time of the first special symbol 221 is 50 s in the normal gaming condition B However, it becomes a fluctuation pattern which the shutter role thing 40 mentioned later may appear. Note that the shutter role product 40 is not limited to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time 100 s, and may also appear in other fluctuation patterns.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is not won in the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B, and the number of times of variation of the special symbol is performed 15 times as an example after the end of the time saving gaming state. Until normal game state B is to stay. Then, in the normal gaming state A, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 14B becomes extremely difficult, so there is almost no possibility that the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is used. Therefore, in the normal gaming state A, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table may not be provided. When the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is not provided, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table may be diverted. The normal gaming state B may be continued less than 15 times or more than 15 times.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the number of rounds of big hit differs by the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231, the same round by the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231 The number may be determined.

  In addition, although the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIGS. 81 to 83 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state, only the special symbol It may be configured to determine the variation pattern separately, or may be configured to determine the variation pattern separately only to the game state. In addition, only one table may be provided as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the table for the same special symbol variation pattern determination may be referred, regardless of the number of starting memory which concerns on the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231. Not limited to the above, a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to depending on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a short variation time can be easily determined as the number of starting memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of starting memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in the special symbol variation pattern determination table according to the determination result of the specific big hit type, but as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the big hit type One variation pattern may be associated with each other according to the determination result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 in the short time gaming state is from the fluctuation time determined in the other gaming states (normal gaming state A and normal gaming state B) Are also becoming shorter.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state A and a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state B are provided, and both are selected in the non-probability variation gaming state The special symbol variation pattern determination table for normal gaming state B is selected when staying in the special effect mode, and the special symbol for normal gaming state A is selected during other normal gaming conditions. It is a change pattern determination table. The special effect mode is a game mode on the effect of staying after the end of the time saving game state until the number of times of variation of the special symbol is executed 15 times. It should be noted that the period during which the special symbol variation pattern determination table for such normal gaming state B is used is not limited to 15 times after the end of the time saving gaming state, and may be more or less than this. The normal gaming state B may be used in a gaming state different from that.

[Table for deciding on decorative design effect pattern]
FIG. 84 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the normal gaming state A in the first embodiment. FIG. 84 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and FIG. 84 (b) is for determining a second decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b) is triggered by the reception of the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 and is based on the effect determination random number for the first decorative symbol 31. And, it is referred to when determining the rendering condition such as the rendering content (hereinafter also referred to as “rendering pattern”) of the second decorative symbol 32 and the rendering data corresponding thereto. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In the table for determining the decorative pattern presentation pattern shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the time (the fluctuation time) in which the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are variably displayed is also defined. This fluctuation time is also a time when other effects linked to the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the short time gaming state or the normal gaming state B described later is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the normal gaming state A, when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random number “0” When ".about.99" is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73. When “h1” is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is set to 100 s, and when the random numbers for effect determination “0” to “49” are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 2 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 3 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h2" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 4 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h3" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h5" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the specific big hit variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 8 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h6" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 20 seconds, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 9 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h7" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h8" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “90” to “98” are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 12 is the work RAM 73 When the effect determination random number “99” is extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), when “h9” is received as a variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32 in the normal gaming state A, the variation time is set to 4 seconds, and the effect determination random number “0” When “99” is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h10" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 6 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h11" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 6s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h12" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 6 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h13" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 6 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "90" are extracted, loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determining random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 19 is It is set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, also regarding the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state A, the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32 is 6 seconds at the longest, and the time is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, the effect contents when the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is 100s at maximum in the normal gaming state A, that is, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are defined as the specific effect pattern It is done. When the effect data 3, 8, 13 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is set, the movable effect by the shutter combination 40 described later is executed. In addition, even at the time of effect execution corresponding to other effect data, the movable effect by the shutter role may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, different effect data is associated with each effect content, but all may be the same effect data, or a portion of effect data may be different effect content . The variation time of the decorative pattern is basically made to coincide with the variation time of the special symbol, but may be different from each other. Also, the variation time of the decorative symbol is basically made to coincide with the execution time of the effect by the shutter role etc., but may be different from each other.

  FIG. 85 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the short time gaming state in the first embodiment. FIG. 85 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and FIG. 85 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. It shows a table. Data on these tables are also stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b) also receives the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 as a trigger for the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect determination random number. And, it is referred to when determining the rendering condition such as the rendering content of the second decorative symbol 32 and the rendering data corresponding thereto. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when “h14” is received as a variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31 in the time saving game state, the variation time is set to 5 s, and a random number for effect determination “0” to When "99" is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h15" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 5 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 12 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h16" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 5 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 13 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 22 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h17" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 5 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 14 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h18" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 24 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when "h19" is received as a variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32 in the time saving game state, the variation time is set to 1 s, and a random number for effect determination "0" to When "99" is extracted, the jackpot variation presentation 15 is determined as the presentation content, and the corresponding presentation data 25 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h20" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 1 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 16 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 26 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h21" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 1 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 17 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 27 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h22" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 1 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 28 is set in the work RAM 73.

  The variation time of the decorative symbol in such a short time gaming state is also generally shorter than the variation time of the decorative symbol in the other gaming states (the normal gaming state A and the normal gaming state B described above). In addition, the contents of the effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not defined in the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table for the time saving game state. That is, in the time saving game state, the effect data 3, 8, 13 and the like corresponding to the specific effect pattern are not set, and the movable effect by the shutter combination 40 described later is not executed. In addition, even in the time saving game state, the movable effect by the shutter role may be executed. In such a case, it is desirable that the shutter part should be moved up to a position where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not covered.

  FIG. 86 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the normal gaming state B in the first embodiment. 86 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and FIG. 86 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. It shows a table. Data on these tables are also stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) also receives the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60 as a trigger for the first decorative symbol 31 based on the effect determination random number. And, it is referred to when determining the rendering condition such as the rendering content of the second decorative symbol 32 and the rendering data corresponding thereto. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the normal gaming state B, when "h23" is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 30 s, and the effect determination random number "0" When “99” is extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 18 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 29 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h24" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the random numbers for effect determination "0" to "49" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 19 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 30 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers “50” to “99” are extracted, the specific big hit fluctuation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 31 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h25" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 30 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 20 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 32 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h26" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 30 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 21 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 33 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h27" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 30s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 22 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 34 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h28" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 23 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 35 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the specific big hit fluctuation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 36 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h29" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 37 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h30" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 30 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 38 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h31" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, reach loss variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 39 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers "90" to "98" are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 40 is the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number "99" is extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 41 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b), in the normal gaming state B, when "h32" is received as the variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 2 s, and the effect determination random number "0" When “99” is extracted, the jackpot variation presentation 24 is determined as the presentation content, and the corresponding presentation data 42 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h33" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 3 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 25 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 43 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h34" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 3 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 26 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 44 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h35" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 3 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 27 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 45 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h36" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 3 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "90" are extracted, the loss variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 46 is set in the work RAM 73, and the effect determining random numbers "91" to "99" are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 47 is It is set in the work RAM 73.

  As described above, also regarding the variation time of the decorative symbol in the normal gaming state B, the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32 is 3 seconds at the longest, and is generally shorter than the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the present embodiment, the effect contents when the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31 is 50s at maximum in the normal gaming state B, that is, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 3 and 4 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 are prescribed as the specific effect pattern It is done. When the effect data 31, 36, 41 corresponding to such a specific effect pattern is set, the movable effect by the shutter combination 40 described later is executed. In the present embodiment, since the movable effect by the shutter combination 40 is performed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously generated. Even if the variation starts, the shutter role product 40 does not cover the second decorative pattern 32, which will be described later.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the special effect mode is a game mode that shifts after the end of the time saving game state, but at the time of transitioning to the special effect mode, the upper limit value for start memory related to the second special symbol 231 (maximum hold (maximum hold In the state where the number is stored up to 4), the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 may be started, and depending on the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the shutter The object 40 will cover the second decorative pattern 32. That is, in order to prevent the shutter character 40 from covering the second decorative pattern 32, the number of times of fluctuation of the second decorative pattern 32 from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern 31 to the start of the fluctuation of the shutter character 40 The longest variation time equivalent to the batch is required, but the maximum variation time equivalent to 5 variations of the second decorative pattern 32 is specified to be 15 seconds (3 seconds x 5), and this maximum The fluctuation time is about 20 seconds including the interval time from the fluctuation display stop of the symbol to the start of the fluctuation display. That is, since the longest fluctuation time corresponding to the number of times of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol 32 is set to be shorter than the time from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31 to the start of the fluctuation of the shutter role object 40. The shutter role feature 40 is varied at a timing at which the second decorative pattern 32 is not covered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter combination 40 is operated based on the presentation pattern of the first decorative symbol 31, but the shutter combination is operated based on the presentation pattern of the second decoration symbol You may At that time, it is preferable to make the shutter combination appear at a time when the first decoration pattern is not covered by the shutter combination. In addition, when the shutter combination appears based on the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol, the shutter combination may appear at a time when the second combination is covered. In this case, as a display result of the second decorative symbol covered by the shutter role, it is preferable to be in the lost mode. The reason is that if the player can not confirm the display result of the big hit by the decorative symbol, the kind of big hit to be executed will not be known, but in the case of a loss, such a thing does not occur.

[Operation of Decorative Pattern and Shutter Rolex]
FIG. 87 shows basic operations of the decorative symbol and the shutter part in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 87, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 or A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing stop display is provided. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of marks or indicators. A second start storage display area 3D is provided to display the number of start stores (hereinafter referred to as "second start stores") related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is disposed on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is disposed below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and to the left of the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and located on the right Be done. Further, on the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a shutter member 40 as a movable member is provided so as to move up and down. The shutter role product 40 is stored at a position above the front side of the display screen (hereinafter referred to as an initial position) when the movable effect is not performed. On the other hand, when the movable effect is performed, the shutter role object 40 gradually descends to a position covering substantially the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (hereinafter referred to as a fluctuation limit position). After that, the shutter role object 40 returns to the initial position by rising. The shutter accessory 40 moves from the initial position to the fluctuation limit position over a required time of about 0.5 seconds (about 1 second in both directions), and operates from the initial position to the initial position again. Although it takes about 5 seconds to return, it is not limited to these required times, and may be shorter or longer.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 87, in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, the first start storage display region When only one first start memory and one second start memory are displayed in 3C and the second start memory display area 3D, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are the first start memory and the second symbol. At the same time, the variable display is started based on the start memory. And while the 1st decorative symbol 31 is a part in the change display and it becomes a reach aspect, it is assumed that the 2nd decoration symbol 32 is in the change display.

  At this time, when the specific effect pattern is determined, the shutter role object 40 stored on the front side upper side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 starts to fluctuate so as to descend. Thereby, first, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is gradually covered by the shutter role object 40. Then, when the shutter role object 40 is lowered to the fluctuation limit position, not only the first decorative symbol 31 but also the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is completely covered. In such a state, when the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped, the player can not know in what manner the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, a measure is taken so as not to cause the player to be disturbed due to the fluctuation of the shutter character 40 as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the variation operation of the shutter accessory 40 is controlled by the actual mode as shown in FIG. 88 and FIG. FIGS. 88 and 89 show the operation of the shutter roll 40 in the normal game state B (special effect mode).

  As shown as an example in FIG. 88, in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed first in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, the first start When only one first starting storage is displayed in the storage display area 3C and four second starting storages are displayed in the second starting storage display area 3D, the first decorative symbol 31 and The second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously starts variable display based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D display the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage, which are subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. It will be. Further, at this time, it is assumed that a specific effect pattern to be the specific jackpot change effects 3 and 4 or the specific reach loss change effect 2 in the normal gaming state B is determined.

  Then, it is assumed that the first decorative symbol 31 is partially displayed in a variable manner and in a reach mode, and the second decorative symbol 32 is also partially displayed in a variable mode and in a reach manner. After that, the first decorative symbol 31 continues the reach mode, and the variable display is continued, while the second decorative symbol 32 is generally shown as the third row from the top of FIG. 88 because the fluctuation time is generally short. As described above, although the second start memory is increased by one, the stop display is performed in the lost mode (not shown). After that, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed and stopped by the number of the second start memories based on the second start memories remaining after being stopped and displayed in the lost mode, and in that case all are lost It will be stopped and displayed in the form. Then, as shown in the fourth row from the top of the right side of FIG. 88, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed based on the last remaining second starting memory, and is in the reach mode.

  And the 2nd decoration pattern 32 in which the change display was performed based on the last 2nd starting memory which remains finally becomes a lost mode, and makes a stop display. At this time, since the number of second starting memories is 0, the second decorative symbol 32 has a fluctuation time (3 seconds × 5) for five second starting memories as the longest fluctuation time from the first fluctuation start. After being displayed continuously fluctuating for about 17 seconds including the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds × 4), the stop display is made. And since the number of 2nd starting memory is set to 0, the 2nd decoration symbol display field 3B will be erased after the predetermined time progress with the 2nd decoration symbol 32 and the display. The predetermined time elapsed from the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 to the deletion of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is about 2 seconds. That is, in the present embodiment, in the special effect mode, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously changed and displayed while the number of the second start memories is four, the first variable display is The display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is erased after about 19 seconds have elapsed from the start.

  In the second decorative symbol display area, the predetermined period is not erased even if the number of second start memories becomes 0, or continuously displayed without being erased regardless of the presence or absence of the second start memories. You may make it In addition, when the second decorative symbol display area is deleted, the first decorative symbol display area is enlarged to the section where the second decorative symbol display area was displayed until then, and the first decorative symbol is also enlarged. You may Moreover, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display area is not erased even if the first start memory is lost, but the first decorative symbol display area is erased when the first start memory is lost. You may do it. In addition, when the number of either one of the first start memory and the second start memory is 0 and the other number is 1 or more, the display area with the number of start memories is expanded to the other display area. It may be displayed.

  Thus, after the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased, the shutter role object 40 is moved so as to descend to the variation limit position, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is covered. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89, the shutter role product 40 is moved back to the upper side of the display screen where the player can not visually recognize the initial position. Thereby, the state where the first decorative symbol 31 is covered with the shutter role piece 40 is gradually eliminated. Then, when the shutter role object 40 returns to the upper side of the display screen at the initial position, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, a state is presented in which the first decorative symbol 31 is in variable display while continuing the reach mode. Be done. That is, the player can visually recognize the state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the shutter release 40 is returned to a position where the player can not completely visually recognize, but the shutter release may be returned to a position where the player can partially recognize. In such a case, it is preferable that the shutter character return to a position not overlapping the decorative symbol display area.

  Thereafter, finally, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, for example, in a big hit manner. At this time, since the shutter role object 40 has returned to the upper side of the display screen at the initial position, the player can confirm the display result of the first decorative symbol 31 without fail. As described above, in the normal gaming state B, the timing at which the shutter character 40 starts to appear from the start of variation of the first decorative symbol 31 according to the specific effect pattern is after the longest variation time of the second decorative symbol 32 has elapsed. Since the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased after the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased, the second decorative symbol 32 stopped and displayed each time based on the second start memory is not covered by the shutter 40. . That is, the player is assured not only about the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 which is the display result of the first special symbol 221 but also the stop mode of the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the display result of the second special symbol 231. It can be viewed on the

  In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol 32 is not covered by the shutter combination 40 at all, but at least when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the shutter combination displays the second decorative symbol. The area may not be covered. Even in this manner, the player can confirm the stop mode of the second decorative symbol as the display result corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shutter role product 40 is started to appear after the variation time corresponding to five pieces of the second start storage has elapsed, but for example, the variation time of six or more pieces of the second start storage is started The shutter role may be started to appear after it has elapsed. As a shutter part, what is necessary is just a shape which covers the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, and decoration etc. may be performed like movable member 4A, 4B by embodiment mentioned above. In addition, the player is provided with operation means such as an operation button that can be pressed and operated and a jog dial that can be rotated, and when such an operation means is operated, the motion effect by the shutter role is not performed, or The shutter role in the movable effect may be forcibly returned to the initial position. In the present embodiment, the effect display associated with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect content (render data). That is, on the basis of the effect data relating to the first decorative symbol 31, effect display is performed in the area around the first decorative symbol 31, and on the basis of the effect data relating to the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol The effect display is performed in the area around 32. In addition, as the effect display accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol, the corresponding effect display may be performed on the entire display screen based on the effect data relating to either one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. .

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the main CPU 60 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

  Main CPU 60 performs main processing, first special symbol control processing, second special symbol control processing, special symbol storage check processing, special symbol determination processing, special symbol variation time management processing, special symbol display time management according to the embodiment described above Processing, winning start interval management processing, winning opening opening wait time management processing, winning opening opening processing, hitting end interval processing, special symbol game ending processing, system timer interrupt processing, timer updating processing, switch input processing, special symbols The same steps as the related switch check process (see FIGS. 62 to 78) are performed. In the present embodiment, among the above-described processes, particularly, special symbol related switch check processing (see FIG. 90), special symbol storage check processing (see FIG. 91), special symbol variation time management processing (see FIG. 93), special symbol The display time management process (refer to FIG. 94) and the hit end interval process (refer to FIG. 95) are partially different from those according to the above-described embodiment and some points are added. Do.

  The command set by the main CPU 60 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). Commands are sent from the oldest one in the set order. The sub CPU 71 reads the commands stored in the work RAM 73 sequentially from the oldest one at the time of command reception, and executes processing according to the read command.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
As shown in FIG. 90, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2001 to S2014, which are substantially the same as steps S1261 to S1274 shown in FIG. 78, as the special symbol related switch check processing.

  Here, the main CPU 60 performs the following processing specifically as the various random number extraction processing in steps S2004 and S2011. That is, the main CPU 60 updates the value of the fluctuation time determination random number counter in addition to the big hit judgment random number counter and the big hit symbol determination random number counter every time the system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75) is executed. In the various random number extraction processes in step S2004 and step S2011, the main CPU 60 determines the big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number counter, the big hit symbol determination random number from the big hit symbol determination random number counter, and the variation time random number From the counter, a random number for fluctuation time determination is extracted. The extracted various random numbers are stored in the start storage area of the main RAM 62.

[Special symbol memory check process]
As shown in FIG. 91, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2021 to S2032 which are substantially the same as steps S1061 to S1072 shown in FIG. 66 as the special symbol storage check process. Although FIG. 91 shows the special symbol storage check process regarding the first special symbol 221, the special symbol storage check process regarding the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  Here, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot determination table (see FIGS. 80 (a) and (b)) according to the game state as the jackpot determination processing of step S2027, and based on the extracted jackpot determination random numbers It is judged whether or not it is.

  Further, the main CPU 60 refers to the jackpot symbol determination table (refer to FIG. 80 (c)) according to the gaming state as the special symbol determination processing in step S2028, and derives the special symbol based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random numbers. Decide.

  Then, in step S2029, main CPU 60 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 92 described later.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2041 to S2046 of the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Although FIG. 92 shows the special symbol variation pattern determination process regarding the first special symbol 221, the special symbol variation pattern determination process regarding the second special symbol 231 is the same.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the time saving flag is set (S2041). The time saving flag is set when shifting to the time saving game state, and is cleared when the time saving game state ends.

  If it is determined in S2041 that the time saving flag is set (S2041: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (time saving game state) (see FIG. 82 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2042). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2046 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2041 that the time saving flag is not set (S2041: NO), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2043). The special effect counter counts 15 times, which is the number of games in the normal gaming state B related to the special effect mode, and is set to 15 times at the end of time saving.

  In step S2043, when the value of the special effect counter is not 0 (S2043: NO), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state B) (see FIG. 83 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2044). Thereafter, the main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2046 described later.

  In step S2043, when the value of the special effect counter is 0 (S2043: YES), the main CPU 60 refers to the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (normal gaming state A) (see FIG. 81 (a)). The variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type and the extracted variation time determination random number (S2045).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets data indicating the determined fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (S2046), and ends the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2051 to S2060 in which different processes are added in addition to the processes substantially similar to the steps S1111 to S1117 shown in FIG. In addition, although FIG. 93 has shown the special symbol variation time management process regarding the 1st special symbol 221, the special symbol variation time management process regarding the 2nd special symbol 231 is also the same.

  As shown in FIG. 93, after the main CPU 60 sets the value “02H” indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag (S2053), whether the result of the big hit lottery by the first special symbol 221 is a big hit or not It is determined (S2054). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In the case of a jackpot (S2054: YES), the main CPU 60 executes forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231 (S2055), and proceeds to the processing of the next step S2056. On the other hand, in step S2054, when it is not a big hit (S2054: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of step S2059 described later. In the present embodiment, the forced stop and forced change processing of the second special symbol 231 is performed only during the variable display of the second special symbol 231, and is not performed during the stop display of the second special symbol 231.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the forcible stop / forcible change processing of the second special symbol 231 has been executed (S2056), and if the forcible stop / forcible change processing has been executed (S2056: YES), The second special symbol forced stop command is set (S2057). In S2056, when the forced stop / forced change process is not executed (S2056: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to a process of step S2059 described later. The second special symbol forced stop command is a command indicating that the second special symbol 231 has been actually stopped forcibly, and is also a command for forcibly stopping the corresponding second decorative symbol 32. In addition, in the special symbol variation time management process regarding the 2nd special symbol 231 which is not illustrated, the 1st special symbol forced stop command for making the 1st decoration symbol 31 stop forcibly is set.

  Next, the main CPU 60 executes a process of setting a second special symbol non-change flag (S2058), and then sets a first special symbol stop command (S2059). The first special symbol stop command is a command indicating that the first special symbol 221 has been stopped. By transmitting the first special symbol stop command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7, the sub CPU 71 recognizes that the first special symbol 221 is to be stopped. After that, the main CPU 60 executes the processing of step S2060 and ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing.

[Special symbol display time management process]
As shown in FIG. 94, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2071 to S2091 in which different processes are added in addition to the processes substantially similar to the steps S1121 to S1137 shown in FIG. 69 as the special symbol display time management process. In addition, although FIG. 94 has shown the special symbol display time management process regarding the 1st special symbol 221, the special symbol display time management process regarding the 2nd special symbol 231 is also the same.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in step S2072, when the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, when the main CPU 60 determines that the variation start waiting time set in the first timer is digested (S2072: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol 221 is a jackpot (S2073). In step S2072, when the value of the first timer is not "0" (S2072: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S2073, when it is not a big hit (S2073: NO), the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of step S2078 described later. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (S2073: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the gaming state flag (S2074), clears the time reduction counter (S2075), and clears the special effect counter (S2076). In the present embodiment, the gaming state flag includes a time saving flag. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving number counter counts the number of games in the time saving gaming state, and only 50 times are set as an example at the time shift to the time saving gaming state. After that, the main CPU 60 shifts to the processing of step S2088 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2078), and determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S2078: NO) The value of the number counter is decremented by 1 (S2079). After that, the main CPU 60 determines again whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S2080). When it is determined in step S 2078 that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S 2078: YES), and when it is determined in step S 2080 that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (S 2080: NO) The main CPU 60 proceeds to the process of step S2084 described later.

  When it is determined in step S2080 that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S2080: YES), the main CPU 60 clears the game state flag including the time reduction flag (S2081), and sets the time reduction end command ( S2082). The time saving end command is a command indicating the end of the time saving game state.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a predetermined value in the special effect counter (S2083). In the present embodiment, “15” is set as the predetermined value in the special effect counter, but the predetermined value may be a value smaller than 15 or larger than 15. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 60 refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal gaming state B unless the value of the special effect counter becomes zero.

  Next, the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the special effect counter is 0 or not (S 2084). If the value of the special effect counter is not 0 (S 2084: NO), the main CPU 60 subtracts 1 from the value of the special effect counter (S 2085), and determines again whether the value of the special effect counter is 0 ( S2086). If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2084 (S2084: YES), and if the value of the special effect counter is not 0 in step S2086 (S2086: NO), the main CPU 60 executes the process of step S2091 described later Move to

  If the value of the special effect counter is 0 in step S2086 (S2086: YES), the main CPU 60 sets a special effect end command (S2087), and proceeds to the process of step S2091 described later. The special effect end command is a command for causing the sub CPU 71 to end the special effect mode.

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets “03H”, which is a value indicating the hit start interval management process, in the control state flag (S2088).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a waiting time (for example, 300 msec) as a big hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol 31 in the first timer (S 2089).

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a big hit start command corresponding to the first special symbol 31 (S 2090). After the process of S2090, the main CPU 60 ends the special symbol display time management process, and shifts the process to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64).

  Further, following the processing of step S2087, the main CPU 60 sets “07H”, which is a value indicating the special symbol game end processing, in the control state flag (S2091), and ends the special symbol display time management processing.

  In this embodiment, by executing such special symbol display time management processing, “15” is set as the predetermined value of the special effect counter after the end of the short time game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, the first In a period in which the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol 31 and the second special symbol 32 is 51 to 65, the special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 83) corresponding to the normal gaming state B is referred to. In addition, a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided after the end of the big hit, and a special symbol corresponding to the normal gaming state B only during a period when the value of the counter is 51-65. The variation pattern determination table may be referred to. Also, the value set in the special effect counter may be different according to the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs, and it is set in the special performance output counter according to the gaming state and the big hit symbol when the big hit occurs. The values may be different. Further, in the normal gaming state B, when the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state B may be continued until the next big hit end after the big hit end.

[Period finish interval processing]
As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 60 sequentially executes steps S2101 to S2105 in which different processes are added in addition to the processes substantially similar to the steps S1211 to S1214 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 60 determines whether the control state flag is “06H”, which is a value indicating the hit end interval process (S2101). When determining that the control status flag is not "06H" (S2101: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and shifts the processing to the first special symbol control processing (see FIG. 64).

  When it is determined in step S2101 that the control state flag is "06H" (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 determines whether the value of the first timer is "0" (S2102). That is, the main CPU 60 determines whether or not the hit end interval time set in the first timer has been consumed.

  When it is determined in step S2102 that the value of the first timer is not “0”, that is, the hit end interval time is not digested (S2102: NO), the main CPU 60 ends the hit end interval processing, and the processing is performed. Is transferred to the first special symbol control process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2102 that the value of the first timer is “0”, that is, the hit end interval time has been consumed (S2102: YES), the main CPU 60 indicates the special symbol game end process. “07H”, which is the above, is set in the control state flag (S2103).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 60 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the jackpot symbol (s2014). In the present embodiment, as the gaming state flag, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set when the probability variation big hit ends, and the time saving flag is set when the regular big hit ends, "50" is set as the value of the time saving number counter .

  Next, the main CPU 60 sets a game state command (S2105), and ends the hit end interval process. As the gaming state command, a command indicating the start of the probability variation gaming state or a command indicating the start of the time saving gaming state is set according to the gaming state flag. In the present embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation short game state, the probability variation gaming state command and the time reduction gaming status command are set, and when transitioning to the non-probability variation short gaming state, the time reduction gaming state command is set.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 to 104, the sub CPU 71 performs sub control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decoration symbol stop processing, second display area deletion processing, command analysis processing, effect pattern determination processing It is configured to execute the decorative symbol forced stop process and the shutter object movable control process. The command analysis process and the shutter product moving control process are executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main process. The decorative symbol stopping process and the second display area erasing process are executed as a subroutine of timer interrupt process. The effect pattern determination process and the decorative symbol forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 96, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power on (S3001). Specifically, as the initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads the start program from the program ROM 72, and clears various flags and the like stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs random number update processing (S3002). Specifically, as the random number update process, the sub CPU 71 updates values of a random number counter for effect determination, which will be described later, a random number counter for stop symbol determination, a random number counter for decorative symbol determination, etc.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing shown in FIG. 101 described later (S3003). In the command analysis process, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing (S3004). Specifically, as the display control process, the sub CPU 71 controls the display of the images of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs sound control processing (S3005). Specifically, as the sound control processing, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sounds such as notification sound, sound effects, music, speech and the like based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs lamp control processing (S3006). Specifically, as the lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs shutter combination object movement control processing shown in FIG. 104 described later (S3007). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S2002. In the shutter role moving control process, the operation of the shutter role 40 is controlled.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 97, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register upon command input from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S3011). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program under execution stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer (S3012). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. The stored command is analyzed by command analysis processing shown in FIG. 101 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register (S3013). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3011 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command reception interrupt process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 98, the sub CPU 71 executes timer interrupt processing every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving each register (S3021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program under execution stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs timer update processing (S3022). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 stores various timers stored in the work RAM 73, such as a shutter role standby timer, a shutter role enabling timer, a first decoration symbol variation time timer, and a second decoration symbol variation time timer, which will be described later. The value set in the decorative symbol stop time timer or the like is updated (subtracted).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol stopping process shown in FIG. 99 described later (S3023), and then executes a second display area erasing process shown in FIG. 100 described later (S3024). In the decorative symbol stopping process, the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, and in the second display area erasing process, the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B is erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs operation button input processing (S3025). In the operation button input process, it is detected by the sub CPU 71 whether or not various operation buttons have been operated.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register (S3026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S3021 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt process.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
As shown in FIG. 99, as the first step of the decorative symbol stopping process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3031). The first decorative symbol fluctuation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is fluctuatingly displayed, and is set in step S3084 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described later.

  In S3031, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S3031: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time according to the effect data is set in step S 3085 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described later.

  In S3032, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S3032: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3035 described later. On the other hand, if the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3032: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol stop data (S3033), and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag off (S3034) ). The first decorative symbol stop data is data for ending the other effects executed with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 in addition to the processing for stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31, the work RAM 73 Is set. By the processing based on such first decorative symbol stop data, the first decorative symbol 31 in the variable display will be stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3035). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is being displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S3092 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described later.

  In S3035, if the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S3035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time according to the effect data is set in step S3093 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 102 described later.

  In S3036, when the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S3036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S3036: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop data (S3037) and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag off (S3038) ). The second decorative symbol stop data is data for ending the other effects executed with the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 in addition to the processing for stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32, and the work RAM 73 Is set. By the processing based on such second decorative symbol stop data, the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display will be stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol 32 (stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32) stopped and displayed is the big hit mode (S3039). If the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is the big hit mode (S3039: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process. On the other hand, when the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is not the big hit mode (S3039: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to ON (S3040). The second decorative symbol stop flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 is a big hit mode, the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 are sub CPU 71 a big hit start command transmitted from the main CPU 60 at the start of the big hit gaming state. When it receives, it will be erase | eliminated based on this big hit start command. Although the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol 31 are not deleted even if the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, they are deleted based on the big hit start command from the main CPU 60 .

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3041), and ends the decorative symbol stop process. The second decorative symbol stop time timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the time for which the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 2 s, for example, is set as the predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the timer update process is executed every 2 ms as described above, “1000” is set as the predetermined value in the second decorative symbol stop time timer.

[Second display area deletion processing]
As shown in FIG. 100, as the first step of the second display area erasing process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3051). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area deletion process. On the other hand, if the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3051: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052).

  If the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not 0 in S3052 (S3052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the second display area deletion process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is 0 (S3052: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes processing to erase the display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B (S3053). In this step S3053, the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is also erased together with the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display area is displayed if the next variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is not started until 2 seconds elapse from the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32. The display of 3B is to be erased. The display of the second decorative symbol display area may not be erased. Further, a rendering mode may be provided in which the display of the second decorative symbol display area is not erased, and such a rendering mode may be generated according to the gaming state. For example, when the time saving flag is on, the second decorative symbol stop flag is not turned on at the time of the stop display of the second decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol stop time timer is not set. The display of the second decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may not be erased. In this case, when the time saving flag is turned off, the second decorative symbol stop flag may be set on, and the second decorative symbol stop time timer may be set. After that, the second decorative symbol stop flag is set to OFF by displaying the second decorative symbol in a new manner, and the value of the second decorative symbol stop time timer is still set without clearing the second decorative symbol stop time timer. When it becomes 0, the display of the second decorative symbol display area and the second decorative symbol may be erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag to off (S3054), and ends the second display area deletion process.

Command analysis processing
As shown in FIG. 101, as the first step of the command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S3061). If there is no received command (S3061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process. On the other hand, if there is a received command (S3061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads command data stored in the reception buffer (S3062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S3063). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S3063: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3065 described later. If a variation pattern designation command has been received (S3063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 102 described later (S3064). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) is received based on the read command data (S3065). If the symbol designation command has not been received (S 3065: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 3067 described later. If the symbol designation command has been received (S 3065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes stop symbol determination processing (S 3066). In the stop symbol determination process, the modes of the stop symbols as the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 to be stopped and displayed are determined based on the special symbol designating command indicating the lost symbol or the big hit symbol. When the stop symbol determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol forced stop command (the first special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol forced stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S3067). If the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3067: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3069 described later. If the special symbol forced stop command has been received (S3067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 103 described later (S3068). When the decorative symbol forced stop process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command has been received based on the read command data (S3069). If the time saving end command has not been received (S3069: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3071 described later. If the time saving end command has been received (S3069: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode start processing (S3070). Specifically, in the special effect mode start process, data for displaying a background image in the special effect mode is set. Further, in the special effect mode start process, the gaming state flag set to ON is set to OFF, and thereafter, the normal gaming state B flag included in the gaming state flag is set to ON. The normal gaming state B flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state B. When the special effect mode start process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S3071). If the special effect end command has not been received (S3071: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3073 described later. If the special effect end command has been received (S3071: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode end processing (S3072). Specifically, in the special effect mode end process, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end process, the gaming state flag being turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the normal gaming state A flag included in the gaming state flag is set to on, which corresponds to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal gaming state A flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state A. When the special effect mode end process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S 3073). If the gaming state command has not been received (S3073: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3075 described later. If a gaming state command has been received (S3073: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode setting processing (S3074). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a time saving game state command is received as a game state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the time saving game state is set, and a probability variation game state command and a time saving game state When a command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the probable variation gaming state is set. Further, in the effect mode setting process, the gaming state flag set to ON is set to OFF, and thereafter, the gaming state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to ON. In addition, when only the time saving game state command is received, the time saving game state flag included in the game state flag is set to ON, and when the probability change gaming state command and the time saving game state command are received, the game state flag is The probability variation gaming state flag and the time saving gaming state flag included are set on. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit start command has been received based on the read command data (S3075). If the big hit start command has not been received (S3075: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3077 described later. When the big hit start command is received (S3075: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the gaming state flag to OFF, while setting the big hit gaming state flag included in the gaming state flag to ON, and enters the big hit gaming state. By setting data for displaying the corresponding background image, the jackpot effect start process is executed (S3076). When the big hit effect start process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the other received command (S3077). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 102, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S3081). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thus, the effect determination random number is a value randomly extracted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 with reference to the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the game state flag ( S3082). Based on the effect data set in this manner, variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and predetermined effects corresponding to them are performed. For example, when the effect data relating to the second decorative symbol 32 is set and the second decorative symbol display region 3B is not displayed, the second decorative symbol display region is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 3B and the second decorative pattern 32 will be displayed.

  In addition, about the fluctuation display of the decoration design, it is assumed that it starts with the fact that the command which shows the design fluctuation start is received from the main control circuit (main CPU) as a trigger, stops when the command which shows the symbol stop is received. You may make it Thus, the sub CPU can control the variation display and the stop display of the decoration symbol without managing the variation time of the decoration symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, the table for determining the decorative symbol presentation pattern is divided into the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and is also divided according to the game state, but may be a single table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083). If it is not effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3089 described later. In the case of the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S3083: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S3084).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S3085).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S3086). In the present embodiment, as the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern, the effect data 3, 8, 13 shown in FIG. 84 (a) and the effect data 31, 36, 41 shown in FIG. 86 (a) correspond. .

  If it is determined in step S3086 that the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S3086: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if it is the data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 3086: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter combination stand-by flag on (S 3087). The shutter role standby flag is a flag indicating that when the shutter role object 40 is operated, the standby state is set until the operation start.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter role standby timer (S3088). The shutter role standby timer is a subtraction timer for measuring a standby time until the operation of the shutter role 40 is started. In the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter character 40 is defined as 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31, and the shutter character standby timer has a value corresponding to such standby time. However, the present invention is not limited to the value corresponding to the number of seconds, and other values may be set. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  If NO in step S3083, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (S3089). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S3089: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3092 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S3089: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag off (S3090) and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S3091) . The display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is not erased by the processing of steps S3090 and S3091.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S3092), and after setting a value (variation time) corresponding to the set presentation data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S3093), End the pattern determination process.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 103, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, ie, the first special symbol forced stop command, has been received. (S3101). If the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S3101: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3105 described later.

  On the other hand, in step S3101, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received (S3101: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol forced stop data (S3102), and the first decorative symbol change flag It is set to OFF (S3103), and the first decorative symbol variation timer is cleared (S3104). After that, the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3108 described later. The first decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and also forcibly terminating other effects executed with the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. , Is set in the work RAM 73. By processing based on such first decoration symbol forced stop data etc., even if it is in the first decoration symbol 31 in the fluctuation display in the situation where the fluctuation time remains, it will be forcibly stopped and displayed in the lost mode .

  If NO in step S3101, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decoration symbol forced stop data (S3105), sets the second decoration symbol variation flag off (S3106), and clears the second decoration symbol variation timer. (S3107). After that, the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3108 described later. The second decorative symbol forced stop data is data for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32, and also for forcibly terminating other effects executed with the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32. , Is set in the work RAM 73. By processing based on such second decorative symbol forced stop data etc., even if it is in the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display in the situation where the fluctuation time remains, the stop display will be forcibly performed in the lost mode .

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter combination movable flag is on (S3108). The shutter combination movable flag is a flag indicating that the shutter combination 40 is in an operating state without being in the initial position. If the shutter combination object movable flag is not on (S3108: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3112 described later.

  On the other hand, in step S3108, when the shutter combination object movable flag is on (S3108: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes shutter combination object movement control processing (S3109). In the shutter role movement control process, the shutter role object 40 is operated to return to the initial position.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter combination movable timer (S3110), and sets the shutter combination movable flag off (S3111). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process.

  If NO in step S3108, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter role product waiting flag is on (S3112). In the determination process based on the shutter role standby flag, it becomes clear whether the movable effect by the shutter role 40 has been determined. If the shutter role standby flag is not on (S3112: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop processing.

  On the other hand, in step S3112, if the shutter role standby flag is on (S3112: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the shutter role idle timer (S3113), and sets the shutter role idle flag off (S3114). ). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process.

[Shutter role thing movement control processing]
As shown in FIG. 104, as the first step of the shutter combination object movement control process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the shutter combination object standby flag is on (S3121). If the shutter role object waiting flag is not on (S3121: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3125 described later.

  If it is determined in step S3121 that the shutter role product standby flag is on (S3121: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the shutter role product standby timer is 0 (S3122). If the value of the shutter combination standby timer is not 0 (S3122: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter combination movement control process.

  In step S3122, when the value of the shutter role standby timer is 0 (S3122: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter role moving timer (S3123). The shutter combination moving timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the time for operating the shutter combination 40. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, is set as the predetermined value in the shutter combination movable timer.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter combination movable flag on (S3124), and ends the shutter combination movement control processing.

  If NO in step S3121, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter part movement flag is on (S3125). If the shutter combination movable flag is not on (S3125: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter combination movable control processing.

  If it is determined in step S3125 that the shutter combination movable flag is on (S3125: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the shutter combination movable timer is 0 or not (S3126). If the value of the shutter combination moving timer is not 0 (S3126: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control according to the remaining time of the shutter combination moving timer as a shutter combination operation control process (S3127). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the shutter role moving control process. In the present embodiment, after the shutter role object 40 descends from the initial position to the fluctuation limit position, the entire operation time until the shutter role object 40 retracts to the initial position by raising is five seconds as an example. It has become.

  On the other hand, in step S3126, if the value of the shutter combination movable timer is 0 (S3126: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter combination 40 is in the initial position (S3128). As to whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is at the initial position, for example, a sensor for detecting the shutter accessory 40 may be provided near the initial position, and it may be determined according to the signal from the sensor.

  If the shutter role object 40 is in the initial position in step S3128 (S3128: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S3130 described later. On the other hand, when the shutter role object 40 is not at the initial position (S3128: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs control for returning the shutter role object 40 to the initial position as a shutter role object operation control process (S3129).

  Then, the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter combination movable flag to OFF (S3130), and ends the shutter combination movement control processing.

[Operation of Decorative Pattern and Shutter Rolex]
FIG. 105 shows a time chart related to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter part according to the first embodiment. FIG. 105 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed over a fluctuating time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, it is assumed that there are a maximum of four second starting memories, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31. Also, the number of second starting memories decreases by one with the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32, but when reaching the maximum number of pending four again according to the winning of the second starting opening 14B Do.

  In the second decorative symbol 32, the variable display and the stop display are repeatedly performed from the start of the first change (when the change starts simultaneously with the first decorative symbol 31) until the number of holdings of the second starting memory is digested. For the second decorative pattern 32, the variation time t2 is 3 seconds, the interval time t2 'from the stop display to the start of the next variation display is 0.5 seconds, and the display is erased along with the second decorative symbol display area 3B from the last stop display The time t2 "until it is done is 2 seconds.

  The shutter role product 40 starts to move (drop) from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and has a movable time t3 of 5 seconds until it returns to the initial position through the maximum position. Then, the shutter release 40 takes about 20 seconds, which exceeds the time (19 seconds) until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start fluctuating display simultaneously. A series of actions are to be started after the

  That is, in the special effect mode, while the series of operations of the shutter role product 40 is completed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, the series of operations of the shutter symbol 40 interferes with the display of the second decorative pattern 32. It will be started at a timing that does not occur. As a result, the second decorative symbol 32 is not likely to be covered by the shutter release 40 in the state where the variable display and the stop display are performed.

  In the normal gaming state A in which the non-special effect mode is set, it is difficult to win the second start port 14B, so the second start memory hardly reaches the maximum number of holdings (four). Furthermore, even if there is only one second start memory, for example, when the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started simultaneously, the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol 32 in this case. The time t2 is at most 6 seconds, and the time until the display of the second decorative pattern 32 is erased is about 14.5 seconds including the interval time t2 'and the time t2 "until the display erasure. In the normal gaming state A, even when there is only one second start memory, the shutter release 40 takes about 20 seconds to exceed the time (14.5 seconds) until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. Since a series of operations are started after the lapse of time, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 in the state of being displayed in a variable state and being displayed in a stopped state may be covered by the shutter role 40. Furthermore, in the time saving game state, the shutter role 40 Since demonstration pattern to be created is not defined, there is no possibility that the second decorative symbol 32 is covered by the shutter won game 40.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 change simultaneously in any of the normal gaming state A, the normal gaming state B, and the short time gaming state. Even when the display is started, it is possible to prevent the shutter character 40 from covering the second decorative symbol 32. Therefore, the player can prevent the second decorative symbol 32 from being repeatedly stopped and displayed. It can be confirmed surely.

  In addition, when the time saving game state ends and it shifts to the normal game state B, it becomes a special effect mode, and when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously start variable display, the first decorative symbol effect pattern It is assumed that a specific effect pattern (specific big hit fluctuation effects 3, 4 shown in FIG. 86, specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 shown in FIG. 86) is determined, and that the second starting memory has reached the maximum number of pending four. . Even in such a situation, since the time is adjusted so that the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is started after the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased, the shutter accessory 40 is the second decorative symbol 32. Can be avoided.

  Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
FIG. 106 shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table used for the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. 106 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 106 (b) shows a second special symbol variation pattern determination corresponding to the second special symbol 231. It shows a table.

  In particular, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 106 (b), the variation time corresponding to each variation pattern is uniformly defined as 10 seconds, corresponding to the variation pattern shown in FIG. 83 (b) Generally longer than the fluctuation time.

[Table for deciding on decorative design effect pattern]
FIG. 107 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the normal gaming state B in the second embodiment. Fig. 107 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern, and Fig. 107 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol presentation pattern.

  In particular, in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b), the fluctuation time corresponding to each effect content is uniformly defined as 10 seconds, and corresponds to the effect content shown in FIG. 86 (b) Generally longer than the fluctuation time.

  Such a decorative symbol effect pattern determination table is referred to, and when one of the effect data 3, 8 and 13 is set, the movable effect by the shutter role product 40 is performed. In addition, in specified big hit fluctuation production 1, specified big hit fluctuation production 2 and specified reach lost fluctuation production 1 corresponding to effect data 3, 8 and 13, the shutter part after about 20 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol 31 40 moves. Therefore, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 simultaneously start variable display, the shutter role object 40 may cover the second decorative symbol 32 whose fluctuation time is uniformly set to 10 seconds. In the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided by the processing shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 described later. In addition, although this embodiment provides a mechanism for preventing one of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 from being covered by the shutter role piece 40, for example, By making one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and making the other decorative symbol correspond to the ordinary symbol, the special symbol and the ordinary symbol It is good also as a mechanism which is not covered on a decorative pattern based on a relation with a pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the second embodiment will be described. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the first embodiment described above will be omitted unless otherwise specified. In the second embodiment, the effect pattern determination process is partially different from that according to the first embodiment.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 108, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S4001).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command in the work RAM 73 with reference to the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table corresponding to the game state flag ( S4002). At this time, the table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the normal gaming state B shown in FIG. 107 may be referred to.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003). If it is not effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S4009 described later. In the case of the effect data corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 (S4003: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S4004).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S4005). At this time, when the first decorative symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 107 (a) is referred to, one of the presentation data 3, 4 and 13 is set, and a value corresponding to 50 seconds is a variation time. May be set.

  Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S4006). In the present embodiment, the effect data 3, 8 and 13 shown in FIG. 107 (a) correspond to the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern.

  If it is determined in step S4006 that the data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S4006: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S4006: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter role standby flag on (S4007).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the shutter role standby timer (S4008). Also in the present embodiment, the standby time of the shutter character 40 is defined as 20 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol 31, and the shutter character standby timer corresponds to such a standby time. The value is set. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  If NO in step S4003, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter part movement flag is on (S4009). If the shutter combination object movable flag is not on (S4009: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S4011, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the shutter combination movable flag is on (S4009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes movable combination initial position control processing shown in FIG. 109 described later (S4010).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol stop flag is on (4011). If the second decorative symbol stop flag is not on (S4011: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S4015 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S4011: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol stop flag off (S4012), and clears the second decorative symbol stop time timer (S4013) . The display of the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the second decorative symbol 32 is not erased by the processes of steps S4012 and S4013.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S4014). Then, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data or a value indicated by the decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer in the second decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S4015). The decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer is set in the movable character initial position control process shown in FIG. 109 described later, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during the series of operations of the shutter character 40. In this case, it is a subtraction timer for measuring the remaining time in which fluctuation display can be made with respect to a specified fluctuation time. If the value of the decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer is not 0, the value of the decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer is set preferentially. If the value of the decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer is 0, a value corresponding to a fluctuation time of 10 seconds Is set to the second decorative symbol variation timer. Thereby, even when a series of operations by the shutter role product 40 is performed, the fluctuation display or the stop display of the second decoration symbol 32 within the time not exceeding the fluctuation time defined according to the second decoration symbol 32 Will be done.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the decorative symbol variation standby timer (S4016), and then determines whether the shutter role standby flag is set to ON (S4017). If the shutter role standby flag is not set to ON (S4017: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process.

  In step S4017, when the shutter role standby flag is set to ON (S4017: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the value of the shutter role idle timer, that is, the standby time until the operation of the shutter role 40 is started. Then, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than a fluctuation time (10 seconds) corresponding to the effect data + a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds until the display is erased) (S4018).

  In step S4018, when the standby time of the shutter role object 40 is not shorter than the fluctuation time + the predetermined time (S4018: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the standby time of the shutter role object 40 is shorter than the fluctuation time + the predetermined time (S4018: YES), the sub CPU 71 clears the value of the shutter role object standby timer (S4019) and turns off the shutter role object standby flag (S4020). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. In this case, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started, and the shutter role product 40 does not perform a series of operations, but the aspect of the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 does not change. . It should be noted that, due to the shutter role becoming inoperable, the aspect relating to the variation display of the decorative symbol originally intended to be executed and the aspect relating to the presentation may be completely different.

[Movable character initial position control processing]
As shown in FIG. 109, as the first step of the movable character initial position control process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to the set effect data in the decorative symbol variation standby timer (S4031). For example, in the special effect mode, since the fluctuation time relating to the second decorative symbol 32 is uniformly defined as 10 seconds, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the decorative symbol fluctuation standby timer.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes shutter combination control operation control processing (S4032). In this shutter role operation control process, when the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is determined, the value of the shutter role moving timer is not 0, that is, the shutter role 40 is not positioned at the initial position Then, control is performed to forcibly return the shutter attachment 40 to the initial position.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter role object 40 is in the initial position (S4033). As to whether or not the shutter accessory 40 is in the initial position, for example, a sensor for detecting the shutter accessory 40 is provided in the vicinity of the initial position, and until the shutter subunit 40 is detected according to the signal from the sensor It can be determined repeatedly.

  When the shutter role object 40 is not at the initial position in step S4033 (S4033: NO), the sub CPU 71 returns to the process of step S4032 again. On the other hand, when the shutter combination 40 is in the initial position (S4033: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter combination movable flag to OFF and clears the value of the shutter combination movable timer (S4034). The object initial position control process ends.

[Operation of Decorative Pattern and Shutter Rolex]
FIG. 110 shows a time chart relating to the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter part according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 110 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal game state B) as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed over a fluctuating time t1 (50 seconds). At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the effect data (FIG. 107 (a)) corresponding to the specific effect pattern (one of the specific big hit fluctuation effects 3 and 4 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 shown in FIG. 107 (a)). It is assumed that the variable display is performed based on any one of the effect data 3, 8, 13 shown). In addition, it is assumed that the variable display of the second special symbol 231 is started during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the fluctuation time T1 is 10 seconds.

  In the case where the movement of the shutter accessory 40 is started during the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is also started along with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol 231, basically Since the shutter accessory 40 performs a series of operations requiring the movable time t3 (5 seconds), the shutter accessory 40 is forcibly returned to the initial position over the time t3 '.

  Then, after the shutter character 40 is returned to the initial position, the second decorative pattern 32 starts variable display. As a result, the actual fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol 32 is shortened by T2 'than the prescribed fluctuation time T2 (10 seconds), but the fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol 32 is surely made over the entire period. To be done.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, even if the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started during the operation of the shutter accessory 40, the shutter accessory 40 is forced to the initial position. Since the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is started after being returned to the position, the shutter character 40 can be prevented from covering the second decorative symbol 32, and the player can display the second decorative symbol 32. The final stop indication aspect of can be confirmed with certainty.

  Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the third embodiment, the same special symbol variation pattern determination table and the decorative symbol presentation pattern determination table as in the first embodiment are used. In the third embodiment, the special symbol related switch check process, the command analysis process, and the effect pattern determination process are partially different from those according to the first embodiment.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
As shown in FIG. 111, in the special symbol related switch check processing, after performing the processing of step S5006, the main CPU 60 sets the first starting opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S5007), and the special symbol related switch check processing Finish. The first starting opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The first starting opening winning command is a command indicating that there is a winning on the first starting opening 14A.

  Further, after performing the processing of step S5013, the main CPU 60 sets the second starting opening winning command in the main RAM 62 (S5014), and ends the special symbol related switch check processing. The second starting opening winning command set in the main RAM 62 is transmitted from the main control circuit 6 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 7. The second starting opening winning command is a command indicating that there is a winning on the second starting opening 14B.

Command analysis processing
As shown in FIG. 112, in the command analysis process, after performing the process of step S6002, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning command has been received based on the read command data (S6003). ). If the second starting opening winning command has not been received (S6003: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of step S6005. If the second starting opening winning command has been received (S6003: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes an effect setting process shown in FIG. 113 described later (S6004). When this effect setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  If NO in step S6007, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S6009). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S6009: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S6011. If the variation pattern designation command has been received (S6009: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 114 described later (S6010). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  The sub CPU 71 executes the process corresponding to the other received command in step S6019, but the command processed at this time includes the first starting opening winning command.

[Effect setting process]
As shown in FIG. 113, as the first step of the effect setting process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning command has been received (S6021). If the second starting opening winning command has not been received (S6021: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S6026 described later. If the second starting opening winning command has been received (S6021: YES), the sub CPU 71 adds one to the number of second starting memories (S6022). In the present embodiment, in addition to the main RAM 62 of the main control circuit 6, the work storage RAM 73 of the sub control circuit 7 is provided with a start storage area, and the number of the first start storage and the second start storage is the work RAM 73. Stored in the startup storage area of

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the number of second start memories stored in the work RAM 73 is three or more (S6023). If the number of second start memories is not three or more (S6023: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process.

  If the number of second start memories is three or more at S6023 (S6023: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter part movement inhibition flag is set to off (S6024). The shutter role object movement prohibition flag is a flag indicating that a series of operations by the shutter role object 40 are prohibited, and is set in the next step S6025.

  In S6024, when the shutter combination object movement prohibition flag is not OFF (S6024: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, if the shutter part product movement prohibition flag is off (S6024: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter part product movement prohibition flag on (S6025), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the shutter combination 40 is operated or not, the operation of the shutter combination 40 is prohibited when the number of second start memories is relatively large, for example, four or three. It is supposed to be Note that the number of second start memories serving as a reference in the case of setting the shutter product movement prohibition flag to ON is not limited to 3 as long as it is within the range of the maximum number of holdings, and may be another number.

  In the case of NO at step S6021, the sub CPU 71 subtracts one from the number of second start storages stored in the work RAM 73 (S6026). Then, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the number of second start storages stored in the work RAM 73 is three or more (S6027).

  If the number of second start memories is three or more in S6027 (S6027: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, if the number of second start memories is not 3 or more (S6027: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter combination object movement prohibition flag is set to ON (S6028).

  In S6028, when the shutter combination object movement prohibition flag is not on (S6028: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect setting process. On the other hand, if the shutter combination movement prohibition flag is on (S6028: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the shutter combination movement prohibition flag to off (S6029), and ends the effect setting process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of second start memories is relatively small, such as 0 to 2, for example, the operation of the shutter combination 40 is permitted. In addition, although the number of 2nd starting memory used as a reference in the case of setting a shutter part product movement prohibition flag off is the same number (3) as in the case of setting the flag concerned, within the range of the maximum number of holdings The numbers may be different from each other.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 114, in the effect pattern determination process, after performing the process of step S6035, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the shutter combination object movement prohibition flag is set on (S6036).

  In S6036, in the case where the shutter product movement prohibition flag is on (S6036: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination processing. On the other hand, if the shutter role feature movement prohibition flag is not on (S6036: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S3037. That is, regardless of whether it is the specific effect pattern or not, the operation of the shutter combination 40 is prohibited if the shutter combination movement prohibition flag is on. In addition, although a series of operation by the shutter role product 40 is not performed, it is performed based on the set effect data for other effects such as variable display or stop display of the decorative symbol and the effect operation to be performed accordingly Be done.

  Further, after performing the process of step S6044, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect setting process shown in FIG. 113 (S6045), and ends the effect pattern determination process. In this effect setting process, when the second start opening prize winning command corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 has been received, the sub CPU 71 causes the number of second start memories to be stored along with the start of variation display of the second decorative symbol 32. It will be subtracted.

  Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, when the shutter combination product movement prohibition flag is on, the shutter combination product standby flag may be set to OFF and the shutter combination product standby timer may be cleared, and the shutter The bonus feature movable flag may be set to OFF and the shutter feature movable timer may be cleared. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the shutter combination is prohibited based on the number of second start memories, but the second start memory is added each time the number of second start memories is added in the main control circuit. Is sent from the main CPU to the sub CPU, the sub CPU stores the information indicating these fluctuation times in the work RAM, and the total value of the stored fluctuation times is a predetermined value. For example, when it is more than the required time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol in the specific effect pattern to the start of operation of the shutter combination, the shutter combination may not be operated.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, whether to operate the shutter attachment 40 is determined according to the number of second start memories, and if the number of second start memories is relatively large, the shutter Since the movement of the accessory 40 is prohibited, it is possible to avoid a state where the shutter accessory 40 covers the second decorative pattern 32 as much as possible, and the final result of the second decorative symbol 32 for the player is obtained. Can be confirmed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same or similar temporal elements as those in the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the operation pattern of the shutter attachment 40.

[Operation of Decorative Pattern and Shutter Rolex]
FIG. 115 shows a time chart concerning the operation of the decorative symbol and the shutter part according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 115 shows an operation in the special effect mode (normal gaming state B) as an example.

  The second decorative pattern 32 has, for example, the variable display and the stop display for six times by adding the number of holdings of the second starting memory from the first change start (the time when the change start simultaneously with the first decorative pattern 31). It shall be repeated.

  In the shutter role product 40, a movable time t3 is defined as 5 seconds as a time for performing the entire operation. Then, it is assumed that the shutter role product 40 comes to an operation start time between the time when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start variable display simultaneously and the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the operation start time point of the shutter accessory 40 is reached at the time point of the sixth stop display of the second decorative symbol 32.

  In this case, the shutter role object 40 is put into a standby state without performing any operation until the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased from the time when the operation start time is reached. The waiting time T3 during that time is stored in the work RAM 73.

  Then, when the display of the second decorative symbol 32 is erased, the operation of the shutter accessory 40 is performed. At this time, the shutter role object 40 starts to descend from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and returns from the maximum position to the initial position again from the prescribed movable time t3 to the waiting time T3. For the time t3 '' obtained by subtracting.

  Thereafter, the variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 is not performed, and in the state where the display is erased, the shutter role object 40 performs a series of operations again. At this time, the shutter role product 40 starts to descend from the initial position, appears at the appearance position on the display screen, and returns to the initial position again after passing through the maximum position, the waiting time T3 stored in the work RAM 73 It will be done in a time equivalent to

  Note that the shutter combination may perform a series of operations at a prescribed time immediately after the display of the second decorative symbol is erased, and the series of operations may not be performed twice. Also, the shutter role may be divided into three or more times to perform a series of operations.

  According to such a fourth embodiment, it is possible to avoid the situation where the shutter character 40 covers the second decorative pattern 32 as much as possible, and the final result of the second decorative pattern 32 for the player is obtained. The mode of the stop display can be confirmed.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the shutter part and the display device will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned above etc. or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Operation of Liquid Crystal Display Device and Shutter Part]
FIG. 116 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter part. As shown in FIG. 116, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is disposed with the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and is configured to be operable from this initial position to a position in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. The movable member is constituted by two shutter members 40A and 40B. One shutter role product 40A can cover the upper half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The other shutter role product 40B can cover the lower half area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, that is, the second decorative symbol display area 3B.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display, and when the specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the front side upper side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 And, the shutter members 40A and 30B stored at the lower side are started to fluctuate so as to protrude from both the upper and lower sides. As described above, in the present embodiment, although the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed, the operations of the shutter members 40A and 30B are started. However, as in the embodiment described above, the second decoration The shutter part can be operated at timing when the symbol is not displayed.

  Then, the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered by the shutter role products 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Thereby, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the fluctuation display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 can not be confirmed, but instead, the fluctuation display is performed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed.

  In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed when the shutter role starts to operate. It is also good. In addition, at the time when the variable display based on the specific effect pattern in which the shutter role is to be operated is executed, the decorative symbol may be displayed on both the main liquid crystal display device and the sub liquid crystal display device. The decorative symbol may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device at the timing when the decorative symbol can be visually recognized.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is positioned to the front position of the shutter members 40A and 40B in a state of covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 while displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. Moving. As a result, the player can view the first displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'with the same viewpoint as when viewing the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3. The decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be visually recognized.

  Further, at this time, the second decorative symbol 32 will be promptly stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'so that the mode by the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 can be clearly understood. It has become.

  As the subsequent operation, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is returned to the initial position, and the shutter members 40A and 40B are returned to the initial position as in the first embodiment and the like. At this time, it is preferable to continue to display the decorative symbol on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter part completely returns to the initial position.

  According to the application of such a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'or the shutter combination 40A, 30B, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the sub liquid crystal display device 3' are used instead of the liquid crystal display device 3. As it is displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can not be visually recognized.

  In addition, in the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. When only one of the decorative symbols is to be displayed, the one that has not been subjected to variable display, for example, the second stop display previously, is displayed based on the specific effect pattern that the shutter character will appear. It is preferable to erase the display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can confirm the display results of the first and second decorative symbols with certainty. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device may be disposed with the lower side of the main liquid crystal display device as an initial position, or may be disposed on the right side or the left side of the main liquid crystal display device.

[Operation of Liquid Crystal Display Device and Shutter Part]
FIG. 117 shows another modification of the liquid crystal display device and the shutter part. As shown in FIG. 117, in the present embodiment, two sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' are provided with the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display device 3 as initial positions. The sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′ are configured to be operable from the initial position to a position covering the left and right half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 respectively. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screens of the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A ′ and 3B ′, respectively. One of the shutter members 40A as a movable member is operable with an outer left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position and covering a region on the left side half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 There is. The other shutter role product 40B is operable to cover the area on the almost right half of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the outer side on the right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display, and when the specific effect pattern is determined at this time, the front side upper side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 And, the shutter members 40A and 30B stored at the lower side start fluctuating so as to protrude from the left and right sides. Also in the present embodiment, although the second decorative symbol 32 is fluctuatingly displayed, the operations of the shutter roles 40A and 30B are started, but the second decorative symbol is displayed as in the embodiment described above. The shutter accessory can be operated at a timing that is not

  Then, the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is covered by the shutter role products 40A and 30B together with the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Thereby, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the fluctuation display of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 can not be confirmed. Instead, on the display screens of the left and right sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 during the variable display are displayed.

  Furthermore, the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' display the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32, and cover the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the left and right of the shutter members 40A and 40B. Move to the front position. As a result, the player can display the first displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'at a point closer to the time when the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is visually recognized on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device 3. The decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be visually recognized. Also at this time, the second decorative symbol 32 will be immediately displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'as a stop, so that the mode by the stop display of the second decorative symbol 32 can be clearly seen. It has become.

  As the subsequent operation, the sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' return to the initial position, and the shutter members 40A and 40B return to the initial position in the same manner as described above. At this time, it is preferable to continue to display the decorative symbol on the sub liquid crystal display device until the shutter part completely returns to the initial position.

  By applying such sub liquid crystal display devices 3A 'and 3B' and the shutter members 40A and 30B, it is possible to avoid a situation where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can not be visually recognized. .

  In addition, in the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. When only one of the decorative symbols is to be displayed, the one that has not been subjected to variable display, for example, the second stop display previously, is displayed based on the specific effect pattern that the shutter character will appear. It is preferable to erase the display of the decorative symbol. Thereby, the player can confirm the display results of the first and second decorative symbols with certainty.

  In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed when the shutter role starts to operate. It is also good. In addition, when the shutter role is at the initial position, the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol holding, the number of special symbol holding, etc. may be displayed on each of the sub liquid crystal display devices. Thereby, the space for displaying another effect image of the decorative symbol on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device can be secured more widely. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices and the number of shutter members are not limited to two, and may be three or more. The initial positions of the sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter combination may be in an oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship in which the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are combined. The sub liquid crystal display device and the shutter role are each configured to be individually movably controlled, but the sub liquid crystal display device is fixedly provided on the front surface of the shutter role and interlocked with the operation of the shutter role Then, the sub liquid crystal display may move. The shutter accessory is not limited to a flat one, and may belong to, for example, another shape with three-dimensional decoration.

[Shutter feature operation]
FIG. 118 and FIG. 119 show another modification of the shutter accessory. In the one shown in FIG. 118 and FIG. 119, the shutter member 40 provided with a portion not covering the first decorative symbol display area 3A is provided. The shutter accessory 40 is configured such that the upper portion and the lower portion of the first decorative symbol display area 3A can be operated integrally. According to such a shutter role product 40, since at least the first decorative symbol 31 is not covered even by performing a series of operations, the player confirms the display result of the first decorative symbol with certainty. be able to.

  In addition, when only the shutter character 40 is operated from the initial position, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is not covered by the shutter character 40, so that the player can change display or stop the first decorative symbol 31. Although the display can be visually recognized, as shown in FIG. 119, when the shutter accessory 40 is being returned to the initial position, the first decorative symbol 31 is not completely stopped and displayed. That is, in this state, since the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 has not elapsed, the first decorative symbol 31 can be swayed and fluctuated in such a manner as to sway little by little.

  Then, the shutter accessory 40 is operated to return to the initial position while the fluctuation time elapses while the first decorative symbol 31 is fluctuating. Finally, the shutter release 40 completely returns to the initial position. And if fluctuation time passes, it will be displayed in the state where the 1st decoration pattern 31 was completely stopped and displayed. Thus, the player can reliably confirm the display result of the first decorative symbol 31.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various design changes can be made.

  In the above embodiments, the entire first decorative symbol display area 3A is covered by the shutter role product 40, but the shutter role product moves from the lower side of the display screen to the upper side and further moves to the lower side of the display screen And the second decorative symbol display area may be covered.

  In the above embodiments, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are provided in the same screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, the first decoration may be provided on each screen of different liquid crystal display devices. A symbol display area and a second decorative symbol display area may be provided. In the case where the sub liquid crystal display device is provided, the decorative symbol may be always displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the decorative symbol may not be covered by the shutter function. According to this, it is not necessary to limit the timing of operating the shutter accessory, and the operation of the shutter accessory can be freely changed independently of the decoration pattern.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a fifth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Table for determining the big hit, table for determining the big hit symbol]
In the fifth embodiment, since the same table as the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61. The jackpot determination table detects that the gaming ball has won in either one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B in the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. It is referred to when performing the big hit lottery by a special symbol based on the random number for big hit judgment on the occasion of a thing. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts the jackpot symbol determination random number according to the judgment result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number Is referred to when

[Table for decorative design determination]
120 to 122 show a decorative symbol determination table to be referred to in order to determine the stop indication aspect of the decorative symbol, which is used in the fifth embodiment. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, another decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table to be referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of a big hit lottery and a 15R probability variation big hit. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 described above each include three symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol that represent numbers.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), when the random numbers “0” to “49” for decorative symbol determination are extracted at the time of determination of the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbols (reach variation When "000" is determined as "temporary decorative symbol" and random numbers "50" to "99" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "111" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and random number "100" for decorative symbol determination. When “-” “149” is extracted, “222” is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and when the random numbers “150”-“349” for decorative pattern determination are extracted, “333” is displayed as the corresponding decorative pattern. When determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "350" to "399" are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol "444" is determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "400" to "449" are extracted. , With the corresponding decorative pattern When "555" is determined and random numbers "450" to "499" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "666" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and random numbers "500" to "799" for decorative symbol determination When is extracted, "777" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and when the random numbers "800" to "849" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "888" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is selected. When the determination random numbers "850" to "899" are extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern. Here, the decorative symbol is represented by three numbers such as “123”, but the left number (“1” in this case) is the left symbol and the middle number (“2” in this case) is middle. The symbol and the number on the right (in this case, "3") correspond to the right symbol, and the same notation applies to the decorative symbol determination table described below.

  Thus, in the case of the 15R probability variation big hit, the probability that "777" is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that "333" is determined as a decorative symbol is high. Here, in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit, when a decorative symbol other than "777" is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, big hit etc.) It is informed that it is 15R probability variation big hit.

  FIG. 120 (b) shows a decorative symbol determination table to be referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of 8R probability variation big hit in the big hit lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the random numbers "0" to "49" for decorative symbol determination are extracted at the time of determination of the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbols (reach variation) When "000" is determined as "temporary decorative symbol" and random numbers "50" to "99" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "111" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and random number "100" for decorative symbol determination. When “-” “149” is extracted, “222” is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and when the random numbers “150”-“649” for decorative pattern determination are extracted, “333” is displayed as the corresponding decorative pattern. When determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "650" to "699" are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol "444" is determined, and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "700" to "749" are extracted. , With the corresponding decorative pattern When “555” is determined and random numbers “750” to “799” for decorative symbol determination are extracted, “666” is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol, and random numbers “800” to “849” for decorative symbol determination When is extracted, "888" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and when the random numbers "850" to "899" for decorative pattern determination are extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern.

  Thus, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that "333" is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol of "777" is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, when the decorative design other than "333" is determined, after the display stop of the decorative design (period from the display stop of the decorative design to the start of big hit, big hit etc.), It is informed that it is 8R probability variation big hit.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a decorative symbol determination table to be referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of 4R probability variation big hit by big hit lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a), when the random numbers "0" to "59" for decorative symbol determination are extracted at the time of determination of the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbols (reach variation) When "000" is determined as "temporary decorative symbol" and random numbers "60" to "259" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "111" is determined as a corresponding decorative symbol and random number "260" for decorative symbol determination. When "~" 319 is extracted, "222" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and when the random numbers "320" to "379" for decorative pattern determination are extracted, "444" is displayed as the corresponding decorative pattern. When determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "380" to "579" are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol "555" is determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "580" to "639" are extracted , The corresponding decorative pattern When "666" is determined and random numbers "640" to "699" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "888" is determined as a corresponding decorative symbol, and random numbers "700" to "899 for decorative symbol determination. When "" is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern.

  Thus, in the case of the 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that the symbols ("111", "555", "999") composed of odd numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is set high (but, The decorative symbols "333" and "777" are set not to be selected). Here, after the display stop of the determined decorative symbol (the period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, the big hit, etc.), it is notified that it is a 4R probability variation big hit.

  FIG. 121 (b) shows a decorative symbol determination table to be referred to in order to determine the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the random numbers “0” to “149” for decorative symbol determination are extracted at the time of determination of the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, the corresponding decorative symbols (reach variation) When "000" is determined as "temporary decorative symbol" and random numbers "150" to "199" for decorative symbol determination are extracted, "111" is determined as the corresponding decorative symbol and random number "200" for decorative symbol determination. When "~" 349 "is extracted," 222 "is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern, and when the random numbers" 350 "to" 499 "for decorative pattern determination are extracted," 444 "is displayed as the corresponding decorative pattern. When determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "500" to "549" are extracted, the corresponding decorative symbol "555" is determined and the decorative symbol determination random numbers "550" to "699" are extracted. , Corresponding decoration When "666" is determined as a pattern and random numbers "700" to "849" for decorative pattern determination are extracted, "888" is determined as a corresponding decorative pattern, and random numbers "850" to "899" for decorative pattern determination. When "" is extracted, "999" is determined as the corresponding decorative pattern.

  Thus, in the case of the 4R normal big hit, the probability that the symbols ("222", "444", "666", "888") configured with even numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is high, "333" The decorative designs of '' and '777' are set not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers from "0" to "9" are respectively determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the decorative symbols are configured by these three symbols. According to the contents of the decoration symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” aligned with each symbol is “7” is a decoration symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big hit decision, and each symbol is “ When "333" aligned in 3 "is a decorative pattern, it is determined that 8R probability variation big hit or more, and in the case of a decorative pattern in which three numbers are aligned other than the above, it is 4R normal big hit or more. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a probability variation big hit (that is, 15R probability variation big hit) having a larger number of rounds than 8R. Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a 15 R positive big hit, an 8 R positive big hit, or a 4 R positive big hit.

  FIG. 122 shows a decorative symbol determination table used in the case of loss in the big hit lottery. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899.

  In the decorative symbol determination table used in the case of a loss, a lost decorative symbol (a decorative symbol for lost variation) displayed without passing through the reach mode corresponding to each value of the decorative symbol determination random numbers, A lost decorative symbol (a decorative symbol for reaching variation) displayed through the reach mode is defined, and the two decorative symbols are determined based on the random numbers for decorative symbol determination.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the decorative symbol determination random number “0” is extracted at the time of determination of the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, “001” is determined as the decorative symbol at the time of losing variation. When "010" is determined as a decorative symbol for reach variation at the same time and a random number "1" for decorative symbol determination is extracted, "002" is determined as a decorative symbol for lost variation and a decorative symbol for reach variation As "010" is determined and the decorative symbol determination random number "2" is extracted, "003" is determined as the lost variation decorative symbol and "010" is determined as the reach variation decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol determination random number "3" is extracted, "004" is determined as the lost variation decorative symbol and "010" is determined as the reach variation decorative symbol, and the decoration is changed. When the random number for pattern determination "4" is extracted, "005" is determined as the decorative symbol for lost variation, and "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the random number for decorative symbol determination "5" When "" is extracted, "006" is determined as the decorative symbol for losing variation, "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reaching variation, and the random number "6" for decorative symbol determination is extracted. When "007" is determined as the decorative symbol for fluctuation, "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation, and the random number "7" for decorative symbol determination is extracted as the decorative symbol for lost fluctuation. When "008" is determined and "010" is determined as the decorative symbol for reach variation, and the random number "8" for decorative symbol determination is extracted, "009" as the decorative symbol for lost variation. When it is decided and "010" is decided as a decorative symbol for reach variation, and a random number "9" for decorative symbol determination is extracted, "011" is decided as a decorative symbol for lost variation, and it is determined at reach variation. "010" is determined as a decorative design. Similarly, the decorative symbol determination random numbers are respectively associated with the decorative symbol for lost variation and the decorative symbol for reach variation based on the decorative symbol determination table, and the decorative symbol determination random number “899” is extracted. Then, “998” is determined as the lost variation decorative symbol, and “989” is determined as the reach variation decorative symbol. In addition, in FIG. 122, description is abbreviate | omitted about the decorative symbol at the time of the lost change at the time of the random number for decorative symbol determination "90"-"898", and the decorative symbol at the time of reach change.

  Thus, although the decorative symbol determination random numbers from "0" to "899" are respectively associated with the lost variation decorative symbols for "001" to "998", as shown in FIG. 122, for example, Decorative patterns with the same left and right patterns, such as "010", "020", "030", ... "989", are excluded from the decorative patterns for lost change, and are used as decorative patterns for reach change Be done. As described above, for the decorative symbols for reach change, decorative symbols with the same left symbol and right symbol are used, and as shown in FIG. 122, one decorative symbol for reach variation is for determination of ten decorative symbols each. It is mapped to a random number.

  In the fifth embodiment, for example, the left symbol is stopped after 3 seconds from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the right symbol is stopped after 3 seconds, and all symbols are stopped during the symbol stop process. Configured as. Therefore, like the above described decorative symbols for reach variation, decorative symbols having the same left symbol and right symbol constitute the reach aspect. On the other hand, since the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same for the lost variation decorative symbol, the left symbol stops after the decorative symbol starts to change, and then when the right symbol stops, the different symbols stop display It will be done and will not configure reach mode.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
FIG. 123 shows a special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 (a) shows a first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol 221, and FIG. 123 (b) is a second special symbol variation pattern determination corresponding to the second special symbol 231. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is the first special symbol 221 based on the variation time determination random number triggered by the determination of the jackpot type being obtained And the second special symbol 231 is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time, and a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a), regarding the first special symbol 221, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variation, when the random number “0” to “79” for variation time determination is extracted, variation pattern 1, variation time When the fluctuation pattern designation command “h0” is determined for 60 seconds and the fluctuation time determination random numbers “80” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 2, the fluctuation time 100 s, the fluctuation pattern designation command “h1” are determined . In the case of a big hit lottery and 8R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 3, fluctuation time 60 s, fluctuation pattern designation command “h2” are determined. In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 4, the fluctuation time 60s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h3" are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the random number for fluctuation time determination “0” to “19” is extracted, fluctuation pattern 5, fluctuation time 60s, fluctuation pattern specification command “h4” is decided, fluctuation time is decided When random numbers "20" to "99" are extracted, fluctuation pattern 6, fluctuation time 100 s, and fluctuation pattern designation command "h5" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “93” are extracted, fluctuation pattern 7, fluctuation time 20 s, fluctuation pattern designation command “h6” are determined, and fluctuation time determination random numbers “ When 94 "to" 98 "are extracted, fluctuation pattern 8, fluctuation time 60s, fluctuation pattern specification command" h7 "are determined, and when fluctuation time determination random number" 99 "is extracted, fluctuation pattern 9, fluctuation At time 100 s, a fluctuation pattern designation command "h8" is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), regarding the second special symbol 231, in the case of a big hit lottery with a 15R probability variation, when the random numbers “0” to “79” for variation time determination are extracted, variation pattern 10, variation time When the fluctuation pattern designation command "h9" is determined for 50 s and the fluctuation time determination random numbers "80" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 11, the fluctuation time 90s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h10" are determined. . In the case of a big hit lottery and a 4R probability variation big hit, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 12, the fluctuation time 50 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “h11” are determined. In the case of 4R normal big hit in the big hit lottery, when the fluctuation time determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 13, the fluctuation time 50 s, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "h12" are determined. In the case of loss in the big hit lottery, when the random numbers "0" to "96" for fluctuation time determination are extracted, the fluctuation pattern 14, the fluctuation time 10s, the fluctuation pattern designation command "h13" are determined, and the random numbers for fluctuation time determination " When 97 "to" 98 "are extracted, fluctuation pattern 15, fluctuation time 50s, fluctuation pattern specification command" h14 "are determined, and when fluctuation time determination random number" 99 "is extracted, fluctuation pattern 16, fluctuation At time 90 s, a fluctuation pattern designation command "h15" is determined. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, here, different tables may be used for each gaming state.

  Data indicating a variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table, and a variation pattern designation command are stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 It is memorized. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In addition, although the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result of In addition, only one table may be provided as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the table for the same special symbol variation pattern determination may be referred, regardless of the number of starting memory which concerns on the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231. Not limited to the above, a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to depending on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a short variation time can be easily determined as the number of starting memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of starting memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in the special symbol variation pattern determination table according to the determination result of the specific big hit type, but as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the big hit type One variation pattern may be associated with each other according to the determination result.

[Table for deciding on decorative design effect pattern]
FIG. 124 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and FIG. 124 (b) shows a table for determining a second decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b) is the first decoration based on the effect determination random number triggered by the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60. It is referred to when determining the rendering condition such as the rendering content (hereinafter, also referred to as “rendering pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the rendering data corresponding thereto. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In the table for determining the decorative pattern effect pattern shown in FIGS. 124 (a) and 124 (b), the time (the fluctuation time) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined However, this variation time is also the time when other effects linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (a), when “h0” is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” are extracted Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and while the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determination random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the effect content is As specific big hit fluctuation production 1 is decided as, the corresponding production data 2 is set to work RAM73. When “h1” is received as a variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "98" to "99" are extracted, the specific big hit variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h2" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h3" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h5" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73, and the effect determining random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 9 is It is set in the work RAM 73. When "h6" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 20 seconds, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h7" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h8" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers "90" to "98" are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number "99" is extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (b), when “h9” is received as a variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted Then, the jackpot variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h10" is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h11" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the random numbers for effect determination "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h12" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h13" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "49" are extracted, loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "50" to "99" are extracted, the lost change effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is It is set in the work RAM 73. When “h14” is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “94” are extracted, reach loss fluctuation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, reach loss fluctuation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “91” to “99” are extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 24 Is set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are specified as the specific effect pattern for the first decorative symbol 31, and the specific reach loss fluctuation effects 2 and 3 are specified for the second decorative symbol 32. Although specified as an effect pattern, when a specific effect pattern is executed between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are associated with each other A certain effect (combinational effect) is performed. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (b), it is similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more can be provided. In addition, although this embodiment provides the mechanism which performs a combined effect, when both of two decoration symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as a specific effect pattern, for example, , One of the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponds to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol corresponds to the other decorative symbol, and the special symbol It is good also as a mechanism which performs a combined production based on a relation with a normal symbol.

[Control of fluctuation operation of decoration pattern]
In this embodiment, the variation operation (that is, the combined effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled by the actual mode as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 includes a first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and a second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of marks or indicators. A second start storage display area 3D is provided to display the number of start stores (hereinafter referred to as "second start stores") related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is disposed on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is disposed below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and to the left of the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and located on the right Be done.

  In addition, a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and A second special symbol variation state display area 3F is provided to indicate whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the two decorative symbols 32 is variably displayed or stopped. For example, variation display is performed in each of these areas When the key is turned on, the corresponding mark is displayed in a lit state, and when the stopped state is displayed, it is displayed in an unlit state. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawing, the lighting display of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the lighting display of the mark is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F are disposed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and the second special symbol 231 are variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 Although the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not to be displayed is provided, a display area indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively changing may be provided. You can also.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 125 (a), in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, One first start storage is displayed in the first start storage display area 3C, and one second start storage is displayed in the second start storage display area 3D. Here, as shown in FIG. 125 (b) As shown, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start variable display based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D display the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage, which are subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. As a result, in this example, both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are hidden. Also, at this time, with regard to the first decorative symbol 31, referring to the table for determining the first decorative symbol effect pattern shown in FIG. 124 (a), corresponds to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns. The effect data 2 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, referring to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b), to the specific reach loss fluctuation effect effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 is determined.

  Also, when the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started, it is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E and in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are in motion.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The variable display is continued in a manner in which 32 combines into one. The decorative symbol (the third decorative symbol 33) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G, where variable display and stop display are performed. The third decorative symbol display region 3G is configured as one region covering the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B in this example, and the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display The region 3B is both hidden. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed by the specific effect pattern as described above, the relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 An effect (ie, in this example, a combined effect in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined and displayed) is performed. In the case where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed in combination other than the effect pattern as described above, effects of combined display may be performed. Also, effects of combined display may be performed based on a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed instead of such a combination of effect patterns.

  Even in a situation where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined into one in a state where the variable display is performed, the square mark and the second special displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E The quadrangular mark displayed in the symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are in the process of variation.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), in the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined into one, a part thereof is in a fluctuating display and becomes a reach mode. However, this reflects the individual variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. For example, in the first decorative symbol 31, when the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and becomes a reach mode, and in the second decorative symbol 32, the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and being a reach mode, the third decoration The left symbol of the symbol 33 is a number obtained by adding the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32. Similarly, the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is the first decorative symbol It is a number obtained by adding the right symbol of 31 and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 (if the digit overflow occurs, the lower one digit is selected). As understood from the contents of the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 described later, at this time, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 are “7” respectively, and the second decorative symbol is Since it is known that the 32 left symbols and the right symbols are each "2", the left symbols and the right symbols of the third decorative symbol 33 are respectively "9". In addition, determination of each decoration symbol in such a 3rd decoration symbol 33 is not limited to the above methods, For example, one decoration symbol of the 1st decoration symbol 31 and the 2nd decoration symbol 32 It may be determined based only on the symbol or may be determined based only on the other decorative pattern.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is finished and the combined state is finished, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is a display of the reach mode, and "7" is displayed on both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, since the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol “232” and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is also stopped and displayed, the second special symbol 231 is black. It has turned white. In the present embodiment, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is ended when the combination execution timer, which will be described later, becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this and the third decorative symbol 33 is performed at various timings. The display of can be ended. For example, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be ended after one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (f), the display of the reach aspect in the first decorative symbol 31 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed with the decorative symbol "777" (ie, in the big hit aspect). Further, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white because the first special symbol 221 is also stopped and displayed. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode after the united state is ended, but before the united state is ended, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode and then the third decoration The display of the symbol 33 may be ended and the original state may be restored. Further, the variable display may be ended without ending the united state. In this case, it is preferable that the third decorative symbol 33 is configured to stop and display the decorative symbol corresponding to one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the combined state.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when "777" aligned with each symbol is "7" is a decorative symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big deal confirmation, and "333" aligned with each symbol "3" In the case of a decorative pattern, it is determined 8R probability variation big hit or more, and in the case of a decorative pattern where 3 numbers are aligned other than the above, 4R is usually decided over big hit, but according to the stop indication of such decorative symbol The big hit aspect may be determined by another method without defining the aspect.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, and then stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbols are respectively It stops at the time according to the fluctuation time specified by the effect data of the effect pattern determined about the decoration pattern. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Therefore, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation of "7" of the left symbol, and "7" of the right symbol is stopped after 6 seconds of the start of fluctuation, and "7" of the central symbol is fluctuated Stop after 60 seconds from the start. On the other hand, for the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol "2" stops 3 seconds after the change starts, and the right symbol "2" stops 6 seconds after the change starts, and the middle symbol "3" changes After 50 seconds from the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, they stop 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the present invention, when the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Thus, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is some relationship between these decorative patterns. In addition, after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed, they become non-display, and then the third decorative symbol is displayed, so that the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are united. Can make the player think as if the third decorative pattern was born. In addition, in the combined state where the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 become non-display, and each symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 becomes the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 respectively. Since it is a number obtained by adding each symbol of the decorative symbol 32, the player can roughly predict the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the third decorative symbol 33. This causes a change in the game, which leads to an improvement in the interest of the player in the game.

  FIG. 126 shows another modified example in which the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. As shown as an example in FIG. 126 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display region 3B. State is shown. At this time, although one first start storage is displayed in the first start storage display area 3C, the second start storage is not displayed in the second start storage display area 3D. In addition, while the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E is displayed in white, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F is displayed in black, the first The special symbol 221 is in the stop display, and it is shown that the second special symbol 231 is in motion.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 starts variable display based on the first start memory. As a result, the first start storage display area 3C displays the number of the first start storage subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and in this example, it is the same as the second start storage. , The first starting memory is hidden. In addition, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from white to black, and the variation display start of the first decorative symbol 31 is indicated. Also, at this time, with regard to the first decorative symbol 31, referring to the table for determining the first decorative symbol effect pattern shown in FIG. 124 (a), corresponds to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns. The effect data 2 is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, referring to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b), to the specific reach loss fluctuation effect effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 is determined.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the left symbol "6" is stopped and displayed as the second decorative symbol 32 continues the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the left symbol "3" is stopped and displayed while the first decorative symbol 31 continues the variable display, and the second decorative symbol 32 continues the variable display, The right symbol "4" is stopped and displayed. In such a variable display state, as shown in FIG. 126 (d), the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3G. As described above, in this modification, the combined display is performed when both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being displayed in a variable manner and a part of the symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Similarly to FIG. 125, the third decorative symbol display region 3G is configured as one region covering the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, and the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol The display area 3B is both hidden. In the third decorative symbol 33, the variable display is continued, and as shown in FIG. 126 (d), the left symbol "9" is stopped and displayed. The left symbol “9” is a combination of the left symbol “3” of the first decorative symbol 31 and the left symbol “6” of the second decorative symbol 32.

  Next, in the third decorative symbol 33, as shown in FIG. 126 (e), the right symbol "7" is stopped and displayed while the variable display is continued. At this time, although the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the symbol to be stopped and displayed is “3”, so “7” of the right symbol is The right symbol “3” of the 1 decorative symbol 31 and the right symbol “4” of the second symbol 32 are added. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (f), when the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F is displayed in white, indicating that the second special symbol 231 is stopped and displayed, this is the case. At the timing, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol of the missing form of "987". At this time, although the first decorative symbol 31 is still being displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are added to the third decorative symbol 33 The numbers are set to the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 is finished and the combined state is finished, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 is a display of the reach mode, and "3" is displayed on both the left symbol and the right symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol "654". In this modification, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed after the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed, and then the combined state is released. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 is finished, and the stop display is performed in the big hit manner of the decorative symbol "333" (displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E The black mark changes from black to white because the first special symbol 221 is also displayed stopped. The timing to end the united state may be immediately after the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 in the combined state is obtained by adding each symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 Since the number is displayed, the player can display the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed immediately before and the other, even if one of the decorative symbols continues the variable display after the united state is released. From the stop display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to predict the decorative symbol in the variable display, which brings about a change in the game and leads to the improvement of the interest in the game in the player.

  Next, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified. The process flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the fifth embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. First, a process flow relating to control of the change operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. 125 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 135, the sub CPU 71 performs sub control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decoration symbol stop processing, effect pattern change processing, command analysis processing, stop symbol determination processing, decoration The symbol forced stop process and the effect pattern determination process are configured to be executed. The command analysis process is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main process. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative pattern forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
As shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 71 performs an initialization process in response to power on (S7001). Specifically, as the initialization process, the sub CPU 71 reads the start program from the program ROM 72, and clears various flags and the like stored in the work RAM 73.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs random number update processing (S7002). Specifically, as the random number update process, the sub CPU 71 updates values of a random number counter for effect determination, which will be described later, a random number counter for stop symbol determination, a random number counter for decorative symbol determination, etc.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 131 and 132 described later (S7003). In the command analysis process, various commands received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) are analyzed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing (S7004). Specifically, as display control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls display of the images of the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, the third decorative symbol 33, and the like based on the set effect data and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs sound control processing (S7005). Specifically, as the sound control processing, the sub CPU 71 performs output control of sounds such as notification sound, sound effects, music, speech and the like based on the set effect data.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs lamp control processing (S7006). Specifically, as the lamp control processing, the sub CPU 71 controls lighting / extinguishing of various lamps based on the set effect data.

[Timer interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 71 executes timer interrupt processing every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms). First, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of saving each register (S7021). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 saves the program under execution stored in each register (storage area).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs timer update processing (S7022). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) values set in various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, a combination enable timer, a combination standby timer, a combination execution timer, etc. described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 executes a decoration symbol stop process shown in FIG. 129 described later (S7023), and then executes a rendering pattern change process shown in FIG. 130 described later (S7024). In the effect pattern change process, control for uniting and displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs operation button input processing (S7025). In the operation button input process, it is detected by the sub CPU 71 whether or not various operation buttons have been operated.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register (S7026). Specifically, the sub CPU 71 restores the program saved in step S7021 to each register. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the timer interrupt process.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
As shown in FIG. 129, as the first step of the decorative symbol stopping process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7031). The first decorative symbol fluctuation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is fluctuatingly displayed, and is set in step S7114 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  In S7031, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S7031: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to processing of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7031: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7032). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31. In the first decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time according to the effect data is set in step S7115 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  In S7032, when the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 (S7032: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7035 described later. On the other hand, if the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7032: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the first decorative symbol stopping process (S7033), and sets the first decorative symbol variation flag off (S7034) . By such a first decorative symbol stopping process, the first decorative symbol 31 in the variable display is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7035). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is being displayed in a variable manner, and is set in step S7118 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  In S7035, when the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S7035: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7035: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7036). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32. In the second decorative symbol variation timer, a value corresponding to the variation time according to the effect data is set in step S7119 of the effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

  If the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 in S7036 (S7036: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S 7036: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the second decorative symbol stopping process (S 7037), and sets the second decorative symbol variation flag off (S 7038) . By such a second decorative symbol stop process, the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display is stopped and displayed.

[Demonstration pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 130, as the first step of the effect pattern change processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination enable flag is on (S7041). If the merge enable flag is off (S7041: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7044 described later. On the other hand, if the combination enable flag is on (S7041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination enable timer is 0 (S7042). If the combination enabling timer is not 0 (S7042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern changing process. If the combination enabling timer is 0 (S7042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the combination enabling flag (S7043), and then ends the effect pattern change processing.

  In the case of NO at step S7041, it is determined whether or not the combination standby flag is on (S7044). If the combination standby flag is off (S7044: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7052 described later. On the other hand, if the combination standby flag is on (S7044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination standby timer is 0 (S7045). If the combination standby timer is not 0 (S7045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the united waiting timer is 0 (S7045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the united waiting flag (S7046), turns on the united execution flag (S7047), and specifies the period for maintaining the united state to the united execution timer A predetermined value is set (S7048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the combination execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 10s is set in the combination enabling timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined to the specific effect pattern, and the combination standby timer that waits for execution of combination is equivalent to 2s A value corresponding to 30 s is set in the combination execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the combination enabling timer, the combination standby timer, and the combination execution timer is 50s of this fluctuation time. Not to exceed.

  After step S7048, the sub CPU 71 performs stop decoration symbol calculation processing (S7049), sets the calculated stop combination decoration symbol data (S7050), sets the decoration symbol combination data (S7051), and then changes the effect pattern End the process. Specifically, in the stop decorative symbol calculation process, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively added to obtain the third decorative symbol 33 after combination. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is the decorative symbol "333" and the second decorative symbol 32 is the decorative symbol "545", the combined symbols are "8" for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In this example, since the middle symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is not displayed stopped by the setting of the combination enabling timer, the combination standby timer, and the combination execution timer, when combining, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 There is no need to combine the symbols in the middle. In addition, even if the decorative symbol in the case of being summed up is a big hit symbol, as described above, the decorative symbol after the summed will not be stopped and displayed, and therefore no problem occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the combined decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) is determined by adding the symbols at the corresponding positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. It can be determined by various calculations including multiplication and division. In addition, when the value obtained by addition exceeds 9, the lower one digit of the value after addition can be adopted. By setting the stop united decorative symbol data calculated in this manner, the decorative symbol united based on this data becomes the third decorative symbol 33 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 125. Is displayed on the screen. In addition, the decorative symbol merged data is data for performing effects from the merging of the decorative symbols to immediately before the end of the decorative symbol merging.

  If NO in step S704, it is determined whether the united execution flag is on (S7052). If the combination execution flag is off (S7052: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the combination execution flag is on (S7052: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination execution timer is 0 (S7053). If the combination execution timer is not 0 (S7053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the combination execution timer is 0 (S7053: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the decoration symbol combination end data (S7054), turns off the combination execution flag (S7055), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative symbol combination end data is data for performing effects until the end of the decorative symbol combination, and when this data is set, the display based on the original effect data is completed when the display in the combined state is ended. It will return to the variable display and effect display of the symbol.

  As described above, in the effect pattern change process, the contents of the combination enabling flag, the combination enabling timer, the combination waiting flag, the combination waiting timer, the combination execution flag, and the combination execution timer are determined, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decoration The combined effect of the pattern 32 is controlled. The merge enable flag is set on when the specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determination process of FIG. 135 described later, and the merge enable flag is set. When the specific effect pattern is determined for the other decorative symbol when on (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined for both decorative symbols), the merge enable flag is turned off and the combined standby flag Is turned on. However, in this example, when the determination timing of the specific effect pattern related to both decorative symbols is separated by 10 seconds or more, the combination waiting timer is controlled so that the combination waiting flag is not turned on (the combination possibility flag is reset to off) ).

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the united waiting flag is set to ON, while monitoring that the united waiting timer (two seconds in this example) becomes 0, the unit waits for execution of united effect . In the effect pattern change process, when the combination standby timer becomes 0, the combination execution flag is set to ON, and the combination effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started. The time of the combined effect is managed by a combined execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

Command analysis processing
The command analysis process is described across FIGS. 131 and 132. First, as shown in FIG. 131, as the first step of the command analysis process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether there is a command received from the main control circuit 6 (main CPU 60) (S7061). If there is no received command (S7061: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process. On the other hand, if there is a received command (S7061: YES), the sub CPU 71 reads command data stored in the reception buffer (S7062).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) has been received based on the read command data (S7063). If the symbol designation command has not been received (S7063: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7065 described later. If the symbol designation command has been received (S7063: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes stop symbol determination processing shown in FIG. 133 described later (S7064). When the stop symbol determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Also, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received based on the read command data (S7065). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received (S7065: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7067 described later. If a variation pattern designation command has been received (S7065: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 135 described later (S7066). When the effect pattern determination process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol forced stop command (the first special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol forced stop command) has been received based on the read command data (S 7067). If the special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S 7067: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 7070 described later. If the special symbol forced stop command has been received (S 7067: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol forced stop process shown in FIG. 134 described later (S 7068). When the decorative symbol forced stop process is ended, the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069). The special symbol fluctuation state display setting process is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and shows a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating. (2) Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received, the data for turning off the mark representing the first special symbol fluctuation state is set, and when the second special symbol forced stop command is received, the second special symbol is stopped. Set data to turn off the mark representing the symbol fluctuation state. When the special symbol variation state display setting process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol stop command (the first special symbol stop command or the second special symbol stop command) is received based on the read command data (S 7070). If the special symbol stop command has not been received (S7070: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7072 described later shown in FIG. If the special symbol stop command has been received (S 7070: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S 7071). The special symbol fluctuation state display setting process is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and shows a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating. (2) Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol stop command is received, the data for turning off the mark representing the first special symbol fluctuation state is set, and when the second special symbol stop command is received, the second special symbol fluctuation Set data to turn off the mark indicating the status. When the special symbol variation state display setting process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Next, referring to FIG. 132, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command has been received based on the read command data (S7072). If the time saving end command has not been received (S7072: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7074 described later. If the time saving end command has been received (S7072: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode start processing (S7073). Specifically, in the special effect mode start process, data for displaying a background image in the special effect mode is set. Further, in the special effect mode start process, the gaming state flag set to ON is set to OFF, and thereafter, the normal gaming state B flag included in the gaming state flag is set to ON. The normal gaming state B flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state B. When the special effect mode start process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a special effect end command has been received based on the read command data (S7074). If the special effect end command has not been received (S7074: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7076 described later. If the special effect end command has been received (S7074: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes special effect mode end processing (S7075). Specifically, in the special effect mode end process, data for ending the background image display in the special effect mode is set. That is, in the special effect mode end process, the gaming state flag being turned on is set to off, and thereafter, the normal gaming state A flag included in the gaming state flag is set to on, which corresponds to the normal mode. Data for displaying a background image is set. The normal gaming state A flag is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the normal gaming state A. When the special effect mode end process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the gaming state command has been received based on the read command data (S 7076). If the game state command has not been received (S 7076: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 7078 described later. If a gaming state command has been received (S 7076: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode setting processing (S 7077). Specifically, in the effect mode setting process, when a time saving game state command is received as a game state command, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the time saving game state is set, and a probability variation game state command and a time saving game state When a command is received, data for displaying a background image corresponding to the probable variation gaming state is set. Further, in the effect mode setting process, the gaming state flag set to ON is set to OFF, and thereafter, the gaming state flag corresponding to the effect mode is set to ON. In addition, when only the time saving game state command is received, the time saving game state flag included in the game state flag is set to ON, and when the probability change gaming state command and the time saving game state command are received, the game state flag is The probability variation gaming state flag and the time saving gaming state flag included are set on. When the effect mode setting process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation start command (the first special symbol variation start command or the second special symbol variation start command) is received based on the read command data (S 7078). If the special symbol variation start command has not been received (S 7078: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 7080 described later. If the special symbol variation start command has been received (S7078: YES), the sub CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation state display setting process (S7079). The special symbol fluctuation state display setting process is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and shows a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating. (2) Control is performed on the display of the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing. That is, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, data for lighting the mark representing the first special symbol variation state is set, and the second special symbol variation start command is received, the second special symbol variation start command is received. Set data to light the mark representing the symbol fluctuation state. When the special symbol variation state display setting process is ended, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the other received command (S 7080). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process.

[Stop symbol determination process]
As shown in FIG. 133, as a first step of the stop symbol determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts a decoration symbol determination random number from the decoration symbol determination random number counter (S7091). The value of the decorative symbol determination random number counter is updated by random number update processing at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main processing is executed. Thereby, the random number for decorative symbol determination becomes a value extracted at random. Next, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the decorative symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 based on the received symbol designation command (special symbol designation command) (S7092). The special symbol designation command indicates a lost symbol or a big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and based on this, the result of the big hit lottery, It is determined whether it is a 15R probability variation hit, an 8R probability variation hit, a 4R probability variation hit, a 4R normal hit, or a loss, and a table for decorative symbol determination corresponding to this is selected.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected decorative symbol determination table, determines a stop decorative symbol based on the extracted decorative symbol determination random number (S7093), and sets the determined stop decorative symbol data in the work RAM 73. Then (S7094), the stop symbol determination process is ended. For example, when it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is a 15R probability variation big hit based on the special symbol specification command, the table for decorative symbol determination shown in FIG. Then, the decorative symbol for reach variation according to 0 to 899) is determined as stop decorative symbol data, and is set in the work RAM 73. Also, if it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, the table for decorative symbol determination shown in FIG. 122 is selected, but in this case, as the stop decorative symbol data, the decorative symbol for reach fluctuation and reach fluctuation The time decorative pattern is set. This is because, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination process is performed after the stop symbol determination process, and it is not determined whether or not the reach effect is set when the stop decoration symbol data is set. If the rendering pattern is determined first, either the lost variation decorative pattern or the reach variation decorative symbol can be selectively set depending on whether the effect pattern is the reach effect or not.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
As shown in FIG. 134, as the first step of the decorative symbol forced stop process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the forced stop command corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, ie, the first special symbol forced stop command, has been received. (S7101). If the first special symbol forced stop command has not been received (S7101: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7105 described later.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol forced stop command is received in step S7101 (S7101: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs the first decorative symbol forced stop process (S7102), and turns off the first decorative symbol variation flag. The first decorative symbol variation timer is cleared (S7104). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process. The first decorative symbol forced stop processing is processing for forcibly stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol 31.

  If NO in step S7101, the sub CPU 71 performs second decoration symbol forced stop processing (S7105), sets the second decoration symbol variation flag off (S7106), and clears the second decoration symbol variation timer. (S7107). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol forced stop process. The second decorative symbol forced stop processing is processing for forcibly stopping and displaying the second decorative symbol 32.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 135, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S7111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thus, the effect determination random number is a value randomly extracted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the received fluctuation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S7112). The variation pattern specification command is determined using the special symbol variation pattern determination table as shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62. (Sub-CPU 71). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S7112: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7117 described later. If the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S7112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S7113). Based on the effect data set in this manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Further, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted such that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S7114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S7115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4 and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 7116). In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both determined to be executed by the specific effect pattern as the condition to be in the combined state. It is determined whether or not the effect pattern of is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S7116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7116: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7121 described later.

  In step S7117, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (b) and works the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern specification command. Set in the RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this manner, variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Also, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted so that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S7118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S7119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is any of the effect data 22 and the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120). In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both determined to be executed by the specific effect pattern as the condition to be in the combined state, so here, the second decorative symbol is here It is determined whether or not the effect pattern of is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S7120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S7120: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7121 described later.

  In the case of YES at step S7116 or YES at step S7120, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination enable flag is on (S7121). If the combination enable flag is on (S7121: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to processing of step S7124 described later. On the other hand, if the combination enable flag is off (S7121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the combination enable flag on (S7122), sets a predetermined value in the combination enable timer (S7123), and then performs the effect pattern determination process Finish. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this manner, when the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined to be the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the combining enable timer, the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed to display the integrated symbol. It will be done. In this example, although the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  In the case of YES at step S7121, the sub CPU 71 sets the coalescing possible flag off (S7124), clears the coalescing possible timer (S7125), sets the coalescing standby flag on (S7126), and specifies the coalescing standby timer as predetermined. A value is set (S7127), and then the effect pattern determination process is ended. Here, the combination standby flag is set to ON, and a predetermined value is set to the combination standby timer, so that the combination display is on standby only for the time set to the combination standby timer. Whether or not the combination standby flag is on is determined in step S7044 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 130 above, where it is determined that the combination standby flag is on and the combination standby timer is selected in step S7045. If it is determined to be 0, the united display is started. In this example, although the predetermined value set in the combination standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137, the processing flow of the program executed by sub CPU 71 for another modification related to the changing operation of first decorative symbol 31 and second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. Will be explained. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

[Demonstration pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 136, as the first step of the effect pattern change processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination enable flag is on (S7131). If the combination enable flag is off (S7131: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7134 described later. On the other hand, if the combination enable flag is on (S7131: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination enable timer is 0 (S7132). If the combination enabling timer is not 0 (S7132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern changing process. If the combination enable timer is 0 (S7132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the combination enable flag (S7133), and then ends the effect pattern change processing.

  In the case of NO at step S7131, it is determined whether the combination standby flag is on (S7134). If the combination standby flag is off (S7134: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the combination standby flag is on (S7134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination standby timer is 0 (S7135). If the combination standby timer is not 0 (S7135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the united waiting timer is 0 (S7135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the united waiting flag (S7136), turns on the united execution flag (S7137), and performs stop decoration symbol calculation processing (S7138).

  After step S7138, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the calculated symbol is a big hit mode (S7139). If it is not the jackpot mode (S7139: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7141 described later. In the case of the big hit mode (S7139: YES), the sub CPU 71 performs stop decoration symbol correction processing (S7140). In the stop decorative symbol correction process, in a state where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined, the correction processing is performed to prevent the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) from becoming a big hit mode. This correction process is, for example, a correction of subtracting 1 from the calculated middle symbol. This is to prevent the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) in the combined state from becoming a big hit when the lost symbol and the lost symbol are added. For example, the first decorative symbol 31 is "525", the effect pattern is determined as the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 (effect data 14), the second decorative symbol 32 is "252", and the effect pattern is the specific reach loss When it is decided that it is fluctuation production 3 (rendering data 24), the decoration design (3rd decoration design 33) of union state becomes “777”, there is a fear that it is misunderstood that it is the decoration design corresponding to 15R probability variation big hit is there. Here, such a misunderstanding can be avoided by subtracting 1 from the middle symbol and setting the decorative symbol to "767".

  In the case of NO at step S7139, or after step S7140, the calculated stop united decorative symbol data is set (S7141), the decorative symbol united data is set (S7142), and then the effect pattern changing process is ended. As described above, the calculated stop combination decorative design data is data corrected so as to avoid the big hit mode when the big hit mode is in the combined state. In addition, the decorative symbol merged data is data for performing effects from the merging of the decorative symbols to immediately before the end of the decorative symbol merging.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
As shown in FIG. 137, as the first step of the decorative symbol stopping process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7151). The first decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed.

  In S7151, when the first decorative symbol variation flag is not on (S7151: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7151: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7152). The first decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol 31.

  If the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 in S7152 (S7152: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, if the value of the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the uniting execution flag is on (S7153). The combination execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed.

  In S7153, when the combination execution flag is not on (S7153: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7157 described later. On the other hand, if the combination execution flag is on (S7153: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets combination decoration symbol stop data (S7154), and sets decoration symbol combination end display data (S7155). Here, the combined decoration symbol stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decoration symbol, and the decoration symbol combination end display data is data for performing the end display of the decoration symbol combination. After step S7155, the combination execution flag is turned off (S7156).

  In the case of NO in step S7151, in the case of NO in step S7152, in the case of NO in step S7153, or after step S7156, the sub CPU 71 performs the first decoration symbol stop process (S7157) and sets the first decoration symbol variation flag. It is set off (S7158). When the first decorative symbol 31 in the variable display is stopped and displayed by such processing, the stop display of the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 The end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the combination execution timer. On the other hand, in the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 130, control is performed such that the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 is performed when the combination execution timer becomes zero.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7159). The second decorative symbol variation flag is a flag indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed.

  If the second decorative symbol variation flag is not on at S7159 (S7159: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process. On the other hand, if the second decorative symbol variation flag is on (S7159: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7160). The second decorative symbol variation timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the variation time of the second decorative symbol 32.

  If the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is not 0 in S7160 (S7160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stopping process. On the other hand, if the value of the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0 (S7160: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the combination execution flag is on (S7161). The combination execution flag is a flag indicating that a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) obtained by combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed.

  If it is determined in S7161 that the combination execution flag is not on (S7161: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S7165 described later. On the other hand, if the combination execution flag is on (S7161: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets combination decoration symbol stop data (S7162), and sets decoration symbol combination end display data (S7163). Here, the combined decoration symbol stop data is data for stopping and displaying the combined decoration symbol, and the decoration symbol combination end display data is data for performing the end display of the decoration symbol combination. After step S7163, the combination execution flag is turned off (S7164).

  In the case of NO at step S7161 or after step S7164, the sub CPU 71 performs second decoration symbol stop processing (S7165), and sets the second decoration symbol variation flag to OFF (S7166). When the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display is stopped and displayed by such processing, the stop display of the decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. The end display will be displayed. In this modification, the stop display and the end display of the third decorative symbol 33 are performed without using the combination execution timer. Also, in this decorative symbol stop process, the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed for each of the cases where the first decorative symbol variation timer is 0 and the second decorative symbol variation timer is 0. As a result, when one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 ends the variable display, the display of the third decorative symbol 33 which is the combined decorative symbol is ended. .

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modified example of the liquid crystal display device and a modified example of combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned above etc. or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Liquid crystal display device]
FIG. 138 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 138, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is disposed with the upper position of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. On the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed under predetermined conditions. In addition to the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the liquid crystal display 3 displays a decorative symbol (third decorative symbol 33) combining the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. .

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in a variable display mode on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. When the specific effect pattern is determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed. The third decorative symbol 33 is displayed so as to cover the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and as a result, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Moreover, when the 3rd decoration symbol 33 is displayed in this way, it can also be controlled so that the 1st decoration symbol 31 and the 2nd decoration symbol 32 are not displayed.

  As a result, although the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are fluctuating on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the fluctuating display can not be confirmed, but instead, the sub liquid crystal The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the display device 3 '.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), in the state where the third decorative symbol 33 is variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ' The 1 decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', respectively. Accordingly, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this modification, the third decorative symbol 33 displays a decorative symbol different from the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, but either one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed. The same decorative pattern as in the above may be displayed as the third decorative pattern 33, or the third decorative pattern may be obtained by adding the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern of the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32, respectively. You may display as 33 left symbols, middle symbols, and right symbols.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (d), the third decorative symbol 33 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the decorative symbol "666" which is a big hit display is displayed. Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed, and a decorative symbol "777" which is a big hit display is shown. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'and the decorative symbol "677" is shown. However, in this state, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F disposed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed in white, and the fluctuation state of the second special symbol Indicates that the first special symbol variation state display area 3E is still black display state, while the first decoration is stopped and displayed The decorative symbol "777" of the symbol 31 actually indicates that it is still in the non-confirmed display state. In this modification, the timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not necessarily coincide with the timing of the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33. In addition, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is not completely stop displayed until the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, and it is not small. The timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the timing of the stop display of the third decorative symbol 33 may be made to coincide with each other by swaying (Swing fluctuation display). .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), in the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is displayed in a state where the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It moves until it reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display 3. Then, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. 138 (f), the display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 When finished, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 which have been displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3'. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are erased, and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved to the original position. In this manner, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 so that the display contents of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' are displayed. Can be seen as if the contents of the liquid crystal display device 3 had been transferred.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is located below the top of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It may be controlled to arrange at least a part of 3 '. In addition, after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is the liquid crystal display only when the player operates the operation button or the like. If the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation button or the like, it looks as if the decorative symbol has been transferred from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. You may not make an effect.

  Even after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the non-confirmed display state is maintained for the first special symbol for a predetermined time (the first special symbol fluctuation state While the square mark displayed in the display area 3E is maintained in the black display state), the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the state of the fluctuation display. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (g), the first special symbol is also displayed stopped (the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white), and the liquid crystal display 3 The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of.

  As described above, according to the modification of the embodiment, the third decorative symbol 33 in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are combined is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, it is possible to prevent the variation process of each decorative symbol from being obscured by the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '.

  In addition, in the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol holding number, a special symbol holding number, etc. may be displayed. Thereby, the space for displaying another effect image of the decorative symbol on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device can be secured more widely. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in the oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship in which the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are combined.

  FIG. 139 shows a modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second symbol is displayed) The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 139 (b) when the decorative symbol 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific aspect (in this example, "123") which is not a big hit aspect The third display pattern 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be the specific effect pattern, and the combined effect is performed regardless of this.

  FIG. 140 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is being performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the liquid crystal display device On the lower side of the display screen 3, a message 34 prompting a button operation (for example, a text message such as "Button is pressed !!") is displayed, and when the player operates the operation button here, FIG. 140 (b) The combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 6 is performed, and the third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  FIG. 141 shows another modification of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 3 with the decorative symbol "113", a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, a text message such as "Stop with the same symbol !!") Is displayed. Here, as a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 is the same as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 being stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol (for example, "113"), as shown in FIG. 141 (b), a message indicating that the command has been achieved on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. 34 (for example, a text message such as "achievement!") Is displayed. Here, although both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, in this case, the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 141 (c) The third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, where the variable display is started again. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation button or the like, and such an operation It may be determined by other conditions regardless. When determining based on the said other conditions, it can also be determined irrespective of whether the player operated the operation button, and whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with the operation button itself.

  FIG. 142 shows another modified example of the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the decorative symbol "113" being displayed stop, a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, "draw the lever and stop displaying the A symbol !! Text message such as Here, as a result of the player operating the lever (the lever operable by the player in the back and forth or left and right direction) so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, the first decorative symbol 31 When the symbol "A" is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved is displayed on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, "achievement !!" Text message such as is displayed. Here, although both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, in this case, the combined display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 142 (c) The third decorative symbol 33 is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, where the variable display is started again. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is to be stopped and displayed with the symbol "A" may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and such a relationship is related to such operation. Alternatively, it may be determined by other conditions. In the case of determining based on the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether the player operates the lever, or whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself or the like.

  In addition, in the modification shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 139-FIG. 142, when the 1st decorative symbol 31 and the 2nd decorative symbol 32 are unitedly displayed, the period of the united display can be prescribed by various methods. For example, it may be across variations of a plurality of special symbols, or until the variation of either one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is over, or even if a big hit game is executed Alternatively, the predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, the change start of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the change start of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed in an integrated manner, triggered by the fact that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying the conditions are determined as the specific effect pattern. However, various other conditions can be adopted as a trigger for such combined display. For example, if a predetermined lottery (random number lottery or the like) is performed and if this lottery is won, one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) In the case of the variable effect), when the big hit information is included in the start memory regarding the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable display is not started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various timings can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (probability or small hit) after the end of both variable display. In addition, as the timing when the decorative pattern unites, for example, when the decorative pattern is fluctuatingly displayed at the same time, when one decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displayed, or when both decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, etc. Timing can be considered.

  In addition, based on the fact that one unitary display trigger described above is established, uniting and separation (the third decorative symbol 33 is erased and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed again) are displayed. It can also be controlled to be repeated several times. Also, a decorative symbol corresponding to a normal symbol may be provided, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol may be combined with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the combined display is performed, when the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, the lost symbol may not be displayed by not returning to the original state (not separated). Furthermore, a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or the stop display is displayed, and a second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 The second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F showing whether the special symbol 231 is displayed being changed or stopped may be shown as each representing a variable display state concerning the decorative symbol, and these special symbol fluctuation state displays It is also possible not to provide the area (3E, 3F).

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a sixth embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Table for determining the big hit, table for determining the big hit symbol]
In the sixth embodiment, since the same table as the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 is used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61. The jackpot determination table detects that the gaming ball has won in either one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B in the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. It is referred to when performing the big hit lottery by a special symbol based on the random number for big hit judgment on the occasion of a thing. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts the jackpot symbol determination random number according to the judgment result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number Is referred to when

[Table for decorative design determination]
In the sixth embodiment, since the same table as the decorative symbol determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72. As the decorative symbol determination table, different tables are used according to the determination result of the big hit type. For example, in the case where the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, and loss, a decorative symbol determination table according to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, another decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be

  In the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the corresponding decorative symbols are determined based on the decorative symbol determination random numbers extracted from the decorative symbol determination random number counter updated by the random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined with reference to the determination table. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899. In the sixth embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 described above each include three symbols of a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol that represent numbers.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the 15R certain variation big hit, the probability that "777" is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that "333" is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit, when a decorative symbol other than "777" is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, big hit etc.) It is informed that it is 15R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that "333" is determined as the decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol of "777" is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, when the decorative design other than "333" is determined, after the display stop of the decorative design (period from the display stop of the decorative design to the start of big hit, big hit etc.), It is informed that it is 8R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that the symbols ("111", "555", "999") composed of odd numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is set high (where "333", The decorative pattern of "777" is set not to be selected). Here, after the display stop of the determined decorative symbol (the period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, the big hit, etc.), it is notified that it is a 4R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 4R regular big hit, the probability that the symbols ("222", "444", "666", "888") configured with even numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is high, and "333" and "777" "" Is set so as not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers from "0" to "9" are respectively determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the decorative symbols are configured by these three symbols. According to the contents of the decoration symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” aligned with each symbol is “7” is a decoration symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big hit decision, and each symbol is “ When "333" aligned in 3 "is a decorative pattern, it is determined that 8R probability variation big hit or more, and in the case of a decorative pattern in which three numbers are aligned other than the above, it is 4R normal big hit or more. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a probability variation big hit (that is, 15R probability variation big hit) having a larger number of rounds than 8R. Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a 15 R positive big hit, an 8 R positive big hit, or a 4 R positive big hit.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
In the sixth embodiment, since a table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table is a variation pattern and variation time for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the random number for variation time determination, triggered by the determination result of the jackpot type being obtained. And is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, here, different tables may be used for each gaming state.

  In addition, data indicating a variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table, and a variation pattern designation command are predetermined of the main RAM 62. It is stored in the area. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In addition, although the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result of In addition, only one table may be provided as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the table for the same special symbol variation pattern determination may be referred, regardless of the number of starting memory which concerns on the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231. Not limited to the above, a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to depending on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a short variation time can be easily determined as the number of starting memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of starting memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in the special symbol variation pattern determination table according to the determination result of the specific big hit type, but as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the big hit type One variation pattern may be associated with each other according to the determination result.

[Table for deciding on decorative design effect pattern]
In the sixth embodiment, since a table similar to the decorative symbol rendering pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 124 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72. The decorative symbol presentation pattern determination table is triggered by having received the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60, and based on the presentation determination random number, the presentation content of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (( Hereinafter, it is referred to when determining rendering conditions such as “rendering pattern” and the corresponding rendering data. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In addition, although the time (fluctuation time) in which the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed is also defined in the decorative symbol effect pattern determination table, this fluctuation time is linked to the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol It is also the time when other effects are performed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  In the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are specified as the specific effect pattern for the first decorative symbol 31, and the second decorative symbol 32 is specified Although the reach loss fluctuation effects 2 and 3 are specified as the specific effect pattern, when the specific effect pattern is executed on the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol The relevant effects (shuffle effects) are performed with 32. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (b), it is similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 124 (a). One or more can be provided. In addition, although this embodiment provides the mechanism which performs shuffle production, when both of two decoration symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as a specific effect pattern, for example, , One of the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponds to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol corresponds to the other decorative symbol, and the special symbol The shuffle effect may be performed based on the relationship with the normal symbol.

[Table for determination of decoration pattern change position]
FIG. 143 shows a decorative symbol change position determination table to be referred to in order to determine the change position of the decorative symbol. The decorative symbol change position determination table is referenced based on the position determination random numbers extracted from the position determination random number counter updated by random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing described later, and the change position of the decorative symbol is determined. Ru. More specifically, based on the position determination random number, from the decorative symbol change position determination table, in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the position of any of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol The position change data to be used for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol, which will be described later, is determined including the change position indicating whether or not to be changed and the data representing the change position. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are each composed of three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, each representing a number, and the first symbol Of the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, it is determined between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 which symbol is to be replaced. Also, in this example, in the decorative symbol change position determination table, the change position is provided for each of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, and “1” indicates a change in symbol position, “ “0” indicates that the position of the symbol is not changed. If the position of the corresponding symbol is not changed, "0" is set. Here, the position determination random number can take any one of 19 values from 0 to 18. Data concerning these tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 143, when the position determination random number “0” is extracted when determining the change position of the decorative symbol, the change position is “0” for any of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. And the position change data 1 is determined as the position change data. In this case, since the change position is "0" for all the symbols, no symbol is changed between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. When the position determination random numbers “1” to “3” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the left symbol, “0” for the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the position change as position change data Data 2 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol is “1”, the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are interchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “4” to “6” are extracted, the change position is determined to be “1” for the left symbol and the middle symbol, and is determined to be “0” for the right symbol, and position change as position change data Data 3 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the middle symbol is “1”, the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the middle symbols are exchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the position determination random numbers “7” to “9” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the left symbol and the right symbol, and is determined as “0” for the middle symbol, and position change as position change data Data 4 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the left symbol and the right symbol is “1”, the left symbols and the right symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed at a predetermined timing. . When the position determination random numbers "10" to "12" are extracted, the change position is determined to be "1" for all of the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol, and position change data 5 is determined as position change data. Ru. In this case, since the change positions of all the symbols are “1”, all the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively replaced and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “13” to “15” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the middle symbol, “0” for the left symbol and the right symbol, and position change as position change data Data 6 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are interchanged and displayed at a predetermined timing. When the position determination random numbers “16” to “18” are extracted, the change position is determined as “1” for the middle symbol and the right symbol, “0” for the left symbol, and the position change as position change data Data 7 is determined. In this case, since the change position of the right symbol of the middle symbol is “1”, the middle symbols and the right symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are switched and displayed at a predetermined timing. .

  In this example, 19 random numbers for position determination are used from 0 to 18, and the change position of the decorative symbol is determined by the above allocation of the position determination random numbers, but this is merely an example. Different numbers of positioning random numbers can be assigned in different ways to determine the change position of the decorative symbol.

[Control of fluctuation operation of decoration pattern]
In the present embodiment, the variation operation (i.e. shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled by the actual mode as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 144 to 146, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. However, in this example, at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 may be displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A under a predetermined condition, and the first decorative symbol display region 3B may be the first. The design of at least a part of the decorative design 31 may be displayed. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of marks or indicators. A second start storage display area 3D is provided to display the number of start stores (hereinafter referred to as "second start stores") related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is disposed on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is disposed below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and to the left of the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and located on the right Be done.

  Also, in the example of the series of fluctuation operations shown in FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, is the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3? The first special symbol variation state display area 3I indicating whether it is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are changed and displayed or not displayed. 2 Special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J is provided. For example, when the corresponding special symbol is variably displayed in each of these areas, the corresponding mark is displayed in a lit state, and the stop display is performed. It will be turned off. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawing, the lighting display of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the lighting display of the mark is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are disposed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, a special symbol fluctuation state display area (3I, 3J) indicating whether or not the corresponding special symbol is variably displayed is provided on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, the corresponding decoration It is also possible to provide a display area that indicates whether or not the symbol is changing.

  Also, as described above, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I indicates whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changing. While showing, the number which shows whether the 1st decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the 1st decorative symbol display area 3A or the 2nd decorative symbol 32 is displayed is displayed. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, "1" is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When 32 is displayed, "2" is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (ie, the first special symbol 221) is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol fluctuation state While the square mark displayed in the display area 3I is displayed in white, the number "1" is displayed in black in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. . Also, for example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is variably displayed, the first special symbol is displayed. While the square mark displayed in the fluctuation state display area 3I is displayed in black, the number "2" is displayed in white in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. Be done.

  Similarly, as described above, the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J is changing whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is changing. Is displayed, and a number indicating whether the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. For example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, "1" is displayed in the square mark, while the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. When 32 is displayed, "2" is displayed in the square mark. For example, when the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the second special symbol 231) is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol fluctuation state While the square mark displayed in the display area 3J is displayed in white, the number "2" is displayed in black in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. . Further, for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (that is, the first special symbol 221) is variably displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. While the square mark displayed in the fluctuation state display area 3J is displayed in black, the number "1" is displayed in white in the square mark, for example, so as to be visible in the square mark. Be done.

  The first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second special symbol variation state display area 3J may not be provided. Also, in this example, the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J are disposed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, but the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 Alternatively, another display device may be provided and arranged at a predetermined position of the device.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 146, at least a part of the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and at least a part of the second decorative symbol 32 is the first decorative symbol. The shuffle effect is performed so as to be displayed in the display area 3A. In addition, a shuffle state display 3L is displayed to indicate that such shuffle effect is being performed and also indicates that the position of the decorative symbol may be changed, and shuffle effect is performed, and the position change of the decorative symbol is performed. If there is a possibility that this has been done, the word "Shuffle Run" will be displayed in this area. The shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the shuffle state display 3L is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, the shuffle state display 3L may be arranged at another position on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. A device may be provided and located at a predetermined position of the device.

  First, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), with the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 being stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, respectively, One first start storage is displayed in the first start storage display area 3C, and one second start storage is displayed in the second start storage display area 3D. Here, in FIG. 144 (b) As shown, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start variable display based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D display the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage, which are subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. As a result, in this example, both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. At this time, with regard to the first decorative symbol 31, referring to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (a), the specific effect pattern is The effect data 2 corresponding to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b) It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed by the specific effect pattern as described above, the relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 A character effect (that is, in this example, a shuffle effect of changing the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (replacing the display area)) is performed. In the case where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed in a combination other than the effect pattern as described above, shuffle effect may be performed. In addition, shuffle effect may be performed based on the decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed instead of the combination of such effect patterns.

  In addition, when the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started, it is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are in motion. Furthermore, in the quadrangle mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I, "1" indicating that the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed is displayed, and in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J In the displayed square mark, "2" indicating that the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed is displayed.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is respectively performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Effect information 35 including characters of “in shuffle” indicating that the shuffle of 32 is being performed is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area covering the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B Hide both. Furthermore, when the effect information 35 of "in shuffle" is displayed in the effect information display area 3K, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J The quadrangular mark displayed on each is kept black and indicates that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are still changing, but the shuffle of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 is Since it is being performed, the display of "1" and "2" is stopped and displayed simply as a black mark.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is erased, and in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the decorative symbol after shuffle is displayed Be done. At this time, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and this is a variation display of the non-reach aspect, “6” is displayed on the left symbol, and “8” on the right symbol It is displayed. On the other hand, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and this is a variation display of the reach aspect, and "7" is displayed for both the left symbol and the right symbol. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and The second special symbol 231 indicates that it is changing, but "2" is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol change state display area 3I, and the second special symbol change state display area In the square mark displayed on 3J, "1" is displayed. This is because, as described above, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 31 are displayed. It shows that the display area of the decorative symbol 32 has been replaced (that is, the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed), and the state after shuffle execution is in effect.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the effect information display area 3 K in which the effect information 35 “in shuffle” is displayed is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, whereby the first decorative symbol 31 and the first decorative symbol 31 are displayed. 2 The display position of the decorative symbol 32 is changed, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are configured to be concealed, but by the shutter 40 described in the first embodiment. A movable effect may be made to appear on the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 so as to hide the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In addition, the shuffle effect is performed without concealing the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the player changes the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. It can also be made visible. In addition, even when the shuffle effect is performed, the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be prevented from being changed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (e), the variation display of the non-reach aspect of the second decorative symbol 32 in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is finished, and stop at the decorative symbol "678" (that is, in the lost aspect). Is displayed. On the other hand, the variation display of the reach aspect of the first decorative symbol 31 in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed with the decorative symbol "777" (ie, in the big hit aspect). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and It is shown that the second special symbol 231 is still fluctuating. Moreover, while "2" is continuously displayed in the square mark displayed on the 1st special symbol variation state display area 3I, "1" is displayed on the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J. "Is displayed continuously. This indicates that the same shuffled state is still maintained. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative pattern is not in the finalized display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but slightly displayed. It can also be configured to display as shaking (swing fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (f), the effect information display area 3K showing the effect information 35 consisting of characters "shuffled" is arranged again, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area Hide 3B together. Here, the shuffle effect is ended, and the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is returned to the original, but the shuffle effect is the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. Even when the display position is not changed, at this timing, the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 may be arranged. In addition, it is possible to control not to return the change of the display position in the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32.

  In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J are arranged in the effect information display area 3K before In the same manner as in the case where the black mark is displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the quadrangle mark displayed in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J, the black mark The display of “2” or “2” is stopped to indicate that the shuffle is being performed at this time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is erased, and the decorative symbol is displayed again in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. At this time, the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped and displayed with the symbol "777" of the first decorative symbol 31 (that is, in the big hit mode), and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is a symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 The display is stopped at "678" (ie, in the lost mode). The stop mode of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is such that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed immediately before in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In comparison, the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are just interchanged. In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. Although 221 and the second special symbol 231 indicate that the symbol is changing, “1” is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I, and the second special symbol variation state is displayed. In the square mark displayed in the display area 3J, "2" is displayed. This is because the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Here, the replacement due to the shuffle effect is returned to the original It is shown that.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3J changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol 231 has ended. . In addition, since "2" is displayed in this mark, it is understood that the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and it is determined by the display of this missing state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (c), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3I changes from black to white, indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol 221 is finished. In addition, since "1" is displayed in this mark, it is understood that the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and it is determined by the display of this big hit mode. In the present embodiment, the stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 continues until the corresponding special symbol is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when "777" aligned with each symbol is "7" is a decorative symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big deal confirmation, and "333" aligned with each symbol "3" In the case of a decorative pattern, it is determined 8R probability variation big hit or more, and in the case of a decorative pattern where 3 numbers are aligned other than the above, 4R is usually decided over big hit, but according to the stop indication of such decorative symbol The big hit aspect may be determined by another method without defining the aspect. In the present embodiment, since the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 are in the same form, it is not possible to know whether the position has been changed or not just by confirming the decorative symbol even if the position is changed. Although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 33 are different from each other, it may be possible to know whether or not the position has been changed simply by confirming the decorative symbol.

  In addition, here, when the decorative symbol "777" is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the decorative symbol "777" is stopped and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B in 15R probability variation big hit confirmation In the case where it is set to give different values depending on the display area stopped and displayed so as to be the 4R normal big hit decision, the entertainingness to the game by the player is set. Improve further. In addition, when the decorative symbol "777" is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A as well as the setting as described above, for example, the 8R probability variation big hit determination, the decorative pattern in the second decorative symbol display area 3B If "777" is displayed stopped, it can also be set to be a 15R probability variation big hit confirmation, and other various settings so that the same decorative pattern can be associated with different values depending on the display area displayed stopped. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, and then stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbols are respectively It stops at the time according to the fluctuation time specified by the effect data of the effect pattern determined about the decoration pattern. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Therefore, the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation of "7" of the left symbol, and "7" of the right symbol is stopped after 6 seconds of the start of fluctuation, and "7" of the central symbol is fluctuated Stop after 60 seconds from the start. On the other hand, for the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol "6" stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol "8" stops 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the middle symbol "7" changes After 50 seconds from the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, they stop 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the second decorative symbol display region 3B is used as the display region in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed under the predetermined condition. In order to change the display position of the decorative pattern to be displayed on the display area by changing the display area in which the pattern 32 is variably displayed to the first decorative pattern display area 3A, the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 It can be related. Further, as to whether or not the display position of the decorative symbol has been changed, the effect information display area 3K in which the effect information 35 of "during shuffle" is displayed is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, It is possible for the player to expect a big hit to occur until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed because the player is difficult to see or can not see it, which brings about a change in the game and makes it possible for the player to play the game. It leads to the improvement of interest. Furthermore, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize or not visually recognize whether the display positions of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have been changed, the first special symbol 221 is stopped and displayed. Regardless of this, it is possible to provide the player with a novel variation pattern of the symbol such that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the interest can be improved.

  FIG. 146 shows another modification in which the changing operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is controlled. First, as shown in FIG. 146 (a), with the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 being stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A and the second decorative symbol display region 3B, respectively, One first start storage is displayed in the first start storage display area 3C, and one second start storage is displayed in the second start storage display area 3D. Here, as shown in FIG. As shown, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start variable display based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D display the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage, which are subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. As a result, in this example, both the first starting memory and the second starting memory become zero, and as a result, they are not displayed. As in the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J are provided in the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 or the like. You may At this time, with regard to the first decorative symbol 31, referring to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table similar to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (a), the specific effect pattern is The effect data 2 corresponding to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one is determined, and for the second decorative symbol 32, the second decorative symbol similar to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 124 (b) It is assumed that the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 which is one of the specific effect patterns is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table.

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is respectively performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 146 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol are displayed. Effect information 35 including characters of “in shuffle” indicating that the shuffle of 32 is being performed is arranged in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the effect information display area 3K is configured as one area covering the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B Hide both.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (d), the effect information display area 3K indicating the effect information 35 is erased, and the decorative pattern after shuffle is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. Be done. The shuffle effect in this modification is different from the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145 in that the decorative symbols are individually repositioned. The decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the decorative symbol 36 on which the shuffle is performed, and in the non-reach mode variation display, "6" is displayed on the left symbol and "7" on the right symbol It is displayed. On the other hand, the decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the decorative symbol 37 on which the shuffle is performed, and in the non-reach mode variation display, "7" is displayed on the left symbol, and "4" is displayed on the right symbol. "Is done. Here, the shuffle state display 3 L in which the characters “shuffle execution” are displayed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. This is because at least a part of the symbols are replaced in the decorative symbols (36, 37) displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B currently displayed (ie, the decorative symbols The display position of has been changed), indicating that shuffle effect is being performed. That is, each of the decorative symbol 36 and the decorative symbol 37 is composed of a part of the first decorative symbol 31 and a part of the second decorative symbol 32.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (e), the variation display of the decorative symbol 36 in the first decorative symbol display area 3A in the non-reach mode ends, and stop display of the decorative symbol "657" (that is, in the lost mode) Be done. On the other hand, the variation display of the decorative symbol 37 in the non-reach mode in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is ended, and the stop display is performed with the decorative symbol "774" (that is, in the lost mode). At this time, the characters "shuffle execution" are continuously displayed in the shuffle state display 3L, which indicates that the shuffle effect is still continued. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative pattern is not in the determined display state, it is not completely stopped but is slightly shaken. It can also be configured to be displayed (swing fluctuation display).

  At this time, although not displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is a big hit aspect of "777", and the second decorative symbol 32 is a missing aspect of "654". In a situation in which the left symbol and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively replaced by the shuffle effect, and “657” of the decorative symbol 36 and “774” of the decorative symbol 37 are displayed. There shall be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), with the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B both stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol display The left symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 36 displayed in the area 3A and the left symbol "7" of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are switched. In addition, here, as shown in FIG. 146 (f), this symbol replacement was performed between the left symbol “6” of the decorative symbol 36 and the left symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 37 (replacement is performed It is also possible to display a bidirectional arrow 3M indicating that it is to be performed. At this time, the characters "shuffle execution" are continuously displayed in the shuffle state display 3L, which indicates that the shuffle effect is still continued. As described above, in the state where the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B are initially stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. The left symbols and the middle symbols were displayed in the state of being replaced, but by the replacement this time, it changes to the shuffle effect in which only the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are replaced. There is.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), with the decorative symbols (36, 37) of the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B being stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol display area 3A The middle symbol "5" of the decorative symbol 36 displayed on the screen is replaced with the middle symbol "7" of the decorative symbol 37 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In addition, here, as shown in FIG. 146 (g), this symbol replacement was performed between the middle symbol “7” of the decorative symbol 36 and the middle symbol “5” of the decorative symbol 37 (replacement is performed It is also possible to display a double arrow 3N indicating that it is to be performed. As shown in FIG. 146 (h), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in the state of the original stop display (i.e., the first decorative symbol 31 is a big hit of "777") by such symbol replacement. It is an aspect, and the 2nd decoration pattern 32 is returned to the lost form of "654", the 1st decoration pattern 31 is displayed on the 1st decoration symbol display area 3A, and the 2nd decoration pattern 32 is the 2nd decoration pattern display area Displayed on 3B, the shuffle effect ends. Then, in response to the end of the shuffle effect, the display of the shuffle state display 3L in which the characters "shuffle execution" are displayed is ended. In this state, the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are also in the stopped state determined. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, when the shuffle effect is finished, the effect information display area 3K representing the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffle in progress” is the liquid crystal display device 3 It is controlled not to appear on the display screen of.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, in shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, the position change is performed with respect to the individual decorative symbols, so After performing the corresponding display, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are returned to the original state, an effect such as actually being a big hit is performed, which brings about a change in the game, and the player It leads to the improvement of the interest to the game in

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150, the processing flow of the program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the fifth embodiment described above will be omitted unless otherwise specified. The processing flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the sixth embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. First, the process flow regarding control of the fluctuation | variation operation | movement of the 1st decorative pattern 31 and the 2nd decorative pattern 32 which were shown by FIG. 144 and FIG. 145 is demonstrated.

  The sub CPU 71 performs sub control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decorative symbol stop processing, effect pattern change processing, command analysis processing, stop symbol determination processing, decorative symbol forced stop processing, effect pattern determination processing Is configured to perform. The command analysis process is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main process. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative pattern forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates the values of the position determination random number counter as well as updating the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decorative symbol determination random number counter, etc.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process of the present embodiment is similar to the timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates (subtracts) the values set in the various timers stored in the work RAM 73, for example, the position changeable timer described later, the position change standby timer, the position change execution timer, etc., in the timer update process (S7022) ).

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs control to shuffle the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern change process (S7024). The effect pattern change processing will be described in detail later.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
The decorative symbol stopping process of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stopping process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Demonstration pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 147, as the first step of the effect pattern change processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change possible flag is on (S8041). If the position changeable flag is off (S8041: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8044 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is on (S8041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position changeable timer is 0 (S8042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8043), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S8041, it is determined whether the position change standby flag is on (S8044). If the position change standby flag is off (S8044: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8050 described later. On the other hand, if the position change standby flag is on (S8044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position change standby timer is 0 (S8045). If the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change standby timer is 0 (S8045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8046), turns on the position change execution flag (S8047), and specifies a period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 10s is set in the position changeable timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined to the specific effect pattern, and the position change wait timer waits for execution of the position change. A value corresponding to 2s is set, and here, a value corresponding to 30s is set to the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position changeable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50s.

  After step S8048, the sub CPU 71 sets decoration symbol position change data (S8049), and then ends the effect pattern change process. The decorative symbol position change data is data for performing effects from the start of position change to immediately before the end of position change. Based on this data, the display (shuffle effect) in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed, and the shuffle of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed. The shuffle information display area 3K on which the effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 consisting of the characters "shuffled" is arranged and the character "shuffle executed" is displayed is the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 Is displayed on.

  In the case of NO at step S8044, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is on (S8050). If the position change execution flag is off (S8050: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the position change execution flag is on (S8050: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051). If the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8051: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change execution timer is 0 (S8051: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the decoration symbol position change end data (S8052), turns off the position change execution flag (S8053), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative symbol position change end data is data for effecting until the end of the position change. By this data, the display in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is ended (end of shuffle effect), and it is returned to the fluctuation display and effect display of the decorative symbol based on the original effect data. Become.

  Thus, in the effect pattern change process, the first decoration is determined by determining the contents of the position changeable flag, the position changeable timer, the position change standby flag, the position change standby timer, the position change execution flag, and the position change execution timer. The shuffle effect of the pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 is controlled. The position changeable flag is set on when the specific effect pattern is determined for either the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determination process of FIG. 148 described later, and the position change is possible. When the specific effect pattern is determined for the other decorative symbol when the flag is on (that is, when the specific effect pattern is determined for both decorative symbols), the position changeable flag is turned off, Position change waiting flag is turned on. However, in this example, the position change waiting flag is controlled not to be turned on (the position change enable flag is turned off) when the determination timing of the specific effect pattern regarding both decorative symbols is separated by 10 seconds or more by the position changeable timer. Reset to

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the position change standby flag is set to ON, while monitoring that the position change standby timer (two seconds in this example) becomes 0, execution of shuffle effect is executed. stand by. In the effect pattern change process, when the position change standby timer becomes 0, the position change execution flag is set to ON, and shuffle effect of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started. The time of shuffle effect is managed by the position change execution timer (30 seconds in this example).

Command analysis processing
The command analysis process of this embodiment is the same as the command analysis process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 131 and 132. Here, in the special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069, S7071, S7079), the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol variation state display area 3I and the second one displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control is performed on the display of the special symbol variation state display area 3J. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol variation state display area corresponding to the display area in which the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3I, 3J), when the data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol fluctuation state is set and the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, it corresponds to the second special symbol In the special symbol variation state display area (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 to be displayed is displayed, data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, in the special symbol variation state display region (3I, 3J) corresponding to the display region in which the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, In the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, data is set to light the mark representing the special symbol fluctuation state, and the second special symbol fluctuation start command is received. In the corresponding special symbol variation state display area (3I, 3J), data for lighting a mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

[Stop symbol determination process]
The stop symbol determination process of this embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 148, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S8111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thus, the effect determination random number is a value randomly extracted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the received fluctuation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8112). The variation pattern specification command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 Are sent to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received variation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8112: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8117 described later. If the received variation pattern specification command is h0 to h8 (S8112: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decoration symbol effect pattern similar to the first decoration symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (a). With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern specification command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8113). Based on the effect data set in this manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Further, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted such that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S8114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S8115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4 and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 8116). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (for performing the shuffle effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be performed by the specific effect pattern Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8116: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8121 described later.

  In step S8117, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decoration symbol presentation pattern determination table similar to the second decoration symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Setting effect data determined based on the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this manner, variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Also, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted so that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S8118). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the second decorative symbol variation timer (S8119).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is one of the effect data 22 and the effect data 24 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (for performing the shuffle effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be performed by the specific effect pattern Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If it is effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S8120: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8121 described later.

  In the case of YES at step S8116 or YES at step S8120, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position changeable flag is on (S8121). If the position changeable flag is on (S 8121: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 8124 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is off (S8121: NO), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag on (S8122), sets a predetermined value to the position changeable timer (S8123), and then effects End the pattern determination process. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this manner, when the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the position changeable timer, position change display is performed. In this example, although the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  If YES in step S8121, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag off (S8124), clears the position changeable timer (S8125), sets the position change standby flag on (S8126), and changes the position A predetermined value is set to the standby timer (S8127), and then the effect pattern determination process is ended. Here, by setting the position change standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the position change standby timer, the position change display is in the standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change standby flag is on is determined in step S8044 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 147 described above, where it is determined that the position change standby flag is on and the position change is performed in step S8045. When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, although the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, the present invention is not limited to this. In this example, when both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to perform the effect by the specific effect pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle effect is performed). Even if the above conditions are satisfied, control can be performed so as not to change the position of the decorative symbol according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 143, 149 and 150, a program executed by sub CPU 71 for another modification relating to the variation operation of first decorative symbol 31 and second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIG. 146. The process flow of will be described. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decorative symbol determination random number counter, etc. in the random number update process (S7002), and also the position determination random number counter and the position change lottery random number Update the value of the counter.

[Demonstration pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 149, as the first step of the effect pattern change processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the position change possible flag is on (S8131). If the position changeable flag is off (S8131: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8134 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is on (S8131: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132). If the position changeable timer is not 0 (S8132: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position changeable timer is 0 (S8132: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position changeable flag (S8133), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S8131, it is determined whether the position change standby flag is on (S8134). If the position change standby flag is off (S8134: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8143 described later. On the other hand, if the position change standby flag is on (S8134: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135). If the position change standby timer is not 0 (S8135: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change standby timer is 0 (S8135: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the position change standby flag (S8136), turns on the position change execution flag (S8137), and designates a period for maintaining the position change state. A predetermined value is set in the position change execution timer (S8138). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the position change execution timer is a value corresponding to 30 s. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 10s is set in the position changeable timer that defines the grace period until the other decorative symbol is determined to the specific effect pattern, and the position change wait timer waits for execution of the position change. A value corresponding to 2s is set, and here, a value corresponding to 30s is set to the position change execution timer. Then, since the shortest fluctuation time in the specific effect pattern is 50s of the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the position changeable timer, the position change standby timer, and the position change execution timer is The fluctuation time does not exceed 50s.

  After step S8138, the sub CPU 71 performs decorative symbol change position determination processing (S8139), and as a result of the decorative symbol change position determination processing, determines whether the stop pattern of the decorative symbol after change is a big hit (S8140) ). If the stop mode is a big hit (S8140: YES), the process returns to step S8139, and the decorative symbol change position determination process is performed again. In the decorative symbol change position determination processing, a position determination random number is extracted from the position determination random number counter. The value of the position determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodical timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Next, the decorative symbol change position determination process refers to the decorative symbol change position determination table shown in FIG. 143, and based on the extracted position determination random number, the corresponding change position (pattern to be changed position) Are determined, and position change data for performing the position change is determined. Also, if the stop pattern of the decorative symbol after the change is a big hit, if such a decorative symbol is displayed as it is, the player misunderstands that it is a big hit despite being not a big hit, and confusion is caused. The above-mentioned decorative symbol change position determination process is repeated until it is determined that the stop pattern of the decorative symbol is not a big hit.

  When the stop mode of the decorative symbol after change is not a big hit (S8140: NO), the position change data of the determined decorative symbol change position determination table is set (S8141). For example, in the decorative symbol change position determination table of this example, when only the left symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be repositioned (replaced), the position change data 2 is If it is set and it is determined that only the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are to be repositioned (replaced), the position change data 6 is set. After step S8141, the sub CPU 71 sets decoration symbol position change data (S8142), and then ends the effect pattern change process. The decorative symbol position change data is data for performing effects from the start of position change to immediately before the end of position change. With this data, the position change (shuffle effect) of the symbol is performed for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 based on the position change data of the determined decorative symbol change position determination table, and the first decorative symbol The effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 consisting of characters "shuffled" indicating that 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being shuffled is arranged, and the characters "shuffle executed" are displayed. The shuffle state display 3 L being displayed is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 3.

  If NO in step S8134, it is determined whether the position change execution flag is on (S8143). If the position change execution flag is off (S8143: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the position change execution flag is on (S8143: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144). If the position change execution timer is not 0 (S8144: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the position change execution timer is 0 (S8144: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the decoration symbol position change end data (S8145), turns off the position change execution flag (S8146), and ends the effect pattern change processing. The decorative symbol position change end data is data for effecting until the end of the position change. By this data, the display in the position change state of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is ended (end of shuffle effect), and it is returned to the fluctuation display and effect display of the decorative symbol based on the original effect data. Become.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 150, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S8151). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thus, the effect determination random number is a value randomly extracted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8152). The variation pattern specification command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 Are sent to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S8152: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8157 described later. If the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S8152: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines the first decoration symbol effect pattern similar to the first decoration symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 125 (a). With reference to the table, the effect data determined based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S8153). Based on the effect data set in this manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Further, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted such that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S8154). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set rendering data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S8155).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4 and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 8156). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (for performing the shuffle effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be performed by the specific effect pattern Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S 8156: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 8156: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S 8161 described later.

  In step S8157, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decoration symbol presentation pattern determination table similar to the second decoration symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined on the basis of is set in the work RAM 73 (S8157). Based on the effect data set in this manner, variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Also, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted so that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S8158). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (fluctuation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decorative symbol fluctuation timer (S8159).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is either the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific effect pattern or the effect data 24 (S8160). In this example, as a condition for changing the position of the decorative symbol (for performing the shuffle effect), both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be performed by the specific effect pattern Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S8160: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S8160: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8161 described later.

  If YES in step S8156 or YES in step S8160, it is determined whether the position change possible flag is on (S8161). If the position changeable flag is on (S8161: YES), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S8166 described later. On the other hand, if the position changeable flag is off (S8161: NO), the sub CPU 71 performs position change lottery processing (S8162). The position change lottery process extracts a position change lottery random number from the position change lottery random number counter. The value of the position change lottery random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodical timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Next, in the position change lottery process, it is determined whether or not the extracted random number for position change lottery has a predetermined value. In this example, the probability of winning (the probability of being a predetermined value) is set to 1/2. Further, the position change lottery process may be performed based on the position change lottery random number with reference to a predetermined lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the player has won in the position change lottery process (S8163). If the player has not won (S8163: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the player has won (S8163: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag on (S8164), sets a predetermined value in the position changeable timer (S8165), and then ends the effect pattern determination process. Do. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 10 s. By setting in this manner, when the effect pattern of the other decorative symbol is determined as the specific effect pattern within 10 s after setting the position changeable timer, position change display is performed. In this example, although the predetermined value is set to a value corresponding to 10 s, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set.

  If YES in step S8161, the sub CPU 71 sets the position changeable flag off (S8166), clears the position changeable timer (S8167), sets the position change standby flag on (S8168), and changes the position A predetermined value is set in the standby timer (S8169), and then the effect pattern determination process is ended. Here, by setting the position change standby flag to ON and setting a predetermined value in the position change standby timer, the position change display is in the standby state for the time set in the position change standby timer. Whether or not the position change standby flag is on is determined in step S8134 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 149 above, where it is determined that the position change standby flag is on and the position change is performed in step S8135 When the standby timer is determined to be 0, the position change display is started. In this example, although the predetermined value set in the position change standby timer is a value corresponding to 2 s, the present invention is not limited to this. In this example, when both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to perform the effect by the specific effect pattern, the position of the decorative symbol is changed (that is, the shuffle effect is performed). Even if the above conditions are satisfied, control can be performed so as not to change the position of the decorative symbol according to another predetermined condition.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modification of the liquid crystal display device and a modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. . In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned above etc. or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Liquid crystal display device]
FIG. 151 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 151, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is disposed with the upper position of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. On the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed under predetermined conditions. In addition to displaying the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 on the liquid crystal display device 3, effect information 35 consisting of the characters "shuffled" is displayed in the effect information display area 3K.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (a), first, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are being variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. At this time, the first decorative symbol 31 and the When the specific effect pattern is determined for both of the two decorative symbols 32, as shown in FIG. 151 (b), the effect information display area 3K displaying the effect information 35 consisting of the characters "shuffled" is arranged. Since the effect information display area 3K is arranged to cover the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, as a result, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not displayed. Become. Moreover, when the 3rd decoration symbol 33 is displayed in this way, it can also be controlled so that the 1st decoration symbol 31 and the 2nd decoration symbol 32 are not displayed.

  As a result, although the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are fluctuating on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the fluctuating display can not be confirmed, but instead, the sub liquid crystal The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the display device 3 '. As described above, during the shuffle effect, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 whose positions are not changed are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '.

  In the state where the effect information display area 3K is arranged on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 during the variable display are displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (c), when the effect information display area 3K is erased, the decorative symbol whose position has been changed is the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. While being variably displayed in the decorative symbol display area 3B, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. That is, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the left symbol "7" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. Is displayed. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the left symbol "6" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed, which is a non-reach display. In addition, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the first decorative symbol 31 is displayed on the upper side, and the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed on the lower side.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbols whose positions are changed as described above are the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The stop display is displayed, the decoration symbol "657" of the second decoration symbol 32 is displayed in the first decoration symbol display area 3A, and the decoration symbol "777" of the first decoration symbol 31 which is a big hit display in the second decoration symbol display area 3B. Is displayed. At this time, two special symbols are variably displayed. Further, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', a first decorative symbol 31 and a second decorative symbol 32 are displayed. Also, at this time, until the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol ends, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ' It is not in the state of being completely stopped and displayed, but it is made to be displayed with shaking little by little (swing fluctuation display) so that the timing of the stop display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol matches the timing of the stop display You may

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the top of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 151 (e). Therefore, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. 151 (f), in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the second decorative symbol display area 3B is The first decorative symbol 31 being displayed is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and the second decorative symbol 32 which has been displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'are erased while the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is moved to the original position. In this manner, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved to the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 so that the display contents of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' are displayed. By moving, it can appear as if the position change display has ended.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is located below the top of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It may be controlled to arrange at least a part of 3 '. In addition, after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is the liquid crystal display only when the player operates the operation button or the like. If the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation button or the like, it looks as if the decorative symbol has been transferred from the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'to the liquid crystal display device 3 as described above. You may not make an effect.

  Even after the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the corresponding first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are not displayed until stopped. While the finalized display state is maintained, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are displayed, for example, in the state of the fluctuation variation display. Thereafter, when the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3.

  As described above, according to the modification of the present embodiment, even if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 whose positions have been changed are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, The player may grasp the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 before the position change by the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. The shuffle effect with the addition of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'eliminates the monotony of the game, and as a result, improves the interest to the game.

  Also, here, as in the example shown in FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J in the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 etc. May be provided.

  In addition, in the sub liquid crystal display device, only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol holding number, a special symbol holding number, etc. may be displayed. Thereby, the space for displaying another effect image of the decorative symbol on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device can be secured more widely. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in the oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship in which the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are combined.

  FIG. 152 shows a modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 as shown in FIG. 152 (b) when the decorative symbol 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific aspect (in this example, "123") which is not a big hit aspect The position change display (shuffle effect) is performed, and the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be the specific effect pattern, and shuffle effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 153 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is being performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the liquid crystal display device A message 34 prompting a button operation (for example, a text message such as “Button pushed !!”) is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 3 and the player operates the operation button here, as shown in FIG. 153 (b). Position change display (shuffle effect) of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed as shown in, and the effect information 35 composed of the characters “in shuffle” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K .

  FIG. 154 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 3 with the decorative symbol "113", a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, a text message such as "Stop with the same symbol !!") Is displayed. Here, as a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 is the same as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 being stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol (for example, "113"), a message indicating that the command has been achieved on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 154 (b) 34 (for example, a text message such as "achievement!") Is displayed. Here, although both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, in this case, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the position change of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 The display (shuffle effect) is performed, and the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation button or the like, and such an operation It may be determined by other conditions regardless. When determining based on the said other conditions, it can also be determined irrespective of whether the player operated the operation button, and whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with the operation button itself.

  FIG. 155 shows another modification of the position change display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. As shown in FIG. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the decorative symbol "113" being displayed stop, a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, "draw the lever and stop displaying the A symbol !! Text message such as Here, as a result of the player operating the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, when the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the symbol “A”, FIG. As shown in b), on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achievement !!”) is displayed. Here, although both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, in this case, as shown in FIG. 155 (c), the position change of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 The display (shuffle effect) is performed, and the effect information 35 composed of the characters “shuffled” is displayed in the effect information display area 3K. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is to be stopped and displayed with the symbol "A" may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and such a relationship is related to such operation. Alternatively, it may be determined by other conditions. In the case of determining based on the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether the player operates the lever, or whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself or the like.

  In addition, in the modification shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 151-FIG. 155, when the 1st decorative symbol 31 and the 2nd decorative symbol 32 are position-changed and displayed, the period of the position change display can be prescribed by various methods. . For example, it may be across variations of a plurality of special symbols, or until the variation of either one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is over, or even if a big hit game is executed Alternatively, the predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the change start of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the change start of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. In response to the fact that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying the conditions are determined to be the specific effect pattern, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are changed in position. (Shuffle effect), but various other conditions can be adopted as a trigger for such position change display. For example, if a predetermined lottery (random number lottery or the like) is performed and if this lottery is won, one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) In the case of the variable effect), when the big hit information is included in the start memory regarding the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable display is not started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various timings can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (probability or small hit) after the end of both variable display. In addition, as the timing when the decorative symbol changes position, for example, when the decorative symbol is changing and displaying at the same time, when one decorative symbol is changing and displaying, or when both decoration symbols are stopping and displaying, etc. Various timings can be considered.

  In addition, based on the fact that one trigger for the position change display described above is established, the shuffle effect can be controlled to be repeatedly performed a plurality of times. Also, a decorative symbol corresponding to a normal symbol may be provided, and the position of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol may be changed. In addition, in the state where the position change display is performed, when the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, it may be prevented from returning to the original state (the shuffle effect is not ended). Furthermore, a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3I indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stop displayed, and a second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 The second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3J indicating whether the special symbol 231 is displayed being changed or stopped may be displayed as a variable display state regarding the decorative symbol, and these special symbol fluctuation state displays It is also possible not to provide the regions (3I, 3J).

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a seventh embodiment) suitable for the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Table for determining the big hit, table for determining the big hit symbol]
In the seventh embodiment, since the same table as the big hit determination table and the big hit symbol determination table in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 80 is used, detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61. The jackpot determination table detects that the gaming ball has won in either one of the first starting opening 14A and the second starting opening 14B in the first starting opening ball sensor 141 and the second starting opening ball sensor 142. It is referred to when performing the big hit lottery by a special symbol based on the random number for big hit judgment on the occasion of a thing. The jackpot symbol determination table extracts the jackpot symbol determination random number according to the judgment result of the jackpot type, and determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the extracted jackpot symbol determination random number Is referred to when

[Table for decorative design determination]
In the seventh embodiment, since the same table as the decorative symbol determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72. As the decorative symbol determination table, different tables are used according to the determination result of the big hit type. For example, in the case where the determination result of the big hit type is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, 4R normal big hit, and loss, a decorative symbol determination table according to each determination result is used. In this example, the same decorative symbol determination table is used for the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, another decorative symbol determination table is used for each decorative symbol. May be

  In the seventh embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, based on the random number for decorative symbol determination extracted from the random number counter for decorative symbol determination updated by the random number update processing of the sub control circuit main processing, the corresponding decorative symbol is The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined with reference to the determination table. Moreover, in this example, the random number for decorative symbol determination can take any value among 900 pieces of 0-899. In the seventh embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 described above are each composed of three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, which represent numbers.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the 15R certain variation big hit, the probability that "777" is determined as a decorative symbol is high, and then the probability that "333" is determined as a decorative symbol is high. ing. Here, in the case of a 15R probability variation big hit, when a decorative symbol other than "777" is determined, after the display of the decorative symbol is stopped (period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, big hit etc.) It is informed that it is 15R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, the probability that "333" is determined as the decorative symbol is high, and the decorative symbol of "777" is set so as not to be selected. Here, in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit, when the decorative design other than "333" is determined, after the display stop of the decorative design (period from the display stop of the decorative design to the start of big hit, big hit etc.), It is informed that it is 8R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 4R probability variation big hit, the probability that the symbols ("111", "555", "999") composed of odd numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is set high (where "333", The decorative pattern of "777" is set not to be selected). Here, after the display stop of the determined decorative symbol (the period from the display stop of the decorative symbol to the start of the big hit, the big hit, etc.), it is notified that it is a 4R probability variation big hit. In the case of the 4R regular big hit, the probability that the symbols ("222", "444", "666", "888") configured with even numbers are determined as the decorative symbols is high, and "333" and "777" "" Is set so as not to be selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the numbers from "0" to "9" are respectively determined as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and the decorative symbols are configured by these three symbols. According to the contents of the decoration symbol determination table as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 121, when “777” aligned with each symbol is “7” is a decoration symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big hit decision, and each symbol is “ When "333" aligned in 3 "is a decorative pattern, it is determined that 8R probability variation big hit or more, and in the case of a decorative pattern in which three numbers are aligned other than the above, it is 4R normal big hit or more. Here, the reason why the 8R probability variation big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a probability variation big hit (that is, 15R probability variation big hit) having a larger number of rounds than 8R. Similarly, the reason why the 4R normal big hit or more is decided is because it may be promoted to a 15 R positive big hit, an 8 R positive big hit, or a 4 R positive big hit.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
In the seventh embodiment, since a table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table used in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 123 is used, the detailed description of these tables is omitted. Data on these tables are stored in the main ROM 61. The special symbol variation pattern determination table is a variation pattern and variation time for the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 based on the random number for variation time determination, triggered by the determination result of the jackpot type being obtained. And is referred to when determining various fluctuation conditions such as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The random number for fluctuation time determination used for lottery of fluctuation conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In this example, a different table is used for each special symbol, but the same table is used even if the gaming state is different. However, here, different tables may be used for each gaming state.

  In addition, data indicating a variation pattern related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 determined using such a special symbol variation pattern determination table, and a variation pattern designation command are predetermined of the main RAM 62. It is stored in the area. Data indicating the variation pattern stored in the main RAM 62 is supplied to the first special symbol display device 22 and the second special symbol display device 23. The variation pattern designation command stored in the main RAM 62 is transmitted to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71).

  In addition, although the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 123 is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the determination result of the big hit type by the special symbol, the big hit type by the special symbol corresponding to each gaming state The variation pattern may be determined based on the determination result of In addition, only one table may be provided as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, and the variation pattern may be determined without distinguishing the special symbol or the game state. Alternatively, a special symbol variation pattern determination table dedicated to the probability variation gaming state may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the table for the same special symbol variation pattern determination may be referred, regardless of the number of starting memory which concerns on the 1st special symbol 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231. Not limited to the above, a different special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to depending on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231. In such a case, it is preferable to select a special symbol variation pattern determination table in which a short variation time can be easily determined as the number of starting memories increases. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination table when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol 221 is determined based on the number of starting memories related to the second special symbol 231, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol 231 The special symbol variation pattern determination table at the time of determination may be determined based on the number of start memories related to the first special symbol 221.

  Also, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are associated in the special symbol variation pattern determination table according to the determination result of the specific big hit type, but as the special symbol variation pattern determination table, the big hit type One variation pattern may be associated with each other according to the determination result.

[Table for deciding on decorative design effect pattern]
FIG. 156 shows a table for determining a decorative symbol presentation pattern used in the seventh embodiment. Fig. 156 (a) shows a table for determining a first decorative symbol presentation pattern corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31, and Fig. 156 (b) shows a second decorative symbol presentation pattern determination corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32. It shows a table. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) is the first decoration based on the effect determination random number triggered by the reception of the variation pattern designation command supplied from the main CPU 60. It is referred to when determining the rendering condition such as the rendering content (hereinafter, also referred to as “rendering pattern”) for the symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 and the rendering data corresponding thereto. The effect determination random number used for lottery of effect conditions is 100 of 0 to 99. In the table for determining the decorative pattern effect pattern shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the time (variation time) in which the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 are variably displayed is also defined. However, this variation time is also the time when other effects linked to the variation display of the decorative symbol are executed. The fluctuation time is transmitted from the main CPU 60 together with the fluctuation pattern designation command. That is, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a), when "h0" is received as the variation pattern designation command for the first decorative symbol 31, the variation time is set to 60 s, and the effect determination random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted Then, the jackpot fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and while the corresponding effect data 1 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determination random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the effect content is As specific big hit fluctuation production 1 is decided as, the corresponding production data 2 is set to work RAM73. When “h1” is received as a variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “97” are extracted, the big hit variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, While the corresponding effect data 3 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "98" to "99" are extracted, the specific big hit variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 4 Is set in the work RAM 73. When "h2" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 5 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h3" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 6 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h4" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 7 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h5" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 100 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 6 is determined as the effect content, When the corresponding effect data 8 is set in the work RAM 73, and the effect determining random numbers "90" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 7 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 9 is It is set in the work RAM 73. When "h6" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 20 seconds, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 10 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h7" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 60 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the loss variation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and The corresponding effect data 11 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h8" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is 100 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "89" are extracted, reach loss variation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 12 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers "90" to "98" are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 2 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 13 is the work RAM 73. When the effect determination random number "99" is extracted, the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 14 is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (b), when “h9” is received as a variation pattern designation command for the second decorative symbol 32, the variation time is set to 50 s, and the effect determination random numbers “0” to “99” are extracted Then, the jackpot variation effect 8 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 15 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h10" is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the jackpot fluctuation effect 9 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 16 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h11" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the random numbers for effect determination "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 10 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 17 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h12" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers "0" to "99" are extracted, the big hit variation effect 11 is determined as the effect content, The corresponding effect data 18 is set in the work RAM 73. When "h13" is received as the variation pattern specification command, the variation time is set to 10 s, and when the effect determining random numbers "0" to "49" are extracted, loss variation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 19 is set in the work RAM 73, when the effect determining random numbers "50" to "99" are extracted, the lost change effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 20 is It is set in the work RAM 73. When “h14” is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is set to 50 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “94” are extracted, reach loss fluctuation effect 3 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 21 is set in the work RAM 73 and the effect determination random numbers “95” to “99” are extracted, the specific loss change effect 1 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 22 Is set in the work RAM 73. When “h15” is received as the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time is 90 s, and when the effect determination random numbers “0” to “90” are extracted, reach loss fluctuation effect 4 is determined as the effect content, and When the corresponding effect data 23 is set in the work RAM 73, and the effect determining random numbers "91" to "99" are extracted, the reach loss fluctuation effect 5 is determined as the effect content, and the corresponding effect data 24 is It is set in the work RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 and the specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 are specified as a specific effect pattern for the first decorative symbol 31, and the specific loss fluctuation effect 1 is specified for the second decorative symbol 32. The first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 31 are defined when the specific effect pattern is executed with the first decorative symbol 31 within a predetermined period after the specific effect pattern is executed with the second decorative symbol 32 and defined as the effect pattern. Relevant rendition (additional display rendition of a decorative symbol) is performed with the decorative symbol 32. In this example, although the specific big hit variation effect is not provided in the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 156 (b), like the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table of FIG. 156 (a). , One or more specific jackpot variation effects can be provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, when both of the two decorative symbols 31 and 32 corresponding to the two special symbols 221 and 231 are determined as the specific effect pattern, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. Although the mechanism is provided, for example, one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is made to correspond to one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the normal symbol is used for the other decorative symbol. By making it correspond, it is good also as a mechanism which performs the additional display production of a decorative symbol based on the relationship between a special symbol and a normal symbol.

[Table for determining additional display area]
FIG. 157 shows the additional display area determination table used in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 157 (a) shows a table for determining a big hit additional display area to be referred to when the judgment result of the big hit type is a big hit, and FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the judgment result of the big hit type is lost. The table for determining the additional display area at the time of loss to be referred to is shown. Data on these tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The additional display area determination table shown in FIGS. 157 (a) and 157 (b) is a decorative pattern for the first decorative pattern 31 and the second decorative pattern 32 in the effect pattern determination process described later, which is executed by the sub CPU 71. Reference is made when determining corresponding additional display area determination data based on the display area addition pattern and the additional display area determination random number when the combination (display area addition pattern) is a predetermined combination. It is. The additional display area determination data defines the mode of the change of the first decorative symbol 31 and the additional display of the decorative symbol, and the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is a line based on the determined additional display area determination data. It will be. The random numbers for determining the additional display area are three 0 to 2. In addition, the aspect of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol by the display area additional pattern and the data for additional display area determination will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 1, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as corresponding additional display area determination data. When display area determination data 1-1 is determined and the additional display area determination data is set in work RAM 73, while the additional display area determination random number “2” is extracted, the corresponding additional display area is determined. The additional display area determination data 1-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 2, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the addition is performed. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 2-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 3, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 3-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, and the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determining data 3- 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 4, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 4-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 4-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 5, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 5-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 5-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), when the display area addition pattern is pattern 6, when the additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, they are added as corresponding additional display area determination data. When display area determination data 6-1 is determined and the additional display area determination data is set in work RAM 73, while the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the corresponding additional display area is determined. The additional display area determination data 6-2 is determined as data, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 7, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 7-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 7-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 8, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 8-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, and the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determining data is selected as the corresponding additional display area determining data. 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 9, when additional display area determination random numbers “0” to “1” are extracted, additional display area determination data 9-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determining data is set in the work RAM 73, and the additional display area determining random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determining data 9- corresponds to the corresponding additional display area determining data. 2 is determined, and the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 10, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 10-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 10-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73. When the display area addition pattern is pattern 11, when the additional display area determination random number "0" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-1 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data, and the additional display area determination data 11-1 is added. When the display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "1" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-2 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. When the additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73 and the additional display area determination random number "2" is extracted, the additional display area determination data 11-3 is determined as the corresponding additional display area determination data. The additional display area determination data is set in the work RAM 73.

[The premise of additional display effects]
Next, the premise of the additional display effect performed in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 (a) shows a basic display pattern of a decorative symbol, and FIG. 158 (b) shows a decorative symbol display area for explaining the premise of the additional display effect in the present embodiment, FIG. 158 (c) shows a modification of the additional display effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 158 (d) shows another modification of the additional display effect in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (a), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31, and the second decorative symbol 32. A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display is provided. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is disposed on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is disposed below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. When the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 composed of predetermined combinations of symbols is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, respectively, a big hit is made Become.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (b), in addition to the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B shown in FIG. 158 (a), the second decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. An additional display area 3P is arranged below the display area 3B. A decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P, but in this example, the decorative symbol 38 is composed of three symbols (third decorative symbol 33) of a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. However, it is not necessary to display all the symbols, and for example, it may be configured only by the left symbol, or may be configured by the middle symbol and the right symbol. Furthermore, display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 shown in FIG. 158 (b) correspond to display line 1 to display line 5, respectively, and at least one of them may be configured as a third decorative symbol display area 3Q. . And each of these 3rd decoration design display territory 3Q, the design of at least one copy of the 1st decoration design 31, the design of at least one copy of the 2nd decoration design 32, and (the 1st decoration design 31 and the 2nd decoration It is comprised by one or several 3rd decoration pattern 33 displayed on the additional display area 3P different from the pattern 32. FIG. For example, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1 corresponding to the display line 1 is a display area extending vertically on the left side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first display displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the decorative symbol 31, the left symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display region 3Q-2 corresponding to the display line 2 is a display region extending vertically at the center of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A 31 middle symbol, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) are displayed Ru. The third decorative symbol display region 3Q-3 corresponding to the display line 3 is a display region extending vertically on the right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the first decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A. 31 right symbol, the right symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third decorative symbol 33 (right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P) are displayed Ru. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4 corresponding to the display line 4 is a display area extending obliquely from the upper left side to the lower right side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 (the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P Is displayed. The third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 corresponding to the display line 5 is a display area extending diagonally from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 3, and is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the third symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P Is displayed. In FIG. 158 (b), although the respective symbols of the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32 and the third decorative symbol 33 are indicated by the down arrows representing variable display, they are stopped and displayed. In the case, for example, it is displayed as one of the numbers “0” to “9”. In the optional third decorative symbol display area 3Q, the third decorative symbol 33 has the same number as the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32, or the first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third symbol 3 All designs of 3 decoration designs 33 may become the same number (for example, in the 3rd decoration design display area 3Q-4, the left design of the 1st decoration design 31 is "7", the 2nd decoration design There may be a situation where the middle symbol of 32 is "7" and the right symbol of the third decorative symbol 33 is "7".

  When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed, and when three decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q are displayed in the predetermined combination mode, a big hit occurs. . In this example, each of the third decorative symbol display areas 3Q-1 to 3Q-5 is a display area corresponding to the straight display lines 1 to 5, but is formed by display lines of other shapes. May be For example, display lines of various shapes such as V-shape, Z-shape and L-shape can be set. Further, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, it is possible to include two or more symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 (the same applies to the second decorative symbol 32 and the decorative symbol 38).

  In addition, on the premise of the additional display effect in the present embodiment, basically, the same display area as the additional display area 3P such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6 is set, and the respective symbols are stopped and displayed there. Although it is not comprised so that an aspect like this may be taken, it is also possible to set it as such a configuration. In this case, for example, a big hit is decided by stopping display of a predetermined decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol display region other than the third decorative symbol display region 3Q-6, but the third decorative symbol display region 3Q- Depending on the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed at 6, the jackpot benefit may be changed. As an example of the benefit to be given, there are the presence or absence of a definite change, the presence or absence of time saving, the size of the number of rounds, and the like. For example, if all the decorative symbols displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-6 are "7", it is considered as a probability variation big hit, and if all "4", a difference is given to the profit to be granted as a normal big hit Can.

  As shown in FIG. 158C, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the additional display area 3P are disposed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In addition, it is possible to provide a partition or a space or a display for partitioning between the display areas and between the respective symbols in the display area. In the present embodiment, as described later, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, the symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 and the symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, and this is a reach aspect (reach indication aspect) If so, the third decorative symbol (decorative symbol 38) is controlled to be displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. Therefore, in the additional display area 3P, when there is one third decorative symbol 33 to be displayed, one of “0” to “9” is displayed in one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, Others are not displayed. Further, when there are two third decorative symbols 33 to be displayed, one of “0” to “9” is displayed on two of the left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol, and the other is not displayed. However, even in such a case, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), all symbols (ie, left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are displayed on the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P. May be

  As shown in FIG. 158 (d), before the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B are stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P may be stopped and displayed first to notify that the first decorative symbol 31 or the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode.

[Additional display effect of decorative pattern]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, according to the determination result of the jackpot type, the display area addition patterns 1 to 11 and the random number for additional display area determination, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed in any manner. Decide what to do. Here, with reference to FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, it will be described in what manner the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed in each case. In the additional display effect in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changed, and the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P is added and displayed.

  FIG. 159 shows additional display effects of the decorative symbol when the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit. In the display area additional pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A becomes a big hit form in which three patterns (“●”) are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol ("●") as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol, and in the middle symbol, the left symbol In the right symbol, it is a symbol ("A") different from a symbol, and the case where it is a loss aspect which is a symbol ("B") different from a left symbol and a middle symbol is shown. In this embodiment, the numerals “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, in FIG. 159, for the sake of convenience, “●”, “★”, “A “,” “B” symbols are used, and it is assumed that the same symbol represents the same arbitrary number, and the numerals represented by different symbols are different from each other. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 1, data for additional display area determination 1-by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 1-2. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-1 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “●” is displayed on the left pattern of the 3P decorative pattern 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-1, the display of the big hit form will be made. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 1-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (a), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “●” is displayed on the left pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-1, the display of the big hit form will be made.

  In the display area additional pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A becomes a big hit form in which three patterns (“●”) are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol ("●") as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol, and in the left symbol, In the right symbol, it is a symbol ("A") different from a symbol, and the case where it is a loss aspect which is a symbol ("B") different from a left symbol and a middle symbol is shown. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display region addition pattern 2, additional display region determination data 2- by lottery based on the additional display region determination random number. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 2-2 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 2-3. Be done. The additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" as shown in FIG. 159 (b), and the additional display area “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern 38 of 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the display of the big hit aspect will be made. In this example, by displaying two “●” on the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P, two or more display lines serving as a display of the big hit mode exist in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. However, in such a case, it is possible to display only one “●” and display a symbol different from “●” for the other “●”. Moreover, you may determine by lottery about which symbol "-" is displayed. The display method of “●” is the same for all the display area addition patterns at the time of the subsequent big hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and additionally “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the display of the big hit aspect will be made. Furthermore, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 2-3 changes the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" as shown in FIG. 159 (b), and additionally “●” is displayed on the middle pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, the display of the big hit aspect will be made.

  In the display area additional pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A becomes a big hit form in which three patterns (“●”) are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol, and in the left symbol, the right It is a symbol ("A") different from the symbol, and in the middle symbol, it shows the case where it is a lost form which is a symbol ("B") different from both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 3, data for additional display area determination 3- 3 by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 3-2. As the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-1, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “●” is displayed on the right symbol of the 3D decorative symbol 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-3, the display of the big hit will be made. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 3-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “●” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-3, the display of the big hit will be made.

  In the display area additional pattern 4, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A is a big hit form in which three patterns (“●”) are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol (“●”) as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol and the middle symbol, and the right symbol In the case of the lost form which is a symbol ("A") different from the left symbol and the middle symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 4, additional display area determination data 4- by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 4-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 4-3. Be done. The additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “●” to “★” as shown in FIG. “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern 38 of 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the display of the big hit aspect will be made. In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and additionally “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-1, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the display of the big hit mode is performed. Furthermore, as the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 4-3, as shown in FIG. 159 (d), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-1 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, the display of the big hit aspect will be made.

  In the display area additional pattern 5, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the first decorative pattern 31 displayed in the first decorative pattern display area 3A becomes a big hit form in which three patterns ("●") are aligned. And the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the same symbol ("●") as the symbol aligned with the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol In the case of the lost form which is a symbol ("A") different from the middle symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 5, additional display area determination data 5-5 by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 5-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 5-3. Be done. The additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-1 changes the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" as shown in FIG. 159 (e), and the additional display area “●” is displayed on the middle design and the right design of the decorative design 38 of 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, the display of the big hit aspect will be made. In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-2, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and additionally “●” is displayed on the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-3, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the display of the big hit mode is performed. Furthermore, as the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 5-3, as shown in FIG. 159 (e), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “●” is displayed on the middle pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, and before the display of the big hit aspect is finally displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the third decoration In the symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, the display of the big hit aspect will be made.

  FIG. 160 shows the additional display effect of the decorative symbol in the case where the determination result of the jackpot type is lost. In the display area additional pattern 6, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol, while the middle symbol is the lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”). And the same symbol as the right symbol ("●"), and in the middle symbol, it is the symbol ("A") different from the left symbol, and in the right symbol, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 It shows the case where it is a lost form which is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In this embodiment, the numerals “0” to “9” are displayed as the symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. However, in FIG. 160, “●”, “★”, “▲ "," "A", "B" symbols are used, where the same symbols represent the same arbitrary numbers, and the different symbols represent different numbers. Also, the symbol “◇” represents an arbitrary number other than “●”, and the symbol “□” represents an arbitrary number other than “▲”. In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 6, the additional display area determination data 6 by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 6-2. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "か ら" to "★" and the additional display area “◇” is displayed on the left pattern of the 3P decorative pattern 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and the third decorative symbol 33 (left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 may not be changed from "▲" to "★". The same applies to the similar case in the display area addition pattern after the loss. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 6-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “◇” is displayed on the left pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and the third decorative symbol 33 (left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In this case, it is not essential to change the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★", but the meaning is that display of the reach aspect is not performed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A. (Ie, after making the player seem to seem to be out of place, the player is made to pay attention to the display of the reach mode in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1 and make him expect it). The same applies to the similar case in the display area addition pattern after the loss.

  In the display area addition pattern 7, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol while the middle symbol is a lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”). And the same symbol as the right symbol ("●"), and in the left symbol, it is a symbol ("A") different from the middle symbol, and in the right symbol, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is both the left symbol and the middle symbol. It shows the case where it is a lost form which is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 7, the additional display area determination data 7-is drawn by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1, the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 7-2, and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determining data 7-3. Be done. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “◇” is displayed on the left pattern of the 3P decorative pattern 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, display of the reach aspect will be made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, and until the third decorative symbol 33 (the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "▲" to "★" and additionally “◇” is displayed on the left pattern and the right pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display region 3Q-4 and the third decorative symbol display region 3Q-5, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the decorative symbol 38 (the decorative symbol 38) is displayed. A big hit can be expected until the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. In this example, by displaying two “◇” on the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, there are two display lines to be displayed as a big hit mode. However, in such a case, it is possible to display only one of “◇” and display a symbol different from “◇” for the other “◇”. Moreover, you may determine by lottery about which symbol "◇" is displayed. Furthermore, as for the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 7-3, as shown in FIG. 160 (b), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from “●” to “★” “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such a decorative pattern, display of a reach aspect will be made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-4, and until the third decorative pattern 33 (right symbol of the decorative pattern 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area additional pattern 8, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol while the middle symbol is the lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”). And the same symbol as the right symbol ("●"), and in the left symbol, is the symbol ("A") different from the right symbol, and in the middle symbol, both the left symbol and the right symbol are the first symbols of the first decorative symbol 31 It shows the case where it is a lost form which is a symbol (“B”) different from (“▲”). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 8, additional display area determination data 8- by lottery based on the additional display area determination random numbers. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 8-2. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the 3D decorative symbol 38. By the change and addition of such a decorative symbol, the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 8-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "▲" to "★" “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of such a decorative symbol, the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit.

  In the display area additional pattern 9, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the middle symbol. The same symbol (“▲”) as in the left symbol, and the symbol (“A”) different from the middle symbol in the left symbol, and in the right symbol, both the left symbol and the middle symbol are the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 ("●") shows a case where it is a lost form which is a different symbol ("B"). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 9, the additional display area determination data 9-is drawn by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is determined to perform either the additional display effect represented by 1 or the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 9-2. As the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect (of the symbol “▲”) is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) You can expect a big hit until the stop is displayed). On the other hand, in the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 9-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (d), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 of the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect (of the symbol “▲”) is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) You can expect a big hit until the stop is displayed).

  In the display area additional pattern 10, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the left symbol, while the middle symbol is the lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”). And the same symbol as the right symbol ("●"), and in the middle symbol, it is the same symbol ("と") as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31, and in the right symbol, it is different from both the left symbol and the middle symbol ( It shows the case where it is a lost mode which is "A"). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such a display area addition pattern 10, the additional display area determination data 10-by lottery based on the additional display area determination random number. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 10-2 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 10-3. Be done. In the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3P decorative symbol 38. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect (of the symbol “▲”) is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) You can expect a big hit until the stop is displayed). In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-2, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "▲" to "★" and additionally “◇” is displayed on the left pattern of the decorative pattern 38 in the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and the third decorative symbol 33 (left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Furthermore, as the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 10-3, as shown in FIG. 160 (e), the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" “◇” is displayed on the left symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P, and “□” is displayed on the middle symbol. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-1, and the third decorative symbol 33 (left symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. In the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, the display of the reach mode (of the symbol "」 ") is made, and the big hit is made until the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. Can be expected. In this example, by displaying two symbols “◇” and “□” on the decorative symbol 38 of the additional display area 3P, the display line serving as the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q. In such a case, only one of the symbols (ie, "◇" or "□") will be displayed, and for the other, a symbol different from that will be displayed. It can be done. Further, which symbol is to be displayed may be determined by lottery (the same applies to the case of the additional display area determination data 11-1 described later).

  In the display area additional pattern 11, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A is the same symbol ("●") in the left symbol and the right symbol. The second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 in the right symbol while the middle symbol is a lost pattern which is the symbol (“▲”). And the same symbol as the right symbol ("●"), and in the middle symbol, the same symbol as the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 ("▲"), and in the left symbol, the symbol is different from both the middle symbol and the right symbol ( It shows the case where it is a lost mode which is "A"). In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are such display area addition patterns 11, the additional display area determination data 11-is drawn by lottery based on the additional display area determination random numbers. It is decided to perform any of the additional display effect represented by 1 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 11-2 and the additional display effect represented by the additional display area determination data 11-3. Be done. As the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-1, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the left symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed from "●" to "★" and the additional display area “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the 3D decorative symbol 38, and “◇” is displayed on the right symbol. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect (of the symbol “▲”) is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) You can expect a big hit until the stop is displayed). In addition, the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and a big hit can be expected until the third decorative symbol 33 (right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. In addition, the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-2 changes the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from “中” to “★” as shown in FIG. 160 (f), and additionally “◇” is displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 in the display area 3P. By the change and addition of such a decorative symbol, the reach aspect is displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-3, and the third decorative symbol 33 (right symbol of the decorative symbol 38) is stopped and displayed. You can expect a big hit. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 160 (f), the additional display effect based on the additional display area determination data 11-3 changes the right symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 from "●" to "★" and additionally “□” is displayed on the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38 of the display area 3P. By changing and adding such decorative symbols, the display of the reach aspect (of the symbol “▲”) is made in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, and the third decorative symbol 33 (the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 38) You can expect a big hit until the stop is displayed).

  In the present embodiment, although a part of the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is changed, the original symbol is replaced with a numeral represented by the symbol “★”, but 2 Three or more symbols may be replaced. In addition, a part or all of the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B may be replaced with a number represented by the symbol "★". Then, it is possible to replace all of the first decorative symbol 31 and all of the second decorative symbol 32 by using up to six numbers represented by the symbol "★", but the symbol "★" so as not to be a big hit mode by the symbol. It is desirable to replace In addition, the number of symbols to be replaced by the symbol “★” and the position of the symbol to be replaced can be determined by lottery. Also, replacement may be performed by two or more different numbers. The present invention is not limited to the display area addition pattern shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, and other patterns can be set, and additional display area determination data (additional display area determination pattern corresponding to each display area addition pattern). Aspects of display effects can be set variously.

[Control of fluctuation operation of decoration pattern]
In the present embodiment, the variation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 (that is, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol) is controlled by the actual mode as shown in FIGS. 161 to 162. It has become.

  In the example of the series of fluctuation operation shown in FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, the first decorative symbol display area 3A for performing variable display and stop display of the first decorative symbol 31 on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3; A second decorative symbol display area 3B for performing variable display and stop display of the two decorative symbols 32 is provided. In addition, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a first start memory display for displaying the number of start memories (hereinafter referred to as "first start memory") related to the first special symbol 221 in the form of marks or indicators. A second start storage display area 3D is provided to display the number of start stores (hereinafter referred to as "second start stores") related to the area 3C and the second special symbol 231 in the form of a mark or an indicator. The first decorative symbol display area 3A is disposed on the upper side of the display screen, and the second decorative symbol display area 3B is disposed below the first decorative symbol display area 3A. The first start storage display area 3C is located below and to the left of the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the second start storage display area 3D is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B and located on the right Be done.

  In addition, a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or stopped is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, and A second special symbol variation state display area 3F is provided to indicate whether the second special symbol 231 corresponding to the two decorative symbols 32 is variably displayed or stopped. For example, variation display is performed in each of these areas When the key is turned on, the corresponding mark is displayed in a lit state, and when the stopped state is displayed, it is displayed in an unlit state. In this example, for the sake of convenience in the drawing, the lighting display of the mark is represented by a black square mark, and the lighting display of the mark is represented by a white square mark. The first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E and the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F are disposed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In this example, the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether or not the first special symbol 221 is variably displayed and the second special symbol 231 are variably displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 Although the second special symbol variation state display area 3F indicating whether or not to be displayed is provided, a display area indicating whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are respectively changing may be provided. You can also.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, first, as shown in FIG. One first starting memory is displayed in the starting memory display area 3C, and one second starting memory is displayed in the second starting memory display area 3D, as shown in FIG. 161 (b). The first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start variable display based on the first start memory and the second start memory. At this time, the first start storage display area 3C and the second start storage display area 3D display the numbers of the first start storage and the second start storage, which are subtracted by one with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol. As a result, in this example, both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are hidden. In addition, at this time, the first decorative symbol 31 corresponds to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the first decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (a). The effect data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 is referred to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. It is assumed that the corresponding effect data 22 is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are both variably displayed by the specific effect pattern as described above, the relationship between the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 A sexually rendered effect (ie, in this example, the display of the first decorative symbol 31 is changed to display the third decorative symbol, and an additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed) is performed. In the case where the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are variably displayed in combination other than the effect pattern as described above, additional display effects of the decorative symbol may be performed. Further, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol may be performed based on the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed instead of the combination of such effect patterns.

  Also, when the variation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is started, it is displayed in the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E and in the second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F. Each square mark changes from white to black, indicating that the first special symbol 221 and the second special symbol 231 are in motion.

  In this example, it is assumed that the first decorative pattern 31 is determined to a specific combination mode (big hit mode) such as "777", and the second decorative pattern 32 is determined to be a missing mode of "773". . This corresponds to the display area additional pattern 4 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 159 (d).

  After the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is performed based on the determined effect data, as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the first decorative symbol display area 3A is not (1) A decorative symbol in which a part of the decorative symbol 31 (left symbol) is changed is displayed, and this is a variation display of the non-reach mode, “5” is displayed on the left symbol, and “7” on the right symbol It is displayed (In addition, even if it is a case where the one part or all part of the 1st decorative symbol 31 is changed about the 1st decorative symbol 31, it is called the 1st decorative symbol 31). That is, the first decorative symbol 31 is the left of the decorative symbol "777" of the first decorative symbol 31 determined based on the additional display region determining data 4-1 in the display region additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). The symbol is changed from “7” to “5” (“●” corresponds to “7” and “★” corresponds to “5” when applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d)) . On the other hand, the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and this is a variation display of the non-reach aspect, “7” is displayed on the left symbol, and “3” is displayed on the right symbol It is done. That is, the second decorative pattern 32 is the same as the decorative pattern "773" of the second decorative pattern 32 determined based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d). As shown in FIG. 159 (d), “●” corresponds to “7” and “A” corresponds to “3”. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and The second special symbol 231 indicates that it is in motion.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (d), in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, based on the additional display area determination data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d), the first decorative pattern The first decorative symbol 31 (decorative symbol "577" in the lost form) obtained as a result of changing 31 is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 (the decorative symbol "773" in the lost form) is displayed. At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and The second special symbol 231 indicates that it is in motion. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative pattern is not in the finalized display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but slightly displayed. It can also be configured to display as shaking (swing fluctuation display). Also, here, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), a message 34 indicating that the current condition is the reach mode below the second decorative symbol display area 3B on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, , A text message such as “Leach !!” is displayed. In this message 34, as described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit It indicates to the player that there is something. Also, according to this message 34, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area such as the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 and the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5 shown in FIG. It is possible to make the player feel that the display is a reach mode with another display line different from 3B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 161 (f), on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P disposed below the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The third decorative pattern 33 is variably displayed. Here, the third decorative symbol 33 is determined based on the additional display area determining data 4-1 in the display area additional pattern 4 of FIG. 159 (d), and is displayed in the additional display area 3P. The left symbol (third decorative symbol display area) of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P as "7" as the middle symbol (the third decorative pattern 33 of the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2) of the decorative symbol 38 “7” is determined as the third decorative symbol 33) of 3Q-5 (when applied to the notation in FIG. 159 (d), “●” corresponds to “7”). At this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol 221 and The second special symbol 231 indicates that it is in motion.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the two third decorative symbols 33 are stopped and displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2, the decorative symbol "777" which is the big hit aspect is stopped and displayed, and in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-5, the decorative symbol "777" which is the big hit aspect is stopped The specific combination aspect in the first decorative symbol 31 to be displayed and before the change is reproduced here. In this example, only the third decorative symbol 33 corresponding to the display line indicating the reach aspect is displaying the symbol “7”, but another third decorative symbol (in the example of FIG. 161, the additional display area A predetermined number may be displayed on the right symbol of the decorative symbol 38 displayed on 3P.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), the third decorative symbol 33 stopped and displayed in the additional display region 3P is not displayed, and the original first decorative symbol 31 is not displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A. The decorative symbol "777" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the stop display of the decorative symbol "773" of the second decorative symbol 32 is maintained. In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It has shown that 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231 are changing. Here, in the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, in order to indicate that the displayed decorative pattern is not in the finalized display state, the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but slightly displayed. It can also be configured to display as shaking (swing fluctuation display).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), it is indicated that the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F has changed from black to white and the second special symbol 231 has stopped. It is shown that the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B is in the determined display state. After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (c), it is shown that the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E changes from black to white and the first special symbol 221 has stopped. It is shown that the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is in the determined display state.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when "777" in which each symbol is aligned with "7" is a decorative symbol, it is a 15R probability variation big hit decision. In addition, when "333" which each pattern is aligned with "3" is a decoration pattern, it is finalized by 8R probability variation big or more, and in the case of a decorative symbol with three figures other than the above, 4R usually becomes big hit or more However, the big hit aspect may be determined by another method without determining the big hit aspect according to the stop indication of such a decorative symbol.

  In the present embodiment, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 stop the left symbol after 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation, and then stop the right symbol after 3 seconds, and the middle symbols are respectively It stops at the time according to the fluctuation time specified by the effect data of the effect pattern determined about the decoration pattern. The effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is effect data 2 in this example, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol 32 is effect data 22 in this example, the fluctuation time Is 50 seconds. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol 31, the left symbol "5" (the symbol changed from "7") stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the right symbol "7" stops 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation It stops and "7" of the middle symbol stops after 60 seconds from the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, for the second decorative symbol 32, the left symbol "7" stops 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the right symbol "3" stops 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the middle symbol "7" changes After 50 seconds from the start (for example, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 start to change simultaneously, they stop 10 seconds earlier than the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, when the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously changed and displayed in the third decorative symbol display area 3Q, The first decorative symbol 31, the second decorative symbol 32, and the third decorative symbol 33 are displayed, whereby the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 can be related. In addition, when the 1st decorative pattern 31 and the 2nd decorative pattern 32 satisfy predetermined conditions, the 3rd decorative pattern is the display area addition pattern (the stop mode of the 1st decorative pattern 31 and the 2nd decorative pattern 32) etc. It is determined based on In addition, even if the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is a big hit, it is changed to perform stop display in the lost mode, the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second In the display area different from the decorative symbol display area 3B (i.e., the third decorative symbol display area 3Q which is another display line), there is a possibility that the reach mode display and the big hit mode stop display may be performed. The expectation that the determination result of the jackpot type is a jackpot can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164, a processing flow of a program executed by the sub CPU 71 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The description of the same or similar steps as those in the fifth embodiment described above will be omitted unless otherwise specified. The process flow of the program executed by the main CPU 60 of the seventh embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Here, in particular, a process flow relating to control of the variation operation of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 shown in FIGS. 161 and 162 will be described.

  The sub CPU 71 performs sub control circuit main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, decorative symbol stop processing, effect pattern change processing, command analysis processing, stop symbol determination processing, decorative symbol forced stop processing, effect pattern determination processing Is configured to perform. The command analysis process is executed as a subroutine of the sub control circuit main process. The decorative symbol stop process and the effect pattern change process are executed as a subroutine of timer interrupt process. The stop symbol determination process, the effect pattern determination process, and the decorative pattern forced stop process are executed as a subroutine of the command analysis process. The command reception interrupt process is the same as that described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
The sub control circuit main processing of the present embodiment is the same as the sub control circuit main processing of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 updates the values of the additional display area determination random number counter as well as updating the values of the effect determination random number counter, the stop symbol determination random number counter, the decorative symbol determination random number counter, etc.

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt process of the present embodiment is similar to the timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. The sub CPU 71 executes the timer update process (S7022), the values stored in the various timers stored in the work RAM 73, such as a display area addition enable timer, a display area addition standby timer, and a display area addition execution timer described later. Update (subtract).

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs control for performing additional display effects of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 in the effect pattern change process (S7024). The effect pattern change processing will be described in detail later.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
The decorative symbol stopping process of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol stopping process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Demonstration pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 163, as the first step of the effect pattern change process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition enable flag is on (S9041). If the display area addition enable flag is off (S9041: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S9044 described later. On the other hand, if the display area addition enable flag is on (S9041: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition enable timer is 0 (S9042). If the display area addition enable timer is not 0 (S9042: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the display area addition enable timer is 0 (S9042: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition enable flag (S9043), and then ends the effect pattern change process.

  If NO in step S9041, it is determined whether the display area addition standby flag is on (S9044). If the display area addition standby flag is off (S9044: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S9053 described later. On the other hand, if the display area addition standby flag is on (S9044: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045). If the display area addition standby timer is not 0 (S9045: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the display area addition standby timer is 0 (S9045: YES), the sub CPU 71 turns off the display area addition standby flag (S9046), turns on the display area addition execution flag (S9047), and specifies the period of the additional display effect A predetermined value is set in the display area addition execution timer (step S9048). Here, for example, the predetermined value set in the display area addition execution timer is a value corresponding to 40 s. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to 1s is set in the display area addition enable timer that defines the grace period until the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to the second decorative symbol 32 next to the specific effect pattern, and a display region addition is made. A value corresponding to 1 s is set to the display area addition waiting timer which waits for the execution of step S. Here, a value corresponding to 40 s is set to the display area addition execution timer. Then, since the shortest variation time in the specific effect pattern is 50s of the specific loss variation effect 1 (effect data 22), the total time 42s of the display area addition enabling timer, the display area addition standby timer, and the display area addition execution timer Is set so that this fluctuation time does not exceed 50 s.

  After step S9048, the sub CPU 71 performs additional display area determination processing (S9049). This additional display area determination processing extracts the additional display area determination random number from the additional display area determination random number counter, refers to the additional display area determination table shown in FIG. 157, and extracts the additional display area determination random number, Based on the display area addition pattern (the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32), the additional display area determination data to be set is determined. As shown in FIG. 157, in this example, different tables are used at the time of big hit and at the time of loss as the additional display area determination table, but they may be the same table. Further, in this example, the additional display area determination data is data for additional display area determination 1-1 according to the additional display area determination random number and the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. 28 types of data 1 to 11-3 are prepared.

  Next, the determined additional display area determination data is set (S9050), and the decorative symbol data to be changed is set based on the set additional display area determination data (S9051), and the display area additional data is set. Then (S9052), the effect pattern change process is ended. The decorative symbol data is data for generating the first decorative symbol 31 (see FIG. 161) to be displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A by changing the first decorative symbol 31 and is shown in FIGS. 159 and 160. Such data is for replacing the symbol (number) represented by the symbol "★" with the existing symbol. Further, the display area addition data is data for additionally displaying the third decorative pattern 33 in the additional display area 3P and making the third decorative pattern 33 non-display and performing an effect immediately before the end of the display area addition state. It is.

  If NO in step S904, it is determined whether the display area addition execution flag is on (S9053). If the display area addition execution flag is off (S9053: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. On the other hand, if the display area addition execution flag is on (S9053: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition execution timer is 0 or not (S9054). If the display area addition execution timer is not 0 (S9054: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern change process. If the display area addition execution timer is 0 (S9054: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets display area addition end data (S9055), turns off the display area addition execution flag (S9056), and ends the effect pattern change processing. . The display area addition end data is data for performing effects until the display area addition state ends. By this data, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is returned to the original first decorative symbol 31, and the display of the third decorative symbol 33 displayed in the additional display area 3P is completed. (End of additional display effect), it will return to the variation display and effect display of the decorative symbol based on the original effect data.

  As described above, in the effect pattern change process, the display area addition enable flag, the display area addition enable timer, the display area addition standby flag, the display area addition standby timer, the display area addition execution flag, and the display area addition execution timer are determined. To control the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. The display area addition enable flag is set on when the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol by the effect pattern determination process of FIG. 164 described later, and when the display area addition enable flag is on, When the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol (that is, the specific effect pattern is determined for the first decorative symbol after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol), the display area addition enable flag Is turned off and the display area addition waiting flag is turned on. However, in this example, after the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative pattern by the display area addition enable timer, the display area addition is performed when the timing for determining the specific effect pattern for the first decorative pattern is more than one second. The standby flag is controlled not to be turned on (display area addition enable flag is reset to off).

  Next, in the effect pattern change process, when the display area addition standby flag is set to ON, it is monitored that the display area addition standby timer (1 second in this example) becomes 0 during that time, and the additional display effect is performed. Wait for the execution of In the effect pattern change process, when the display area addition standby timer becomes 0, the display area addition execution flag is set to ON, and the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is started. The time for the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is managed by the display area addition execution timer (40 seconds in this example).

Command analysis processing
The command analysis process of this embodiment is the same as the command analysis process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 131 and 132. Here, in the special symbol variation state display setting process (S7069, S7071, S7079), the sub CPU 71 displays the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the second one displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. Control is performed on the display of the special symbol variation state display area 3F. That is, when the first special symbol forced stop command or the first special symbol stop command is received, the special symbol variation state display area corresponding to the display area in which the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In (3E, 3F), when the data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol fluctuation state is set and the second special symbol forced stop command or the second special symbol stop command is received, it corresponds to the second special symbol In the special symbol variation state display area (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display area in which the second decorative symbol 32 to be displayed is displayed, data for turning off the mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol variation start command is received, in the special symbol variation state display area (3E, 3F) corresponding to the display area where the first decorative symbol 31 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, In the display area where the second decorative symbol 32 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, data is set to light the mark representing the special symbol fluctuation state, and the second special symbol fluctuation start command is received. In the corresponding special symbol variation state display area (3E, 3F), data for lighting a mark representing the special symbol variation state is set.

[Stop symbol determination process]
The stop symbol determination process of this embodiment is the same as the stop symbol determination process of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Decorative pattern forced stop processing]
The decorative symbol forced stop processing of the present embodiment is the same as the decorative symbol forced stop processing in the fifth embodiment shown in FIG.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 164, as the first step of the effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 71 extracts an effect determination random number from the effect determination random number counter (S 9111). The value of the effect determination random number counter is updated by the random number update process at periodic timing when the sub control circuit main process is executed. Thus, the effect determination random number is a value randomly extracted.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S9112). The variation pattern specification command is determined using a special symbol variation pattern determination table similar to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 62 Are sent to the sub control circuit 7 (sub CPU 71). If the received fluctuation pattern designation command is not h0 to h8 (S9112: NO), the sub CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S9123 described later. If the received variation pattern designation command is h0 to h8 (S9112: YES), the sub CPU 71 refers to the first decorative symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The effect data determined based on the pattern designation command is set in the work RAM 73 (S9113). Based on the effect data set in this manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Further, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h6 to h8) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted such that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the first decorative symbol variation flag on (S9114). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the first decorative symbol variation timer (S9115).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is any of effect data 2, effect data 4 and effect data 14 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S 9116). In this example, as a condition for performing additional display effects of the decorative symbol, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are determined to be performed by the specific effect pattern, so here, It is determined whether the effect pattern of the first decorative symbol 31 is a specific effect pattern. Also, in this example, additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed only when the specific effect pattern determination of the second decorative symbol 32 is made earlier than the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time. There is. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S9116: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S9116: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the display area addition enable flag is on (S9117).

  If the display area addition enable flag is off (S9117: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if the display area addition enable flag is on (S9117: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition enable flag off (S9118), and clears the display area addition enable timer (S9119). Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the display area addition pattern corresponds to patterns 1 to 11 as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 from the stop mode of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32. (S9120). If it does not correspond to any display area addition pattern (S9120: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. On the other hand, if any of the patterns 1 to 11 applies (S9120: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition standby flag on (S9121), and sets a predetermined value in the display area addition standby timer (S9122) ). For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. Here, the display area addition standby flag is set to ON, and the display area addition standby timer is set to a predetermined value, whereby the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is in a standby state only for the time set in the display area addition standby timer. . Whether or not the display area addition standby flag is on is determined in step S9044 of the effect pattern change process shown in FIG. 163 above, where it is determined that the display area addition standby flag is on, and in step S9045 When the display area addition standby timer is determined to be 0, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is started. In this example, although the predetermined value set in the display area addition standby timer is a value corresponding to 1 s, the present invention is not limited to this. In this example, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed only when the specific effect pattern determination of the second decorative symbol 32 is made earlier than the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative symbol 31 for a predetermined time. Although it is constituted, when the specific effect pattern determination of the first decorative symbol 31 is made earlier than the specific effect pattern determination of the second decorative symbol 32, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol may be performed. Further, even when the above conditions are satisfied, control can be performed so as not to perform the display area addition of the decorative symbol according to another predetermined condition.

  In the case of NO at step S9112, the sub CPU 71 refers to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b) at step S9123 and determines based on the effect determination random number and the variation pattern specification command. The effect data thus set is set in the work RAM 73. Based on the effect data set in this manner, variable display of the second decorative symbol 32 and a predetermined effect corresponding thereto are performed. Also, in the variation pattern designation command (for example, h13 to h15) when the determination result is a loss, the rendering data is adjusted so that the decorative symbol to be selected is different depending on whether the rendering pattern is the reach aspect or not ing. That is, if the effect pattern indicates a loss and indicates reach, the decorative symbol for reach change time set in the stop symbol determination process is used, and if the effect pattern indicates a loss, the symbol is set in the stop pattern determination process. The lost change time decorative symbol will be used.

  Next, the sub CPU 71 sets the second decorative symbol variation flag on (S9124). Next, the sub CPU 71 sets a value (variation time) corresponding to the set effect data in the second decoration symbol variation timer (S 9125).

  Next, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the set effect data is the effect data 22 corresponding to the specific effect pattern (S9126). In this example, as a condition for performing additional display effect of the decorative symbol, after it is determined that the effect by the specific effect pattern is executed in the second decorative symbol 32, the specific effect pattern in the first decorative symbol 31 within a predetermined time Since it is determined that the effect according to is performed, it is determined here whether or not the effect pattern of the second decorative symbol is a specific effect pattern. If the effect data does not correspond to the specific effect pattern (S9126: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process. If the effect data corresponds to the specific effect pattern (S9126: YES), the sub CPU 71 sets the display area addition enable flag on (S9127), and sets a predetermined value in the display area addition enable timer (S9128), Thereafter, the effect pattern determination process is ended. For example, the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s. By setting in this manner, the first decorative pattern 31 is set within 1 s after setting the display area addition enable timer (that is, within 1 s after the determination of the specific effect pattern for the second decorative pattern 32 is performed). When the effect pattern of is determined as the specific effect pattern, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed. In this example, although the predetermined value is a value corresponding to 1 s, the present invention is not limited to this, and various times can be set. In this example, the display area addition enable flag is set to ON when the specific effect pattern is determined for the second decorative symbol 32, but a lottery is performed when the specific effect pattern is determined, Only when the player has won the lottery, the display area addition enable flag may be set on to wait for the determination of the specific effect pattern for the first decorative symbol 31.

  Next, as another embodiment according to the present invention, a modification of the liquid crystal display device and a modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned above etc. or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Liquid crystal display device]
FIG. 165 shows a modification of the liquid crystal display device. As shown in FIG. 165, in the present embodiment, in addition to the main liquid crystal display device 3, a sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is provided. The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is disposed with the upper position of the liquid crystal display device 3 as an initial position, and can operate from the initial position until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3. Is configured. Under the predetermined condition, the additional display area 3P is provided on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed at the time of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this example, for the first decorative symbol 31, with reference to the table for determining the first decorative symbol effect pattern shown in FIG. 156 (a), an effect corresponding to the specific big hit fluctuation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns Data 2 is determined, and the second decorative symbol 32 corresponds to the specific loss variation effect 1 which is one of the specific effect patterns with reference to the second decorative symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 156 (b). It is assumed that the effect data 22 to be set is determined. In this example, it is assumed that the first decorative symbol 31 is determined to be the big hit form of “666”, and the second decorative symbol 32 is determined to be the missing form of “567”. This corresponds to the display area additional pattern 2 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 159 (b), but the additional display area determination data 2 shown in FIG. 159 (b) for the additional display effect corresponding thereto. The additional display area determination data other than -1 to 2-3 are used.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (a), first, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A, and the second decorative symbol display region 3B is second The decorative pattern 32 is displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol 31 is obtained by changing the left symbol "6" of the first decorative symbol 31 to "5" and changing the right symbol "6" to "7", as shown in FIG. 165 (b). Then, the left symbol "5" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the second decorative symbol 32 is variably displayed as it is, and in FIG. 165 (b), the left symbol "5" and the right symbol "7" are stopped and displayed. In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It has shown that 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231 are changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (c), the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A is stopped at the decorative symbol "567" and displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B. The displayed second decoration pattern 32 is stopped and displayed with the decoration pattern "567". In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It has shown that 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231 are changing. Here, on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′, a message 34 (for example, a text message such as “reach !!”) indicating that the current situation is the reach mode is displayed. In this message 34, as described above, since the first decorative symbol 31 obtained as a result of changing the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed in the lost mode, there is still a possibility that the determination result of the big hit type is a big hit It indicates to the player that there is something.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), in the additional display area 3P of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the decorative symbol 38 is displayed, and there are three third decorative symbols 33 (of the decorative symbol 38). The left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. In the example of FIGS. 161 and 162, the additional display area 3P is disposed below the second decorative symbol display area 3B on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. However, in this example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ' It is arranged over almost the entire area of the display screen of. Here, the third decorative symbol 33 is not determined according to FIG. 159 (b), but is determined to be “768”. In addition, at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are maintained in black, and the first special symbol is displayed. It has shown that 221 and the 2nd special symbol 231 are changing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (e), the left symbol "7" and the right symbol "8" of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. In the first decorative symbol display area 3A and the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the stop display of the decorative symbol "567" and the decorative symbol "567" is maintained, and in the first special symbol variation state display region 3E. The square mark displayed and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F remain black.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (f), the middle symbol "6" of the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol "768" is displayed stopped in the additional display area 3P. It will be. Also at this time, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F remain black. In this state, the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A, the second decorative symbol 32 displayed in the second decorative symbol display area 3B, and the decorative symbol 38 displayed in the additional display area 3P. In the third embodiment, the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 shown in FIG. 158 (b) (in this example, the additional display area 3P is on the upper side of the first decorative symbol display area 3A). Although it is located, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), assuming that the additional display area 3P is located below the second decorative symbol display area 3B, it is applied to the third decorative symbol display area 3Q-2 ), The display of the reach mode is followed by the stop display of the big hit mode of “666”.

  Here, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ moves until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ′ reaches the upper portion of the liquid crystal display device 3. Then, when the lower part of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'reaches the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 3, as shown in FIG. 165 (g), the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3' is displayed in the additional display area 3P. The decorative symbol 38 which has been erased is erased, and the first decorative symbol 31 displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A changes to the stop display of the decorative symbol "666" on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. In the second decorative symbol display area 3B, the decorative symbol "567" of the second decorative symbol 32 is displayed without change. Thereafter, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved to the original position. In this manner, the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved, and at a predetermined timing, the decorative symbol "666" is a specific combination of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3'. Is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area 3A of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the display contents of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 affect the player by the movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 '. In the first decorative symbol display area 3A, it appears as if the display of the big hit mode was received.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 165 (h), the square mark displayed in the first special symbol variation state display area 3E and the square mark displayed in the second special symbol variation state display area 3F are black to white. Changes to indicate that the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended, and the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol display region 3B displayed in the first decorative symbol display region 3A It will be in the display state which the 2nd decoration pattern 32 displayed on was decided. Although the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, the square mark displayed in the first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E and the second special symbol fluctuation state display When the square mark displayed in the area 3F is black, it indicates that the displayed decorative pattern is not determined in the first decorative symbol display area 3A or the second decorative symbol display area 3B. In order to achieve this, it is possible to configure the decoration pattern not to be a complete stop display, but to be a display that shakes slightly (swing fluctuation display).

  The sub liquid crystal display device 3 'is moved until the lower portion of the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is located below the top of the liquid crystal display device 3, and the sub liquid crystal display device is moved forward of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3. It may be controlled to arrange at least a part of 3 '. In addition, after the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed on both the liquid crystal display device 3 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', the sub liquid crystal display device 3' is the liquid crystal display only when the player operates the operation button or the like. If the player moves in the direction of the device 3 and the player does not operate the operation button etc., such an effect as described above is performed as if the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'affected the liquid crystal display device 3. You may not do this.

  Thus, according to the modification of this embodiment, the additional display area 3P is disposed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device 3 ', and the display pattern of the decorative pattern 38 and the liquid crystal display device 3 displayed there is displayed. A third decorative symbol display area 3Q is formed by the displayed first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32, and the player is made to display a big hit form on the display line according to the display region. A big hit can be expected even if the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are in the lost mode, and the additional display effect including the sub liquid crystal display device 3 'eliminates the monotony of the game, and as a result, , Will lead to the improvement of interest in the game.

  In addition, a predetermined effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device, and a normal symbol, a normal symbol holding number, a special symbol holding number, etc. may be displayed. Thereby, the space for displaying another effect image of the decorative symbol on the display screen of the main liquid crystal display device can be secured more widely. The number of sub liquid crystal display devices may be two or more. The initial position of the sub liquid crystal display device may be in the oblique direction from the main liquid crystal display device, or may be in a positional relationship in which the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are combined.

  FIG. 166 shows a modification of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 166 (a), the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner, and one of the decorative symbols (in this example, the second symbol is displayed) When the decorative symbol 33) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (in this example, "123") which is not the big hit mode, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and it is shown in FIG. As shown, the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. In this example, the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are not determined to be the specific effect pattern, and the additional display effect is performed irrespective of this.

  FIG. 167 shows another modified example of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), while the variable display of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 is being performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, the liquid crystal display device On the lower side of the display screen 3, a message 34 prompting a button operation (for example, a text message such as "Button is pushed !!") is displayed, and when the player operates the operation button, The combination corresponds to the display area addition pattern, and as shown in FIG. 167 (b), the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P.

  FIG. 168 shows another modified example of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display 3 with the decorative symbol "113", a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, a text message such as "Stop with the same symbol !!") Is displayed. Here, as a result of the player operating the operation button (s) so that the first decorative symbol 31 is the same as the decorative symbol of the second decorative symbol 32 being stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol is displayed. When the symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the decorative symbol (for example, "113"), a message indicating that the command has been achieved on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 as shown in FIG. 168 (b) 34 (for example, a text message such as "achievement!") Is displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, but in this case, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, as shown in FIG. 168 (c). The additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. Here, whether or not the first decorative symbol 31 matches the second decorative symbol 32 may be determined according to the operation timing or operation order of the player's operation button or the like, and such an operation It may be determined by other conditions regardless. When determining based on the said other conditions, it can also be determined irrespective of whether the player operated the operation button, and whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with the operation button itself.

  FIG. 169 shows another modified example of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 169 (a), a state in which the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed and the second decorative symbol 32 is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 (for example, In the lower part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3 with the decorative symbol "113" being displayed stop, a message 34 representing an instruction to the player (for example, "draw the lever and stop displaying the A symbol !! Text message such as Here, when the player operates the lever so that the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 becomes the symbol “A”, when the first decorative symbol 31 is stopped and displayed with the symbol “A”, FIG. As shown in b), on the lower side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3, a message 34 indicating that the command has been achieved (for example, a text message such as “achievement !!”) is displayed. Here, both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 are stopped and displayed, but in this case, the combination of these decorative symbols corresponds to the display area addition pattern, as shown in FIG. 169 (c). The additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, and the decorative symbol 38 is displayed in the additional display area 3P. Further, in this example, since the symbol "A" stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol 31 is a symbol that can not be a big hit, it fluctuates again, for example, at the timing when variable display of the decorative symbol 38 is started. Is displayed. Here, whether or not the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol 31 is to be stopped and displayed with the symbol "A" may be determined according to the operation timing of the lever of the player, and such a relationship is related to such operation. Alternatively, it may be determined by other conditions. In the case of determining based on the other conditions, it can be determined regardless of whether the player operates the lever, or whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the lever itself or the like.

  In addition, in the modification shown in the above-mentioned FIGS. 165-169, when the decorative symbol 38 is displayed on the additional display area 3P by the additional display effect of the decorative symbol, about each symbol of the additional display area 3P or the decorative symbol 38 The display period of can be defined in various ways. For example, it may be across variations of a plurality of special symbols, or until the variation of either one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is over, or even if a big hit game is executed Alternatively, the predetermined operation means may be operated by the player.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various design changes can be made.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, the change start of the first decorative symbol 31 based on the first start memory and the change start of the second decorative symbol 32 based on the second start memory are within a predetermined period. The additional display effect of the decorative symbol is performed, triggered by the fact that both the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 satisfying the conditions are determined to be the specific effect pattern, and are performed as such a trigger. Various other conditions can be adopted. For example, if a predetermined lottery (random number lottery or the like) is performed and if this lottery is won, one or both of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 have a big hit variation effect (or a specific loss) In the case of the variable effect), when the big hit information is included in the start memory regarding the special symbol (decorative symbol) for which the variable display is not started, or one of the first decorative symbol 31 and the second decorative symbol 32 or Various timings can be considered, for example, when shifting to a predetermined winning (probability or small hit) after the end of both variable display. Moreover, as a timing which performs an additional display effect of a decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol is fluctuatingly displaying simultaneously, when one decorative symbol fluctuatingly displays, when both decorative symbols stop displaying Etc, various timings can be considered.

  In addition, based on the fact that one of the above-mentioned triggers is established, it is also possible to control to repeat the execution of the additional display effect of the decorative symbol a plurality of times. In addition, even if a decorative symbol corresponding to a normal symbol is provided and it is determined whether or not to execute additional display effects of the decorative symbol based on the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol. Good. Moreover, in the state in which the additional display effect of the decorative symbol is being performed, when the stop display is performed in the big hit mode, it may not be returned to the original state. Furthermore, a first special symbol fluctuation state display area 3E indicating whether the first special symbol 221 corresponding to the first decorative symbol 31 is variably displayed or the stop display is displayed, and a second corresponding to the second decorative symbol 32 The second special symbol fluctuation state display area 3F showing whether the special symbol 231 is displayed being changed or stopped may be shown as each representing a variable display state concerning the decorative symbol, and these special symbol fluctuation state displays It is also possible not to provide the area (3E, 3F).

  One embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and when a plurality of decorative symbols are simultaneously changed and displayed, it is possible to prevent one of the decorative symbols from becoming invisible. The purpose is to provide a machine.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board (e.g., the game board 10 described later) on which game media roll;
A first passage area (for example, a first starting opening 14A described later) provided on the gaming board;
First determining means (for example, to be described later) which determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state to be described later) advantageous to the player based on passage of gaming media through the first passing area. Main CPU 60),
First identification symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device 22 described later) which performs variable display of the first identification symbol according to the determination result of the first determination means;
A second passage area (for example, a second start opening 14B described later) provided on the gaming board;
A second determination unit (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) that determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the passage of gaming media through the second passing area;
Second identification symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 23 to be described later) that performs variable display of the second identification symbol according to the determination result of the second determination means;
A first decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later);
Equipped with
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed,
When it is determined in the first determination means or the second determination means to shift to the specific gaming state which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state, the specific gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state It does not control to the game state which is more advantageous than the game state before occurrence,
One of the first determination means or the second determination means determines that one of the first determination means is to shift to the special game state, and the other determination means is performed while the identification symbol corresponding to the one determination means is changing. When the variation of the identification symbol corresponding to the other determination means determined to shift to the specific gaming state is ended, the stop display is performed in a mode that does not cause the identification symbol corresponding to one determination means to transition to the special gaming state Is possible,
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, a second decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3A 'shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means A third decorative symbol display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device 3B 'shown in FIG. 117 described later) which is a decorative symbol display means different from any of the first decorative symbol display means and the second decorative symbol display means; Equipped with
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are movable to at least a position where the first decorative symbol display means and the game machine overlap from the front (for example, as shown in FIG. 117 described later) Thus, the sub liquid crystal display device 3A 'and the sub liquid crystal display device 3B' can move to a position in front of the shutter combination in a state of covering the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3),
When the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means move to a position overlapping with the first decorative symbol display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the display is made in the first decorative symbol display means The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means can display the decorative symbols that have been displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117 described later, the sub liquid crystal display device 3A ' , The decorative symbol of "777" corresponding to "7 ↓ 7" of the first decorative symbol 31 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 3 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3B '. It is characterized in that it can display the decoration pattern of "676" corresponding to "6 6 6" of the displayed second decoration pattern 32).

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible for a player to easily play a game even when the game has complicated playability by always displaying a clear determination result to the player. Since the display of the decorative symbol moves from the first decorative symbol display means to the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means, movement in the front-rear direction is performed with respect to the gaming machine, and the player is decorated It becomes possible to make an impression using a pattern.

A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 described later)
A game board (e.g., the game board 10 described later) on which game media roll;
A first passage area (for example, a first starting opening 14A described later) provided on the gaming board;
First determining means (for example, to be described later) which determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state to be described later) advantageous to the player based on passage of gaming media through the first passing area. Main CPU 60),
First identification symbol variation pattern storage means (for example, FIG. 81 described later) that stores a plurality of first identification symbol variation patterns having different variation times in which the first identification symbol (for example, the first special symbol 221 described below) is variably displayed. First special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in ~ 83),
A first identification symbol variation pattern determination unit (determining one of a plurality of first identification symbol variation patterns stored in the first identification symbol variation pattern storage unit based on the determination result by the first determination unit For example, a main CPU 60) described later,
First identification symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol display device to be described later) that performs variable display of the first identification symbol based on the first identification symbol variation pattern determined by the first identification symbol variation pattern determination means 22) and
A second passage area (for example, a second start opening 14B described later) provided on the gaming board;
A second determination unit (for example, a main CPU 60 described later) that determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state based on passage of gaming media through the second passing area;
Second identification symbol variation pattern storage means (for example, FIG. 81 described later) that stores a plurality of second identification symbol variation patterns having different variation times in which the second identification symbol (for example, second special symbol 231 described below) is variably displayed. Second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in ~ 83),
Second identification symbol variation pattern determination means (determining any one of the plurality of second identification symbol variation patterns stored in the second identification symbol variation pattern storage means based on the determination result by the second determination means For example, a main CPU 60) described later,
Second identification symbol display means (for example, a second special symbol display device to be described later) that displays the variation of the second identification symbol based on the second identification symbol variation pattern determined by the second identification symbol variation pattern determination means 23) and
While having a first decorative symbol display area for displaying a first decorative symbol (for example, a first decorative symbol 31 described later) corresponding to the first identification symbol, a second decorative symbol (for example, corresponding to the second identification symbol) A decorative symbol display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 3 described later) having a second decorative symbol display area for displaying a second decorative symbol 32 described later;
A first position not covering the second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area, and a second position covering at least a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area A movable member (for example, a shutter member 40 described later) which can be moved to either one of
A first decorative symbol effect corresponding to a plurality of first identification symbol fluctuation patterns stored in the first identification symbol fluctuation pattern storage means and storing a plurality of first decorative symbol effect patterns including fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol Pattern storage means (for example, a table for determining a first decorative symbol effect pattern shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 described later);
First decorative symbol effect pattern determination means (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) for determining the first decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the first identification symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the first identification symbol fluctuation pattern determination means;
A second decorative symbol effect corresponding to a plurality of second identification symbol fluctuation patterns stored in the second identification symbol fluctuation pattern storage means and storing a plurality of second decorative symbol effect patterns including fluctuation display of the second decorative symbol Pattern storage means (for example, a table for determining a second decorative symbol effect pattern shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 described later);
A second decorative symbol effect pattern determination unit (for example, a sub CPU 71 described later) which determines the second decorative symbol effect pattern corresponding to the second identification symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the second identification symbol fluctuation pattern determination unit;
Equipped with
The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be changed and displayed simultaneously, and the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol can be changed and displayed simultaneously,
The decorative symbol display means performs variable display of the first decorative symbol based on the first decorative symbol effect pattern determined by the first decorative symbol effect pattern determining means, and determines the second decorative symbol effect pattern Performing variation display of the second decorative symbol based on the second decorative symbol effect pattern determined by the means;
In the plurality of first decorative symbol effect patterns stored in the first decorative symbol effect pattern storage means, the movable member moves from the first position to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Specific effect patterns displaced to two positions (for example, specific big hit fluctuation effects 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 84 described later, specific reach loss fluctuation effect 1 and specific big hit fluctuation effects 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 86 described later, specific reach loss fluctuation effect 2 ) Is included,
The plurality of second decorative symbol effect patterns stored in the second decorative symbol effect pattern storage means is a special effect pattern in which the fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol is longest (for example, the big hit fluctuation shown in FIG. 84 described later) The effects 8 to 10 mag and the big hit fluctuation effects 25 to 27 mag shown in FIG. 86 described later are included,
The predetermined time that elapses from the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol based on the specific effect pattern to the displacement of the movable member is the longest variation time of the second decorative symbol based on the special effect pattern It is characterized by being longer than time.

  According to this gaming machine, even when the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol simultaneously start variable display, it is possible to prevent the movable member from covering the second decorative symbol.

A game machine according to a preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The first information for determining whether or not the first determination means is to shift to the special gaming state when game media passes through the first passing area, stores a first predetermined number as an upper limit 1 information storage means (for example, a first special symbol holding ball number counter described later),
The second information for determining whether or not the second determination means is to shift to the special gaming state when game media passes through the second passing area, stores a second predetermined number as an upper limit 2 information storage means (for example, second special symbol holding ball number counter described later),
Change between the first state that facilitates the passage of gaming media to the second passing area and the second state that makes it more difficult to pass gaming media to the second passing area than the first state Possible variable members (for example, blade members 143 described later);
Specific gaming state transition control means for performing transition control to a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving gaming state to be described later) in which the variable member is more likely to be in the first state than in the normal gaming state based on establishment of predetermined advantageous conditions. (For example, main CPU 60 described later),
In the specific gaming state, the normal gaming state transition control means (for example, which will be described later) to shift control to the normal gaming state on condition that the number of determinations of the first determination means and the second determination means has reached a predetermined number Main CPU 60),
Equipped with
The first determination means is stored in the first information storage means on the condition that the variation display of the first identification symbol based on the first identification symbol variation pattern is finished in the first identification symbol display means Based on the first information, it is determined whether to shift to the special game state or not,
The second determination means is stored in the second information storage means on the condition that the variation display of the second identification symbol based on the second identification symbol variation pattern is finished in the second identification symbol display means Based on the second information, it is determined whether to shift to the special game state or not,
The predetermined time is a time longer than the calculation time obtained by multiplying the fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol in the special effect pattern by the value obtained by adding 1 to the second predetermined number. It is characterized by certain things.

  According to this gaming machine, when the specific gaming state is ended and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start changing display at the same time, the specific effect as the first decorative symbol effect pattern according to the first decorative symbol Even when the pattern is applied and the second information reaches the second predetermined number which is the upper limit, it is possible to prevent the movable member from covering the second decorative symbol.

A game machine according to another preferred embodiment of the present invention is
Change between the first state that facilitates the passage of gaming media to the second passing area and the second state that makes it more difficult to pass gaming media to the second passing area than the first state Possible variable members (for example, blade members 143 described later);
Specific gaming state transition control means for performing transition control to a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving gaming state to be described later) in which the variable member is more likely to be in the first state than in the normal gaming state based on establishment of predetermined advantageous conditions. (For example, main CPU 60 described later),
Equipped with
The second decorative symbol effect pattern determining means is characterized in that the special effect pattern can be determined in the normal gaming state, and the special effect pattern can not be determined in the specific gaming state.

  According to this gaming machine, since the movable member does not cover the second decorative symbol in the specific gaming state, even if the second information always reaches the second predetermined number which is the upper limit, It is possible to prevent the movable member from covering the second decorative pattern.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing one of the decorative symbols from becoming invisible when the plurality of decorative symbols are simultaneously changed and displayed.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 10 gaming board 14A first starting opening (first passing area)
14B 2nd start opening (2nd passage area)
143 Wing member (variable member)
16A first large winning opening 16B second large winning opening 3 liquid crystal display device (decorative symbol display means)
3A 1st decoration symbol display area 3B 2nd decoration symbol display area 31 1st decoration pattern 32 2nd decoration symbol 22 1st special symbol display device (1st special symbol display means)
23 2nd Special Symbol Display Device (2nd Special Symbol Display Means)
221 1st special symbol (1st identification symbol)
231 second special symbol (second identification symbol)
40 Shutter role (movable member)
5 display decoration member 6 main control circuit 60 main CPU (first determination means, first special symbol variation pattern determination means, second determination means, second special symbol variation pattern determination means, specific game state transition control means, normal gaming state Transition control means)
61 Main ROM (First special symbol variation pattern storage means, second special symbol variation pattern storage means)
62 Main RAM (First Information Storage Means, Second Information Storage Means)
7 sub control circuit 71 sub CPU (first decorative symbol effect pattern determining means, second decorative symbol effect pattern determining means)
72 Program ROM (First Decorative Symbol Effect Pattern Storage Means, Second Decorative Symbol Effect Pattern Storage Means)
73 work RAM

Claims (1)

Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player;
Identification symbol display means for performing variable display of identification symbols according to the determination result of the determination means;
First decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol;
Equipped with
In front of the first decorative symbol display means, a second decorative symbol display means which is a decorative symbol display means different from the first decorative symbol display means, the first decorative symbol display means and the second decorative symbol display means And third decorative symbol display means, which is different from any of the above.
When the second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means are at positions overlapping with the first decorative symbol display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, they are displayed in the first decorative symbol display means The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means can be displayed.
The second decorative symbol display means and the third decorative symbol display means arrange the plurality of decorative symbols displayed in the first decorative symbol display means differently from the display in the first decorative symbol display means Displayed by
When at least one decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first decorative symbol display unit, the second decorative symbol display unit and the third decorative symbol display unit inherit the state of the variable display; A gaming machine characterized by displaying a decorative symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol display means .

Images